590 Series DC Digital Converter: Product Manual

590 Series
DC Digital
Converter
Product Manual
HA467078 Issue 7
Compatible with Version 4.x Software
© Copyright 2007 Parker SSD Drives, a division of Parker Hannifin Ltd.

All rights strictly reserved. No part of this document may be stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form or by any means to persons not employed by a Parker SSD Drives company without written permission
from Parker SSD Drives, a division of Parker Hannifin Ltd . Although every effort has been taken to ensure the
accuracy of this document it may be necessary, without notice, to make amendments or correct omissions.
Parker SSD Drives cannot accept responsibility for damage, injury, or expenses resulting therefrom.
WARRANTY
Parker SSD Drives warrants the goods against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the period of 12 months from the date of delivery on the
terms detailed in Parker SSD Drives Standard Conditions of Sale IA058393C.
Parker SSD Drives reserves the right to change the content and product specification without notice.
Cont.2
Requirements
IMPORTANT: Please read this information BEFORE installing the equipment.
Intended Users
This manual is to be made available to all persons who are required to install, configure or
service equipment described herein, or any other associated operation.
The information given is intended to highlight safety issues, EMC considerations, and to enable
the user to obtain maximum benefit from the equipment.
Complete the following table for future reference detailing how the unit is to be installed and
used.
INSTALLATION DETAILS
Serial Number
(see product label)
Where installed
(for your own
information)
Unit used as a:
(refer to Certification
R Component R Relevant Apparatus
for the Inverter)
Unit fitted:
R Wall-mounted R Enclosure
Application Area
The equipment described is intended for industrial motor speed control utilising AC induction or
AC synchronous machines.
Personnel
Installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment should be carried out by qualified
personnel. A qualified person is someone who is technically competent and familiar with all
safety information and established safety practices; with the installation process, operation and
maintenance of this equipment; and with all the hazards involved.
Product Warnings
Earth/Ground
Caution Caution
Protective
Risk of electric Refer to
Conductor
shock documentation
Terminal
Cont.3
Hazards
DANGER! - Ignoring the following may result in injury
1. This equipment can endanger life by exposure to 5. For measurements use only a meter to IEC 61010 (CAT
rotating machinery and high voltages. III or higher). Always begin using the highest range.
CAT I and CAT II meters must not be used on this
2. The equipment must be permanently earthed due to product.
the high earth leakage current, and the drive motor
6. Allow at least 5 minutes for the drive's capacitors to
must be connected to an appropriate safety earth.
discharge to safe voltage levels (<50V). Use the
specified meter capable of measuring up to 1000V dc &
3. Ensure all incoming supplies are isolated before
ac rms to confirm that less than 50V is present between
working on the equipment. Be aware that there may all power terminals and earth.
be more than one supply connection to the drive.
7. Unless otherwise stated, this product must NOT be
4. There may still be dangerous voltages present at dismantled. In the event of a fault the drive must be
power terminals (motor output, supply input phases, returned. Refer to "Routine Maintenance and Repair".
DC bus and the brake, where fitted) when the motor
is at standstill or is stopped.
WARNING! - Ignoring the following may result in injury or damage to equipment
SAFETY
Where there is conflict between EMC and Safety requirements, personnel safety shall always take precedence.
• Never perform high voltage resistance checks on the • All control and signal terminals are SELV, i.e. protected
wiring without first disconnecting the drive from the by double insulation. Ensure all external wiring is rated
circuit being tested. for the highest system voltage.
• Whilst ensuring ventilation is sufficient, provide • Thermal sensors contained within the motor must have
guarding and /or additional safety systems to at least basic insulation.
prevent injury or damage to equipment. • All exposed metalwork in the Inverter is protected by
• When replacing a drive in an application and before basic insulation and bonded to a safety earth.
returning to use, it is essential that all user defined • RCDs are not recommended for use with this product
parameters for the product’s operation are correctly but, where their use is mandatory, only Type B RCDs
installed. should be used.
EMC
• In a domestic environment this product may cause • This is a product of the restricted sales distribution class
radio interference in which case the user may be according to IEC 61800-3. It is designated as
required to take adequate counter-measures. “professional equipment” as defined in EN61000-3-2.
• This equipment contains electrostatic discharge Permission of the supply authority shall be obtained
(ESD) sensitive parts. Observe static control before connection to the low voltage supply.
precautions when handling, installing and servicing
this product.
CAUTION!
APPLICATION RISK
• The specifications, processes and circuitry described herein are for guidance only and may need to be adapted to the
user’s specific application. We can not guarantee the suitability of the equipment described in this Manual for
individual applications.
RISK ASSESSMENT
Under fault conditions, power loss or unintended operating conditions, the drive may not operate as intended.
In particular:
• Stored energy might not discharge to safe levels • The motor's direction of rotation might not be controlled
as quickly as suggested, and can still be present • The motor speed might not be controlled
even though the drive appears to be switched off
• The motor might be energised
A drive is a component within a drive system that may influence its operation or effects under a fault condition.
Consideration must be given to:
• Stored energy • Supply disconnects • Sequencing logic • Unintended operation
Cont.4
Contents
Contents Page
Chapter 1 GETTING STARTED

Introduction .................................................................................................. 1-1
Equipment Inspection and Storage .............................................................. 1-2
Packaging and Lifting Details ...................................................................... 1-2
About this Manual ........................................................................................ 1-2
Initial Steps .............................................................................................................1-2
How the Manual is Organised .................................................................................1-3
Chapter 2 AN OVERVIEW OF THE CONVERTER

How it Works................................................................................................. 2-1
Component Identification ............................................................................. 2-2
Control Features ........................................................................................... 2-3
Understanding the Product Code ................................................................. 2-4
Chapter 3 INSTALLING THE C ON V E R T E R

Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 3-1
Mounting the Converter...........................................................................................3-2
• Ventilation and Cooling Requirements ...................................................3-2
• AC Line Choke .....................................................................................3-2
Electrical Installation .................................................................................... 3-3
Minimum Connection Requirements .........................................................................3-4
• Protective Earth Connections (PE) ...........................................................3-6
• Power Wiring Connections ....................................................................3-7
•Control Wiring Connections ................................................................3-10
Motor Field Connections........................................................................................3-14
• Internal/External Supply ......................................................................3-14
• Power Board - PCB Reference 385851.................................................3-14
•
Power Board - PCB Reference 385128.................................................3-16
DC Contactor - External VA Sensing.......................................................................3-16
External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation ..............................................................3-17
Earth Fault Monitoring Systems ..............................................................................3-19
Installation Drawings ................................................................................. 3-20
Converter Installation Drawings .............................................................................3-20
External Stack Installation Drawings .......................................................................3-30
Filter Installation Drawings.....................................................................................3-33
AC Line Choke Installation Drawing.......................................................................3-40
590 Capacitor Box ................................................................................................3-41
Cont.5
Contents
Contents Page
Chapter 4 OPERATING THE C ON V E R T E R

Pre-Operation Checks .................................................................................. 4-1
Setting-up the Converter .............................................................................. 4-2
Calibration .............................................................................................................4-2
Switchable Calibration Panel .......................................................................4-2
Analog Tacho Calibration Option Board ......................................................4-3
Microtach/Encoder Feedback Option Board .................................................4-3
Selecting Speed Feedback .......................................................................................4-4
Initial Start-up Routine ................................................................................. 4-5
Performance Adjustment........................................................................................4-11
Current Loop - The Autotune Feature .........................................................4-11
Speed Loop ..............................................................................................4-11
Starting and Stopping Methods.................................................................. 4-12
Stopping Methods .................................................................................................4-12
Normal Stop (C3) .....................................................................................4-13
Program Stop (B8) ....................................................................................4-15
Coast Stop (B9).........................................................................................4-16
Standstill...................................................................................................4-16
The Trip Condition ....................................................................................4-16
Normal Starting Method ........................................................................................4-17
Advanced Starting Methods ...................................................................................4-17
Starting Several Converters Simultaneously.................................................4-17
Jog ..........................................................................................................4-17
Crawl .......................................................................................................4-17
Chapter 5 T H E M A N -M A C H I N E I N TE R F A C E (MMI)
Introducing the MMI ..................................................................................... 5-1
Welcome Screen .........................................................................................5-1
Using the MMI .............................................................................................. 5-1
Control Keys ...........................................................................................................5-1
Keys for Programming the Converter ...........................................................5-1
LED Indications .......................................................................................................5-2
The Menu System .......................................................................................... 5-3
Navigating the Menu System....................................................................................5-3
The Menu System Map ............................................................................................5-4
Changing a Parameter Value...................................................................................5-5
Alarm Message Displays..........................................................................................5-5
Quick Diagnostics ...................................................................................................5-5
Special Key Combinations .......................................................................................5-5
Special Menu Features.................................................................................. 5-5
Cont.6
Contents
Contents Page
Menu Viewing Levels ...............................................................................................5-5

Selecting the Display Language................................................................................5-5
Password Protection ................................................................................................5-6
To Activate Password Protection ...................................................................5-6
To Deactivate Password Protection ...............................................................5-6
To Reactivate Password Protection................................................................5-6
How to Save, Restore and Copy your Settings.............................................. 5-7
Saving Your Application ..........................................................................................5-7
Restoring Saved Settings ..........................................................................................5-7
Copying an Application ...........................................................................................5-7
Chapter 6 PROGRAMMING YOUR APPLICATION

Programming with Block Diagrams ............................................................. 6-1
Modifying a Block Diagram .....................................................................................6-1
Configuration and Parameterisation Modes..................................................6-1
Making and Breaking Links in Configuration Mode.......................................6-1
Programming Rules.....................................................................................6-1
Saving Your Modifications ...........................................................................6-2
Understanding the Function Block Description ..........................................................6-2
MMI Menu Maps.........................................................................................6-2
Hexadecimal Representation of Trips........................................................................6-3
Function Block Descriptions .......................................................................... 6-4
ANALOG INPUTS .......................................................................................6-5
ANALOG OUTPUTS....................................................................................6-7
AUX I/O .....................................................................................................6-8
AUX PORT P2 ...........................................................................................6-10
CALIBRATION...........................................................................................6-11
CURRENT LOOP.......................................................................................6-14
CURRENT PROFILE....................................................................................6-17
DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................6-18
DIAMETER CALC.......................................................................................6-22
DIGITAL INPUTS .......................................................................................6-24
DIGITAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................6-26
FIELD CONTROL ......................................................................................6-27
INHIBIT ALARMS .......................................................................................6-30
JOG/SLACK .............................................................................................6-32
LINK 11 & LINK 12 ...................................................................................6-34
MAIN PORT P1 .........................................................................................6-36
MENUS ....................................................................................................6-37
miniLINK ..................................................................................................6-38
Cont.7
Contents
Contents Page
PID ..........................................................................................................6-39
RAISE/LOWER...........................................................................................6-42
RAMPS .....................................................................................................6-44
SETPOINT SUM 1 .....................................................................................6-48
SETPOINT SUM 2 .....................................................................................6-49
SPEED LOOP ............................................................................................6-51
ADVANCED..............................................................................................6-55
STANDSTILL .............................................................................................6-56
STOP RATES .............................................................................................6-57
SYSTEM PORT P3 ......................................................................................6-59
TAPER CALC. ............................................................................................6-60
TENS+COMP CALC. ................................................................................6-61
TORQUE CALC. .......................................................................................6-63
USER FILTER .............................................................................................6-64
Chapter 7 TRIPS AND FAULT FINDING

Trips .............................................................................................................. 7-1
What Happens when a Trip Occurs..........................................................................7-1
MMI Indications ..........................................................................................7-1
Resetting a Trip Condition........................................................................................7-1
Alarm Messages......................................................................................................7-1
LAST ALARM ...............................................................................................7-2
HEALTH WORD ..........................................................................................7-2
HEALTH STORE...........................................................................................7-2
Using the MMI to Manage Trips ...............................................................................7-2
Trip Messages.............................................................................................7-2
Symbolic Alarm Messages ...........................................................................7-4
Self Test Alarms ..........................................................................................7-5
Setting Trip Conditions ................................................................................7-5
Viewing Trip Conditions ..............................................................................7-5
Inhibiting Alarms.........................................................................................7-5
Fault Finding................................................................................................. 7-6
Test Points...............................................................................................................7-6
Cont.8
Contents
Contents Page
Chapter 8 R O U T I N E M A I N TE N A N C E AND REPAIR

Routine Maintenance.................................................................................... 8-1
Repair ........................................................................................................... 8-1
Saving Your Application Data ..................................................................................8-1
Returning the Unit to Parker SSD Drives....................................................................8-1
Technical Support Checks........................................................................................8-2
Chapter 9 CONTROL LOOPS

Principle of Operation .................................................................................. 9-1
Current Loop ..........................................................................................................9-1
• Manual Tuning .....................................................................................9-2
Speed Loop ............................................................................................................9-4
Field Control...........................................................................................................9-4
• Set-up Notes.........................................................................................9-4
• Current Control ....................................................................................9-5
• Voltage Control ....................................................................................9-5
• Field Weakening...................................................................................9-5
• Standby Field........................................................................................9-5
Chapter 10 P A R A M E T E R S P E C I F I CA T I O N T A B L E
Specification Table: Tag Number Order..................................................... 10-2
Chapter 11 T E CH N I C A L S P E C I F I CA T I O N S
Environmental Details............................................................................................11-1
EMC Compliance..................................................................................................11-1
External AC Supply (RFI) Filters and Line Choke ......................................................11-2
Cabling Requirements for EMC Compliance ...........................................................11-2
Internal Fuses........................................................................................................11-3
External Fuses (European)......................................................................................11-3
Earthing/Safety Details ..........................................................................................11-3
Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit ............................................................................11-4
3-Phase Power Supply Details ................................................................................11-4
Electrical Ratings - Output......................................................................................11-5
Auxiliary Power Supply Details................................................................................11-5
Terminal Definitions (Digital/Analog Inputs & Outputs)............................................11-6
Printed Circuit Board Types ....................................................................................11-7
Power Terminals....................................................................................................11-7
Terminal Information (Power Board).......................................................................11-8
Terminal Information (Control Board)...................................................................11-10
Cont.9
Contents
Contents Page
Terminal Information (Option Boards) ..................................................................11-14

Termination Tightening Torque ............................................................................11-15
Mechanical Details ..............................................................................................11-15
Cooling ..............................................................................................................11-16
Chapter 12 C E R T I F I C A T I O N FOR THE C O N VE R T E R

Requirements for EMC Compliance............................................................. 12-1
Minimising Radiated Emissions ..............................................................................12-1
Earthing Requirements...........................................................................................12-1
Protective Earth (PE) Connections ...............................................................12-1
EMC Earth Connections ............................................................................12-2
Cabling Requirements ...........................................................................................12-2
Planning Cable Runs.................................................................................12-2
Increasing Motor Cable Length..................................................................12-2
EMC Installation Options .......................................................................................12-3
Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class B) ........................................12-3
Star Point Earthing ....................................................................................12-4
Sensitive Equipment ..................................................................................12-5
Requirements for UL Compliance ............................................................... 12-6
Motor Overload Protection ........................................................................12-6
Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection Requirements...................................12-6
Short Circuit Ratings..................................................................................12-6
Field Wiring Temperature Rating................................................................12-7
Operating Ambient Temperature ...............................................................12-7
Field Wiring Terminal Markings .................................................................12-7
Terminal Tightening Torque.......................................................................12-7
Field Grounding Terminals ........................................................................12-7
Field Terminal Kits ....................................................................................12-7
Fuse Replacement Information...................................................................12-7
European Directives and the CE Mark........................................................ 12-8
CE Marking for Low Voltage Directive ....................................................................12-8
CE Marking for EMC - Who is Responsible?............................................................12-8
Legal Requirements for CE Marking ...........................................................12-9
Applying for CE Marking for EMC..............................................................12-9
Which Standards Apply?......................................................................................12-10
Basic and Generic Standards...................................................................12-10
Certificates..........................................................................................................12-12
Cont.10
Contents
Contents Page
Chapter 13 S T A N D A R D AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

Standard Equipment................................................................................... 13-1
Power Board Circuit Descriptions ...........................................................................13-1
590/591 (AH385851U002, U003, U004, U005).......................................13-1
590/591 (AH385621U001) ......................................................................13-5
598/599 Power Board (AH385128U009) ................................................13-10
Heatsink Cooling Fan Connections ......................................................................13-10
Contactor Supply ................................................................................................13-10
Optional Equipment ................................................................................. 13-11
Speed Feedback Option Boards...........................................................................13-11
Microtach Option Board..........................................................................13-12
Wire-Ended Encoder Option Board..........................................................13-12
Tacho Calibration Option Board..............................................................13-12
Combined Tacho and Encoder Feedback .................................................13-13
Communications Option Boards ..........................................................................13-13
Comms Option Board (P1) ......................................................................13-13
Remote 5721 Operator Station ............................................................................13-13
Chapter 14 S E R I A L C O M M U N I C A T I O N S
Main Serial Port (P1) .................................................................................. 14-1
Aux Serial Port (P2)..................................................................................... 14-1
5721 Operator Station ..........................................................................................14-1
System Port (P3).......................................................................................... 14-2
ConfigEd Lite ........................................................................................................14-2
UDP Support.........................................................................................................14-2
UDP Menu Structure..................................................................................14-3
UDP Transfer Procedure ............................................................................14-3
MMI Dump ...............................................................................................14-4
5703 Support .......................................................................................................14-8
Commissioning the 5703/1.......................................................................14-9
Error Codes ............................................................................................... 14-10
ERROR REPORT (EE) ............................................................................................14-10
Chapter 15 T H E D E F A U L T A P P L I C A T I O N
Block Diagrams .......................................................................................... 15-1
Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 1 ..................................................................15-3
Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 2 ..................................................................15-4
Main Block Diagram .............................................................................................15-5
Field Control Block Diagram..................................................................................15-6
Start/Healthy Logic Block Diagram.........................................................................15-7
Functional Block Diagram......................................................................................15-8
Cont.11
605 Frequency Inverter/HA389591/Issue 1
Contents
Contents Page
Cont.12
Getting Started 1-1
GETTING STARTED
1
Introduction
System Design
The 590 Series Converter is designed for use in a suitable enclosure, with associated control
equipment. The unit accepts standard three-phase ac supply voltages in the range 110V to 660V,
depending upon the model, and is suitable for the powering of DC shunt field and permanent
magnet motors, providing controlled dc output voltage and current for armature and field.
All units are designed for simple and economical panel mounting using keyhole slots. Plug-in
control connectors simplify the fitting and removal of the unit to the panel.
Where possible, standard parts are used throughout the range thereby reducing the variety of
spare parts required to maintain a multi-drive system. For example, the same basic control
boards are used in all types of three-phase armature controller regardless of horsepower or
bridge configuration.
The control circuit is totally isolated from the power circuit thus simplifying the interconnection
of controllers within a system and improving operator safety. The coding circuitry adjusts
automatically to accept supply frequencies between 45-65Hz and possesses high immunity to
supply-borne interference. The armature controllers are phase rotation insensitive.
Control and Communications

The Converter is controlled by a 16 bit Microcontroller providing advanced features such as:
• Complex control algorithms which are not achievable by simple analog techniques.
• Software-configurable control circuitry built around standard software blocks.
• Serial link communications with other drives or a PC for advanced process systems.
The integral Man-Machine Interface (MMI), with a two-line 16 character display, is a powerful
diagnostic tool. It provides access to all alarms, inputs and principal software blocks in the
controller, whilst the front panel LED indicators give an immediate status display of the drive,
key inputs and outputs.
Regenerative and Non-Regenerative Models

The motor armature controllers include both regenerative and non-regenerative models:
• Regenerative controllers consist of two fully-controlled thyristor bridges and a field bridge
with full transient and overload protection, together with sophisticated electronic control of
acceleration and deceleration, speed and torque in both directions of rotation.
• Non-regenerative controllers consist of one fully-controlled thyristor bridge and a field
bridge with full transient and overload protection, together with its associated electronic
control circuitry, and provide accurate speed and/or torque control in one selected direction
of rotation.
Field Regulator
A field regulator is fitted as standard. The regulator consists of a full-wave half controlled single
phase thyristor bridge with transient and overload protection. It provides either a fixed voltage
or fixed current source, depending upon the selected mode of operation for constant torque
applications. The field current mode of operation can be further enhanced to provide field
weakening for drive control motors which require extended speed or constant horsepower
control.
590 Series Digital Converter

1-2 Getting Started
Equipment Inspection and Storage

• Check for signs of transit damage
• Check the product code on the rating label conforms to your requirement.
If the unit is not being installed immediately, store the unit in a well-ventilated place away from
high temperatures, humidity, dust, or metal particles.
Refer to Chapter 2: “An Overview of the Converter” to check the rating label/product code.
Refer to Chapter 8: “Routine Maintenance and Repair” for information on returning damaged
goods.
Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - Environmental Details for the storage
temperature.
Packaging and Lifting Details

Caution
The packaging is combustible and, if disposed of in this manner incorrectly, may lead to
the generation of lethal toxic fumes.
Save the packaging in case of return. Improper packaging can result in transit damage.
Use a safe and suitable lifting procedure when moving the drive. Never lift the drive by its
terminal connections. The larger drives are fitted with lifting points.
Prepare a clear, flat surface to receive the drive before attempting to move it. Do not damage
any terminal connections when putting the drive down.
Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - Mechanical Details for unit weights.
About this Manual

This manual is intended for use by the installer, user and programmer of the 590 Converter. It
assumes a reasonable level of understanding in these three disciplines.
Note: Please read all Safety Information before proceeding with the installation and operation
of this unit.
Enter the “Model No” from the rating label into the table at the front of this manual. There is
also a column for you to record your application’s parameter settings in the table in Chapter 10.
It is important that you pass this manual on to any new user of this unit.
This manual is for the following models from the 590 Converter Series:
• Three phase, regenerative, four quadrant armature controllers:
590 - for currents up to 720A
598 - external stack option for currents exceeding 720A
• Three phase non-regenerative, two quadrant armature controllers:
591 - for currents up to 720A
599 - external stack option for currents exceeding 720A
• 590H and 591H (further detail is provided in the separate Addendum manual)
Initial Steps
Use the manual to help you plan the following:
Installation
Know your requirements:
• certification requirements, CE/UL/c-UL conformance
• conformance with local installation requirements
• supply and cabling requirements
Programming (MMI or suitable PC programming tool only)
Getting Started 1-3
Know your application:
• plan your “block diagram programming”
• enter a password to guard against illicit or accidental changes
• learn how to back-up your application data
How the Manual is Organised

The manual is divided into chapters and paragraphs. Page numbering restarts with every
chapter, i.e. 5-3 is Chapter 5, page 3.
Application Block Diagram

You will find this at the rear of the manual. The pages unfold to show a complete block
diagram, this will become your programming tool as you become more familiar with the
software.

1-4 Getting Started

2-1
AN OVERVIEW OF THE CONVERTER
2
1
How it Works
Note: Refer to Chapter 9: “Control Loops” for a more detailed explanation.
In very simple terms, the Converter controls the dc motor with the use of Control Loops - an
inner Current Loop and an outer Speed Loop. These control loops can be seen in the Application
Block Diagram. The block diagram shows all the Converter’s software connections.
Using the Man-Machine Interface (MMI), you can select the control loops to be used by the
Converter to provide either:
• Current Control
• Speed Control (default)
It is usual to supply a Current or Speed Feedback signal to the appropriate loop for more
effective control of the Converter. Current Feedback sensors are built-in, whereas Speed
Feedback is provided directly from the armature sensing circuit (default), or by tachogenerator,
encoder or Microtach connection to the relevant option board.
When in Speed Control, speed increase

you can modify the due to field
performance of the weakening
Converter further by Armature
controlling the motor Voltage 200V
armature voltage
field, i.e. Field Control. Field Current 5.7A remains constant
By weakening the field
current, you can obtain field current
an increase in motor reduced
speed beyond that
normally achievable for
the rated Armature base Speed
speed
Voltage of the dc motor.
The Converter is controlled remotely using digital/analog inputs and outputs. It cannot be
directly stopped or started using the MMI.
A remote 5721 Operator Station can also be connected. This allows you to read and write to
many of the drive’s parameters from outside the cubicle if required.
REMOTE REMOTE
SPEED CONTROL SPEED CONTROL
5721
MMI SPEED SETPOINT SPEED SETPOINT Operator
Station
REMOTE START/STOP REMOTE START/STOP
5721 Operator Station and

Analog/Digital Inputs and Outputs Analog/Digital Inputs and Outputs
By plugging in a COMMS Option Board, the Converter can be linked into a network and
controlled by a PLC/SCADA or other intelligent device.
2-2
Component Identification
18 5 17
1
2
16
Health
Run
DC DIGITAL DRIVE E Start Contactor
ISSUE 4.X Program Stop
M Overcurrent Trip 15
Coast Stop
14
4 7
10
12 13
8
9
6 A+ A- L1 L2 L3
11
Figure 2-1 View of Component Parts (110A model illustrated)
1 Main converter assembly 10 Calibration panel

2 Converter door assembly 11 Busbars - main power input
3 Hinged MMI cover 12 System Port (P3)
4 Hinged terminal cover 13 Auxiliary Serial Port (P2)
5 Field wiring terminals 14 Man-Machine Interface (MMI) keypad
6 Control terminals 15 Status LEDs
7 Control board 16 MMI display
8 Tacho/Encoder/Microtach option board 17 IP20 Top Cover
9 Main Serial Port COMMS option module (P1) 18 IP20 Fan Housing (where fitted)
2-3
Control Features
Control Control Circuits Fully isolated from power circuit (SELV)

Output Control • Fully controlled 3-phase thyristor bridge
• Microprocessor implemented phase control extended
firing range
• For use on 50 or 60Hz supplies with a frequency
compliance range of 45 to 65Hz
• Phase control circuits are phase rotation insensitive
Control Action • Fully digital
• Advanced PI with fully adaptive current loops for
optimum dynamic performance
• Self Tuning Current Loop utilising "Autotune"
algorithm
• Adjustable speed PI with integral defeat
Speed Control • By Armature Voltage feedback with IR compensation
• By Encoder feedback or analog tachogenerator
Speed Range 100 to 1 typical with tachogenerator feedback
Steady State • 0.01 % Encoder Feedback with Digital setpoint
Accuracy (serial link or P3)
• 0.1 % Analog Tach Feedback
• 2 % Voltage Feedback
• Absolute (0.0% error) using QUADRALOC Mk II
digital controller
Note: Long term analog accuracy is subject to
tachogenerator temperature stability.
Adjustments All adjustments in software can be altered by on-board

pushbuttons or via serial communications. An LCD
display provides monitoring of adjustment parameters
and levels, in addition to diagnostic facilities.
Protection • High energy MOVs
• Overcurrent (instantaneous)
• Overcurrent (inverse time)
• Field failure
• Speed feedback failure
• Motor overtemperature
• Thyristor Stack overtemperature (Force ventilated
units)
• Thyristor "Trigger" failure
• Thyristor Snubber Network
• Zero-speed detection
• Standstill logic
• Stall protection
Diagnostics • Fully computerised with first fault latch and
automatic display
• Digital LCD monitoring
• Full diagnostic information available on
RS422/RS485
• LED circuit state indication
Table 2-1 Control Features

2-4
Understanding the Product Code
The unit is fully identified using an alphanumeric code which records how the Converter was
calibrated, and its various settings when despatched from the factory.
The Product Code appears as the “Model No.”. Each block of the Product Code is identified as
below:
Block Variable Description
No.
1 XXXX Generic product
590C : 3 phase 4 quadrant (regenerative) converter up to 720A
591C : 3 phase 2 quadrant (non-regenerative) converter up to 720A
2 XXXX Four identifying the maximum dc output current rating that may be
calibrated for each size of product:
0350 = 35A
0700 = 70A
1100 = 110A
1500 = 150A
1800 = 180A
2700 = 270A
3600 = 360A
4500 = 450A
7200 = 720A
3 X 1 digit identifying the nominal 3 phase ac power, supply voltage;
0 = 110V
1 = 115V
2 = 208V
3 = 220V
4 = 240V
5 = 380V
6 = 415V
7 = 440V
8 = 460V
9 = 480V
A = 500V
4 X 1 digit identifying the auxiliary ac control supply voltage:
0 = 110V
1 = 115V
3 = 220V
4 = 240V
5 X One digit specifying the user interface language.
0 = English
1 = (reserved)
2 = French
3 = German (refer to Customer Services)
4 = Italian (refer to Customer Services)
5 = Spanish (refer to Customer Services)
6 X One character specifying any feedback option installed over and above the
standard features of the product:
0 = Armature Voltage
1 = DC Tacho
2 = 5701 Plastic Fibre Microtach
3 = Wire-ended Encoder
4 = 5901 Glass Fibre Microtach
7 X One character specifying the communications protocol and its hardware
implementation method:
0 = No serial link
1 = Fitted RS485 serial link
2 = PROFIBUS (Version 1) - compatible with existing products
3 = PROFIBUS (Version 2) - preferred version
2-5
Block Variable Description
No.
8 XX Two characters specifying special options (hardware):
00 = No special options
01 to 99 = Documented special options
9 XXX Three characters specifying special options (software):
000 = No special options
001 to 999 = Documented special options
2-6
Installing the Converter 3-1
INSTALLING THE CONVERTER
3
IMPORTANT: Read Chapter 12: “Certification for the Converter” before installing this unit.
Refer to Installation Drawings, page 3- 20 for further information.
24H 25H
Mechanical Installation
D
D
C D C C
E1 E1 E1
B B B
A A A
35A - 70A 110A - 150A 180A - 270A
D
D
D
C
C C
E1
E2 B
E1 B E1 B
E1
A
A A
360A 450A * 720A - 800A *

* Cooling fan assemblies not shown
Current Rating (A) Model Overall Dimensions Fixing Centres

A B C D E1 E2
35 - 70 590D/591D 250 415 180 200 400 -
110 - 150 590D/591D 250 445 180 200 400 -
180 590D/591D 250 555 180 200 400 -
270 590D/591D 300 500 210 200 400 -
360 & 450 590D/591D 322 705 252 200 600 -
720 & 800 590D/591D 370 930 330 300 133 400
Dimensions are in millimetres
590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

3-2 Installing the Converter
Mounting the Converter
General installation details are given below for mounting the Converter, however, if you are
installing the unit with an EMC filter refer to “ External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation”,
26H
page 3- 17.
27H
Mount the unit vertically on a solid, flat, vertical surface. It is mounted using bolts or screws
into four fixing points (keyhole slots). The design allows the use of 100mm grid fixing.
It must be mounted inside a suitable cubicle. To comply with the European safety standards
VDE 0160 (1994)/EN50178 (1998), the cubicle must require a tool for opening.
Ventilation and Cooling Requirements

Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - Cooling.
The Converter gives off heat in normal operation and must therefore be mounted to allow the
free flow of air through the air entries and exits. Maintain the minimum air clearances given on
the drawings to ensure that heat generated by other adjacent equipment is not transmitted to the
Converter, be aware that other equipment may have its own clearance requirements. When
mounting two or more 590’s together, these clearances are cumulative.
Ensure that the mounting surface is normally cool.
Refer to Chapter 13: “Standard and Optional Equipment” - Heatsink Cooling Fan Connections
for fan connection details.
AC Line Choke
We recommend that you always use the specified ac line choke with the Converter
to provide a known supply impedance for effective operation of the thyristor transient
suppression circuits.
Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - External AC Supply (RFI) Filters and Line
Choke for selection details.

Electrical Installation
IMPORTANT: Please read the Safety Information on page Cont. 3 & 4 before proceeding.
WARNING!
Ensure that all wiring is electrically isolated and cannot be made “live”
unintentionally by other personnel.
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” for additional Cabling Requirements and
Terminal Block Wire Sizes.
Cables are considered to be electrically sensitive, clean or noisy. You should already have
planned your cable routes with respect to segregating these cables for EMC compliance.
If not, refer to Chapter 12: “Certification for the Converter”.
signal/control cable
(sensitive)
(noisy)
power
fuse or suitable supply field cable
circuit breaker cable external 590
ac contactor choke converter (noisy)
(RCD not (clean) filter
recommended) motor
motor cable
Figure 3-1 Cabling Requirements
If the controller is to be operating in a regenerating mode for extended periods acting as a load
generator for another machine, it is advisable to fit additional protection in the armature circuit.
A dc fuse or high speed circuit breaker will provide this protection. If in doubt, contact Parker
SSD Drives.
Cable Gland Requirements

Use a metal gland to metal cable gland
connect to the cubicle 1 rubber grommet
2
backplate, near the
VSD (variable speed
drive). It must be
capable of securing a
360 degree screened
connection to give
EMC compliance. A metal gland must
360 degree screened have 360 degree
screened connectio
connection can be rubber for EMC complianc
achieved as shown. grommet
PE power wiring
We suggest a rubber International to motor
grommet should be grounding symbol
fitted on holes where a M for example
PE Protective Earth
cable gland is not used.
Figure 3-2 Cable and Screen Fixings
Figure 3-3 360 Degree Screened Connection

Minimum Connection Requirements
Note: Because of the complexity of showing all possible configurations, this Chapter deals only
with a `general purpose’ operation as a basic speed controller. Special wiring options
usually form part of a customer-specific system and connection details will be provided
separately.
The circuit diagram over the page uses bold lines to show the MINIMUM
minimum connection requirements for operating the Converter. CONNECTION
REQUIREMENT
These connection details are highlighted 1 to 9 in the following text
with the symbol opposite. The remaining connection details are not
necessary for a “quick start-up”.
The Converter is using the default Armature Voltage feedback when following the
`minimum connection’ instructions.
IMPORTANT: Indicator lamps, annunciators, etc., for "Drive On" condition should be switched by an
auxiliary contactor of the main contactor, not by the controller auxiliary relay.
To avoid damaging the drive NEVER carry out high voltage resistance or dielectric
strength tests without first completely disconnecting the drive from the circuit being tested.
• Power cables must have a minimum rating of 1.1 x full load current. (1.25 x FLC when
required to comply with UL requirements).
• All incoming main AC power supply connections must be protected with high speed
semiconductor fuses. Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” for fuse information.
• The External AC Supply EMC Filter must only be fitted on the mains side of the contactor.

AC FIELD
SUPPLY 3 PHASE
SUPPLY
AUXILIARY PROTECTIVE
SUPPLY HIGH SPEED EARTH
FUSES
MAIN SERIAL PORT (P1)
RS485 LINK FILTER
OPTIONAL

EMERGENCY
ENABLE START START
STOP CON
/RUN CONTACTOR
RELAY
AC LINE CHOKE
SIGNAL 0V STAR POINT EARTH
NEAR DRIVE
A1 B9 B8 C5 C3 C9 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D1 D2 D7 D8 D6 D5 L1 L2 L3 PE
USE INTERNAL
590 CONTROLLER * * * FIELD CONNECTION
FOR EMC COMPLIANCE
A2 A3 A8 B4 A4 B3 A6 B5 B6 B7 C1 C2 C1 F1 C9 G4/G2 G3/G1 G5 G6 D3 D4 PE A- A+
SPEED SETPOINT No. 1
SPEED SETPOINT No. 2/ RL S

CURRENT DEMAND
RL S
TOTAL SETPOINT
RL S
10K ZERO DRIVE PE

SPEED READY
SET DRIVE + M +
SPEED HEALTHY MICROTACH
THERMISTOR TACHO/ENCODER FIELD ARMATURE
Figure 3-4 Minimum Connection Requirements (`general purpose’ configuration)

SELECT FEEDBACK TYPE
Installing the Converter
FROM MMI
3-5
Protective Earth Connections (PE)
1
3 PHASE MINIMUM
SUPPLY CONNECTION
REQUIREMENT
PROTECTIVE
HIGH SPEED EARTH
FUSES
FILTER
OPTIONAL
CON START
CONTACTOR
AC LINE CHOKE
STAR POINT EARTH
NEAR DRIVE
D1 D2 D7 D8 D6 D5 L1 L2 L3 PE
* FIELD
USE INTERNAL
* * CONNECTION
FOR EMC COMPLIANCE
C9 G4/G2G3/G1 G5 G6 D3 D4 PE A- A+
PE
+ M +
FIELD ARMATURE
IMPORTANT: The VSD and filter (if fitted) must be permanently earthed. Each conductor used for
permanent earthing must individually meet the requirements for a protective earth
conductor.
For installations to EN 60204 in Europe:
• For permanent earthing, the converter requires either two individual incoming protective
earth conductors (<10mm² cross-section), or one conductor (≥10mm² cross-section)
connected to an independent protective earth/ground point near the drive.
• Run the motor protective earth/ground connection in parallel with the motor supply
conductors, ideally in the same conduit/screen/armour, and connect to an independent
protective earth/ground point near the drive.
• Connect the drive to the independent earth/ground point.
Refer to Chapter 12: “Certification for the Converter” - Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted,
Class B).
NOTE: The 720/800A chassis requires two individual incoming protective earth conductors to
the filter using the two M8 terminals provided. BOTH MUST BE CONNECTED TO
PROTECTIVE EARTH.
Protect the incoming mains supply, detailed in Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - Power
Details, using a suitable fuse or circuit breaker (a circuit breaker, e.g. RCD, ELCB, GFCI, is not
recommended, refer to “ Earth Fault Monitoring Systems”, page 3- 19.)
28H 29H

Power Wiring Connections
WARNING!
Power terminals carry electrical voltage which can be lethal. Never work on any
control equipment or motors without first removing all power supplies from the
equipment.
3-Phase Contactor (D5, D6)

2
MINIMUM
A 3-phase contactor should be connected in the CONNECTION
REQUIREMENT
main ac power supply connections with a
rating suitable (AC1) for the controller
3 PHASE
concerned.
SUPPLY
The contactor does not switch current and is
primarily for disconnection and sequencing of
the power bridge. The main contactor must be HIGH SPEED
energised directly from the controller by FUSES
connecting the coil to terminals D5 (Line) and
FILTER
D6 (Neutral). No additional series contacts or
OPTIONAL
switches are permitted since they will interfere
with the sequencing of the controller and
cause unreliability and possible failure. CON START
CONTACTOR
Note: If the 3-phase contactor has a coil with an AC LINE CHOKE

inrush greater than 3A, a slave relay must
be used to drive the contactor coil. The STAR
NEA
contactor and slave relay (if required) must
have coil voltages compatible with the 8 D6 D5 L1 L2 L3 PE
controller auxiliary supply voltage. * FIE
US
A dc contactor can be used but the sequencing must be adjusted to accommodate its
use, an auxiliary normally open volt-free contact of the contactor must be connected in
series with the "enable" input C5 to disable the drive until after the contactor is closed.
3-Phase Supply, AC Line Choke (L1, L2, L3)
3
The main ac power is connected to busbar terminals L1, L2 and L3, there MINIMUM
CONNECTION
is no specific phase connection to these three terminals as the controller is REQUIREMENT
phase rotation independent. The connections must be made via the correct
high speed semiconductor fuses, the main 3 PHASE
contactor and the ac line choke. SUPPLY
IMPORTANT: If a motor becomes completely short-circuited,

the current trip (OVER I TRIP) will not protect HIGH SPEED
the Converter. Always provide high-speed FUSES
thyristor fusing to protect the thyristor stack in
FILTER
the case of direct output short circuits.
OPTIONAL
Fit a 3-phase ac line choke in series with the incoming
main 3-phase ac power supply. (Parker SSD START
CON
Drives stock a series of chokes suitable for this CONTACTOR
duty, mechanically designed to connect directly to
the controller ac supply terminals.) The choke AC LINE CHOKE
should be connected between the controller and
STA
the ac contactor for optimum protection and safety NEA
(refer to drawing HG386828C).
D6 D5 L1 L2 L3 PE
The choice of ac or dc contactors is a user preference. * US
Parker SSD Drives prefers ac contactors as they isolate the converter and motor when not in use.
The only restriction on the use of a dc contactor is that an interlocking contact should be
provided into the Enable input.

Auxiliary Supply (D7, D8)
4
MINIMUM
Connect the auxiliary or control supply (single phase 50/60Hz) CONNECTION
REQUIREMENT
to terminals D7 (Neutral) and D8 (Line) with suitable external
fuse protection. The steady state current absorbed by the
controller is nominal, the external fuse is determined chiefly by considering the contactor
holding VA and the controller cooling fans. AUXILIARY
SUPPLY
D1 D2 D7 D8 D6
* *
Field (D3, D4)
5
Connect the motor field (-) to terminal D3 and field (+) MINIMUM
CONNECTION
to terminal D4. If the motor has no field connections, is REQUIREMENT
a permanent magnet motor, or if the field is derived
externally, you must inhibit the FIELD ENABLE
parameter.
2 B1 D3 D4 PE A- A+
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 FIELD CONTROL
FIELD ENABLE
+
FIELD
Motor Armature (A+, A-)

The motor armature is connected to busbar terminals A+ and A-.
6
MINIMUM
If a DC contactor is used the poles should be interposed between CONNECTION
REQUIREMENT
the controller terminals and the motor terminals.
Note: When the controller is operating in a regenerating mode for PE A- A+
extended periods acting as a load generator for another
machine, it is advisable to fit additional protection in the
armature circuit. A DC fuse or a high speed circuit breaker will
provide this protection, if in doubt consult the Parker SSD
Drives Engineering Department.
PE
M
ARMATURE

External AC Field (D1, D2)
If an external field supply is required to AC FIELD
the controller for application reasons, SUPPLY
connect this supply to terminals D1 and
D2. The magnitude of this voltage is
determined by the desired field voltage.
The supply must be protected externally
with suitable fuses. Always derive the
supply from the Red and Yellow phases
* FIELD
USE INTERNAL
CONNECTION
FOR EMC COMPLIANCE
of the main power supply, with the Red
phase connected to terminal D1 and the
Yellow phase to terminal D2. H6 D1 D2 D7 D8 D6 D5 L1 L2
* *
IMPORTANT: It is important that connection of the controller and the external field supply is consistent
when using an externally supplied field regulator. The supply must be derived from L1
(Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly or indirectly through a transformer. L1 must be
connected to D1, and L2 connected to D2.
To change the controller from an internal to an external field type refer to Motor Field
30H
Connections, page 3- 14.31H

Control Wiring Connections
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” for Control Terminal information.
• Use screened control cables to comply with EMC requirements.
• Control wiring must have a minimum cross-section area of 0.75mm2 (square millimetre).
• Feed the control cables into the Converter and connect to the control terminals. Refer to the
connection label on the inside of the hinged terminal cover. Close the terminal cover.
IMPORTANT: All connections made to terminal blocks A, B and C must be isolated signal voltages.
If in doubt about the connection of the DC motor to the controller check with Parker SSD
Drives Engineering Department.
Setpoint Ramp Input (A4, A6, B3, B4)

7
MINIMUM
CONNECTION
For normal operation the speed demand signal is connected to the REQUIREMENT
"Setpoint Ramp Input", terminal A4 (Analog I/P3). This input is
scaled so that:
+10V input = maximum forward speed demand (+100%) A8 B4 A4 B3 A6
- 10V input = maximum reverse speed demand (-100%)
The speed demand signal can be generated by connecting the two ends
of an external 10K potentiometer to the +10V reference terminal
B3 and -10V reference terminal B4, the wiper of the potentiometer
being connected to the "Setpoint Ramp Input" as the speed
reference.
The main current limit is adjustable by means of the MAIN 10K
CURR. LIMIT parameter [Tag No. 15]. For normal operation of SET
the main current limit, Terminal A6 should be connected to the SPEED
+10V reference, Terminal B3, and the CURR. LIMIT/SCALER
should be set to 200%. This allows the MAIN CURR. LIMIT MMI Menu Map
parameter to adjust the current limit between 0 and 200% full load 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
current. If external control of the main current limit is required, a 10K
potentiometer connected between Terminal B3 (+10V Ref) and 2 CURRENT LOOP
Terminal B1(0V), with the wiper connected to Terminal A6 (Analog CURR. LIMIT/SCALER
I/P5) gives 0 to 200% of full load current provided that MAIN MAIN CURR. LIMIT
CURR. LIMIT and CUR. LIMIT/SCALER are set to 200%.
SIGNAL 0V
Signal 0V (A1)
This is the common reference point
for all analog signals used in the drive. A1 B9 B8 C5 C3 C
For non-reversing applications and 2

quadrant controller (591 and 599), the A2 A3 A8 B4 A4 B3 A6
speed demand only needs to operate
between 0V and +10V, the anti-
SPEED SETPOINT No. 1
clockwise end of the potentiometer
should then be connected to Terminal SPEED SETPOINT No. 2/
CURRENT DEMAND
A1 (0V).
Speed Setpoint No. 1 (A2)

Terminal A2 (Analog Input 1) is a
direct speed demand by-passing the
10K
"Setpoint Ramp Generator", and SET
should be used if direct control is SPEED
required.
Speed Setpoint No. 2 / Current Demand (A3)

Terminal A3 (Analog Input 2) is a dual function terminal (either "Speed Setpoint No. 2" or
"Current Demand") as selected by mode switch control "Current Demand Isolate", Terminal C8.
As a speed setpoint, it can be used in the same way as Terminal A2.
If more than one speed setpoint is used they are additive.
Thermistor (C1, C2)
The motor temperature alarm (THERMISTOR) cannot be inhibited
8
MINIMUM
in software. Terminals C1 and C2 must be linked if sensors are not CONNECTION
REQUIREMENT
fitted.
We recommend that you protect the dc motor against overtemperature by
C1 C2 G4 F1
the use of temperature sensitive resistors or switches in the field and
interpole windings of the machine.
If the motor is fitted with over-temperature sensing devices such as
thermostats, microtherms or PTC thermistors, these should be connected
(in series) between terminals C1 and C2. Thermistors must have a
combined working resistance of 200 Ohms or less, rising to 2000 Ohms at
over-temperature. These thermistors are classified by IEC34-II as Mark THERMISTOR
A.
• Temperature sensitive resistors have a low resistance (typically 100 Ohms) up to a reference
temperature (typically 125°C), above this the resistance rises rapidly to greater than 2000
Ohms. The controller’s thermistor alarm will activate at 1800 Ohms.
Temperature switches are usually normally closed, and open at approximately 105°C. The
thermistor alarm is latched in software and must be reset by re-starting the Converter.
Enable, Start/Run, Emergency Stop Relay (B8, B9, C3, C5, C9)
Terminal C5 (Enable) must be connected to Terminal C9 (+24V) in
9
MINIMUM
CONNECTION
order to allow the drive to run. REQUIREMENT
Start
The basic run/start sequence of the controller
is provided by Terminal C3 (Start/Run),
EMERGENCY
although other safeguards for extra protection STOP
are provided by Terminal B8 (Program Stop) RELAY
and Terminal B9 (Coast Stop).
START
ENABLE /RUN
Assuming that the Program Stop and Coast
Stop terminals are held TRUE, then a single
contact connected between Terminal C9
(+24V) and Terminal C3 (Start/Run) when
closed will cause the controller to energise
A1 B9 B8 C5 C3 C9
the Main Contactor and, provided Terminal
C5 (Enable) is also TRUE, will run the
associated DC motor.
When the single contact to Terminal C3 (Start/Run) is opened, the controller will decelerate the
motor to zero speed at a rate determined by the STOP TIME parameter’s value and the MAIN
CURR. LIMIT value. Refer to Chapter 6: “Application Programming” - STOP RATES for
further information.
Note: The Enable input is useful to inhibit the drive without opening the main contactor,
however, it is not a safe mode of operation as the drive dc output is only reduced to
zero. If the equipment controlled by the drive is to be serviced, then this method should
be avoided and the drive disabled and isolated.
A regenerative drive can be stopped using a Normal Stop, a Program Stop, or an
Emergency Stop, as described below. However, a non-regenerative drive can only be made
to stop faster than friction and loading will allow by Dynamic Braking.
Normal Stop
If the +24V is removed from Terminal C3 whilst the drive is controlling the motor under "Run"
conditions, the controller will cause the motor to decelerate rapidly to rest at a rate determined
by STOP LIMIT, STOP TIME and CURR. LIMIT.
Program Stop

If the +24V is removed from Terminal B8 whilst the drive is controlling the motor under "Run"
conditions, the controller will cause the motor to decelerate rapidly to rest at a rate determined
by PROG STOP I LIM, PROG STOP LIMIT and PROG STOP TIME. If the signal is re-
applied to Terminal B8, the motor remains stationary until a new Start command is applied to
Terminal C3 (Start/Run).
Emergency Stop
Additional terminals, Terminal B8 (Program Stop) and Terminal B9 (Coast Stop), provide extra
facilities for the control of the regenerative controller:
• Terminal B9 (Coast Stop) must be held at +24V to allow closure of the main contactor, the
connection provides the power supply to allow the electronics to operate the auxiliary relay
and hence the main contactor.
Connect Terminal B9 (Coast Stop) to Terminal C9 (+24V) via a normally open contact of an
"emergency" stop relay. The emergency stop relay should not be part of the normal
sequencing of the system, which is implemented via the Start contacts, but is a relay which
can be operated in exceptional circumstances where human safety is of paramount
importance.
• Terminal B8 (Program Stop) provides a facility for regenerative braking on a 4 Quadrant

drive (590 and 598).
Zero Speed, Drive Healthy, Drive Ready (B5, B6, B7)

These digital output
terminals provide a EMERGENCY
+24V dc output STOP
RELAY
signal under certain
conditions. This START
ENABLE
allows for the /RUN
connection of relays
which, in
conjunction with the
Enable, Start/Run
and Emergency Stop A1 B9 B8 C5 C3 C9 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6
relay, can be used to 590 CONTROLLER

enhance the safe
A2 A3 A8 B4 A4 B3 A6 B5 B6 B7 C1 C2
starting and stopping
of the controller.
These are RL S
configurable outputs
and can be used as RL S
required in the RL S
control system
design, i.e. cubicle
ZERO DRIVE
door lamps,
SPEED READY
connection to a
DRIVE
suitable PLC. HEALTHY THERMISTOR
(The diagram shows a simple default configuration).

MAIN SERIAL PORT (P1)
RS485 Link (H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6) RS485 LINK
These terminals are found on the plug-in COMMS
Option Board. The board, when fitted to each unit, allows
converters to be linked together to form a network.
Refer to the RS485 Communications Interface Technical
Manual supplied with the option board.
C9 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 D1
*
Analog Tachogenerator (G1, G2, G3, G4)
Refer to Chapter 13: “Standard and Optional Equipment” -
3 G2 G1 3 G4 G3
Optional Equipment for further information.
An Analog Tachogenerator is connected to the Converter using
a screened twisted pair cable throughout its entire length to
provide speed feedback via the Tacho Calibration Option
Board. This provides facility for an AC or DC tachogenerator.
The screen is grounded or earthed only at the drive end, any
other grounding arrangement may cause problems.
Terminals G1 and G2 are for AC tacho connections.
+
Terminals G3 and G4 are for DC tacho connections. G G
Note: The speed loop is set-up for an analog tacho by the SPEED
FBK SELECT parameter in the SPEED LOOP function block. AC TACHO DC TACHO
Select ANALOG TACH for this parameter.

If an AC tachogenerator is used the output is rectified to produce the ac feedback to the
speed loop. Consequently, the controller can only be used with a positive setpoint.
Refer to Chapter 4: “Operating the Converter” for set-up information.
Microtach (F1, C1, C9)

Refer to Chapter 13: “Standard and Optional Equipment” - Optional C2 C1 F1 C9 G
Equipment for further information.
The Parker SSD Drives MICROTACH is available in two versions:
• 5701 Plastic Fibre Microtach
• 5901 Glass Fibre Microtach
A Microtach can be connected to provide speed feedback via the
Microtach Option Board. using the international standard “ST” fibre
optic system.
F1 is the fibre optic receiver input socket. Terminals C9 (+24V dc) and
C1 (0V) are used to provide the supply and return respectively. MICROTACH
Note: The speed loop is set-up for the Microtach by the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter in the
SPEED LOOP function block. Select ENCODER for this parameter.
Maximum Microtach frequency 50kHz, i.e. with a 1000 lines per revolution Microtach, the
motor speed cannot exceed 3000 rpm.
For specification and connection information refer to Parker SSD Drives or the appropriate
Technical Manual.
Wire-Ended Encoder (G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G6)

Refer to Chapter 13: “Standard and Optional Equipment” 2 F1 G4 G3 G2 G1 G5 G6
- Optional Equipment for further information.
• The wire-ended encoder is connected to the Converter
using a screened cable throughout its entire length to
provide speed feedback.
Terminals G1 (0V) and G2 (+24V dc) are the return
and supply respectively.
Note: The speed loop is set-up for the Encoder by the
SPEED FBK SELECT parameter in the SPEED LOOP
function block. Select ENCODER for this parameter.
ENCODER
Maximum Encoder frequency 100kHz, i.e. with a 1000
lines per revolution encoder, the motor speed cannot exceed 6000 rpm.
For specification and connection information refer to Parker SSD Drives or the appropriate
Technical Manual.

Motor Field Connections
The FIELD CONTROL function block controls the motor field. The FLD CTRL MODE IS
parameter allows you to select either Voltage or Current Control mode.
• In Voltage Control mode, the RATIO OUT/IN parameter is used to scale the motor field
output voltage as a percentage of the input supply voltage.
• In Current Control mode, the SETPOINT parameter is used to set an absolute motor field
output current, expressed as a percentage of the calibrated field current (IF CAL).
Internal/External Supply
The internal motor field is more widely used, however, there is provision on the Control Board
for an external motor field supply to be connected (perhaps for where the field voltage is greater
than the input voltage and therefore not attainable, or where the motor field is switched
separately for convenience).
Note: For information about the following power boards refer to Chapter 11: “Technical
Specifications” - Power Board Types, and Terminal Information (Power Board).
Power Board - PCB Reference 385851

This power board (printed with the above number) can be altered for use with either an internal
or external motor field supply:
Internal Motor Field (default for this board)
Terminals D3 and D4, the motor field outputs, are energised when the 3-phase supply to
L1/L2/L3 is energised and the internal motor field is used. Terminals D1 and D2 are not
energised. The internal motor field supply is fused by the 10A fuses, FS2 & FS3.
External Motor Field Connections
Terminals D1 and D2 on the Power Board Yellow POWER BOARD AH385851
can be used for an external ac supply
connection for the Motor Field Supply. D1 D2 D3 D4
A simple re-wiring procedure disconnects F8

the internal motor field supply and prepares Red
terminals D1 and D2 for the external ac F19 F18
supply connection.
F16
You should provide suitably rated external,
fast-acting semi-conductor fusing, to a
maximum of 10A.
Re-Wiring Procedure
WARNING!
Isolate the drive.
1. Loosen the control board fixing screws (2 off) and position the control board to allow access
to the power board.
2. Remove the red link from the Faston connector “F16” on the left-hand side of the board and
connect it to staging post “F19”, located below terminal D1.
3. Remove the yellow link wire from the Faston connector “F8” on the left-hand side of the
board and connect it to staging post “F18”, located below terminal D2.
Caution
When using an external ac input it is important to have the correct phase relationship on
the terminals. The supply must be derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly
or indirectly through a transformer.
L1 must be connected to D1, and L2 connected to D2.
The external field supply can now be connected and power restored to the drive.
This power board (printed with the above number) can be adjusted for use with an internal or
external motor field supply:
Internal Motor Field (default for this board)

Terminals D3 and D4, the motor field outputs, are energised when the 3-phase supply to
L1/L2/L3 is energised and the internal motor field is used. Terminals D1 and D2 are also
energised, but must not be used. The internal motor field supply is fused by the 20A fuses, FS2
& FS3.
External Motor Field Connections

Terminals D1 and D2 on the Power Board can POWER BOARD AH385621
be used for an external ac supply connection Yellow D1 D2 D3 D4
for the Motor Field Supply.
A simple re-wiring procedure disconnects the
internal motor field supply and prepares F8
terminals D1 and D2 for the external ac
supply connection. F16
Red
You should provide suitably rated external,
fast-acting semi-conductor fusing, to a
maximum of 20A.
Re-Wiring Procedure
WARNING!
Isolate the drive.
1. Loosen the control board fixing screws (2 off) and position the control board to allow access
to the power board.
2. Remove the yellow link wire from the Faston connector to the left-hand side of terminal D1
and connect it to staging post “F8”, located on the left of the board.
3. Remove the red link from the Faston connector at the mid-point between terminals D1 and
D2 and connect it to staging post “F16”, located on the left of the board.
Caution
The external field supply can now be connected and power restored to the drive.

External Motor Field (default for this board)
This power board (printed with the
above number) is supplied in
F+ F- FL1 FL2
external stack options using an
external motor field supply.
Connect the external supply to
busbars FL1 and FL2. The motor
field output is taken from busbars F+ and F-.
You should provide suitably rated external, fast-acting semi-conductor fusing, to a maximum of
20A.
Caution
DC Contactor - External VA Sensing

Connections are provided for external armature voltage sensing (at the motor) for when a dc
contactor is used between the drive and motor.
EXA+
EXA-
A+ A-
to
terminals A+ A-
D5 & D6
contactor
fuses
M

EXA+
A+
EXA-
A-
to
terminals A+ A-
D5 & D6
contactor
fuses
M
External AC Supply EMC Filter Installation

Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - Environmental Details, and External AC
Supply (RFI) Filters and Line Choke for selection details.
A filter is used with the Converter to reduce the line conducted emissions produced by the
Converter. Filters are used in parallel on the higher current Converters. When installed correctly
and used with the specified 2% minimum line chokes, conformance with EN55011 Class A can
be achieved (suitable for both generic environments: RF Emission and Immunity).
Cubicle-Mounting the 590 Converter with Filter
WARNING!
Do not touch filter terminals or cabling for at least 3 minutes after removing the
ac supply.
The CO389456 filter flying leads can reach 100°C under normal operating
conditions. Leads should be separated to at least one cable diameter and adequately
ventilated. Never bunch leads together.
Only use the ac supply filter with a permanent earth connection.
The filter should be fitted on the mains side of the contactor.
The Converter must be mounted vertically on a solid, flat, vertical surface. It must be installed
into a cubicle.
The recommended EMC filter is mounted to the left, right, above, below, or spaced behind the
Converter. It can be mounted flat against the surface, or projecting out from the surface if the
filter type has side fixings.
1. Mount the filter securely at the four fixing points (flat or on its side).
2. Mount the Converter next to the filter, allowing for the required airgap between the
Converter, the filter and any adjacent equipment.
Note: When filters CO389456 are mounted in parallel, they should be spaced 40mm apart for
ventilation.

Connection Details
The connection between the Converter, choke and filter must always be as short as possible and
must be segregated from all other cables. Ideally, mount the filter and choke onto the same
metallic panel as the Converter. Take care not to obstruct any ventilation spacing.
If this cable/busbar exceeds 0.6m in length, it must be replaced with a screened/armoured cable.
The screen/armour must be earthed at both the filter, choke and Converter ends with large-area
contact surfaces, preferably with metal cable glands.
You should enhance the RF connection between the Converter, choke, filter and panel as
follows:
1. Remove any paint/insulation between the mounting points of the EMC filter, choke,
Converter and the panel. Liberally apply petroleum jelly over the mounting points and
securing threads. This will prevent corrosion. Alternatively, conducting paint could be used
on the panel.
2. If 1 above is not possible, then improve the RF earth bond between the filter and Converter
by making an additional RF earth connection. Use wire braid of at least 10mm² cross-
sectional area.
Note: Metal surfaces, such as anodised or yellow chromed (with cable mounting or 35mm
DIN rails, screws and bolts) have a high impedance which can be very detrimental to
EMC performance.
3. A low RF impedance path must be provided between the motor frame and back panel on
which the drive, choke and EMC filters are mounted. This low impedance RF path should
follow the path of the motor cables in order to minimise the loop area. Failure to do so will
result in increased conducted emissions.
A low RF impedance path will normally be achieved by:
Bonding the armour of the motor supply cables at one end to the motor frame, and at the
other end to the cubicle back panel. Ideally 360o bonding is required, which can be achieved
with cable glands, refer to Figure 3-3 360 Degree Screened Connection, page 3- 3.
32H 33H
Ensuring that conduit containing the motor supply cables are bonded together using braid.
The conduit should also be bonded to the motor frame and the cubicle back panel.
Earthing Details
The protective earth (PE) conductor exiting the filter must be connected to the protective earth
connection of the Converter. Any additional RF earth, such as a cable screen, is not a
protective earth. The EMC filter must be permanently earthed to prevent the risk of electric
shock under abnormal operating instances (such as the loss of one phase of the ac supply).
You can achieve permanent earthing by either:
• using a copper protective earth conductor of at least 10mm²
• installing a second conductor, in parallel connection with the protective conductor, to a
separate protective earth terminal
Each conductor must independently meet the requirements for a protective earth conductor.
Operating Conditions
The recommended EMC filters operate from normal three-phases supplies which are balanced
with respect to earth (earth referenced supplies - TN). This minimises the earth leakage current
due to the filter capacitors between phase and earth.
IMPORTANT: We do not recommend the use of ac supply filters on non earth-referenced supplies - IT.
The supplies cause earth leakage currents to increase, and interfere with the operation of
earth fault monitoring equipment. In addition, EMC performance of the filter is
degraded.
As with all power electronic drives, conducted emissions increase with motor cable length.
EMC conformance is only guaranteed up to a cable length of 50m. The cable length can be
increased. Refer to Parker SSD Drives for more information.

Earth Fault Monitoring Systems
WARNING!
Circuit breakers used with VSDs and other similar equipment are not suitable for
personnel protection. Use another means to provide personal safety. Refer to
EN50178 (1998) / VDE0160 (1994) / EN60204-1 (1994)
We do not recommend the use of circuit breakers (e.g. RCD, ELCB, GFCI), but where their use
is mandatory, they should:
• Operate correctly with dc and ac protective earth currents (i.e. type B RCDs as in
Amendment 2 of IEC755).
• Have adjustable trip amplitude and time characteristics to prevent nuisance tripping on
switch-on.
When the ac supply is switched on, a pulse of current flows to earth to charge the EMC filter
internal capacitors which are connected between phase and earth. This has been minimised in
Parker SSD Drives filters, but may still trip out any circuit breaker in the earth system. In
addition, high frequency and dc components of earth leakage currents will flow under normal
operating conditions. Under certain fault conditions larger dc protective earth currents may flow.
The protective function of some circuit breakers cannot be guaranteed under such operating
conditions.

Installation Drawings
Converter Installation Drawings
Figure 3-5 35A & 70A Stack Assembly

Figure 3-6 110A & 150A Stack Assembly
Figure 3-7 180A Stack Assembly




Figure 3-11 720A Stack Outline Drawing

Figure 3-12 720A Stack Outline Drawing

Figure 3-13 720A Stack Assembly - Standard Mounting

Figure 3-14 720A Stack Assembly - Installation Drawing

External Stack Installation Drawings
Figure 3-15 External Stack Assembly

Figure 3-16 Wiring Diagram for 4 Quad External Stack

Figure 3-17 Wiring Diagram for 2 Quad External Stack

Filter Installation Drawings
Figure 3-18 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467844U040 for 590 35 Amp
Figure 3-20 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO388965U110 for 590 70 & 110 Amp





Figure 3-25 Filter Mounting Details, Part No. CO467843U340

Frame 3 : 270 Amp (1 filter) and Frame 4 : 380-830 Amp (2 filter)
(refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - External AC Supply (RFI) Filters)

AC Line Choke Installation Drawing
IMPORTANT: Always use the specified ac line choke with the Converter.
Choke Rating Dimensions (mm) Mtg Terminal

Hole
Type (DC) A B C C1 D E F G H L W ∅ ∅
CO055192 35A 50µH 50 27.5 130 140 7.5 50 70 155 260 ∅7 M8
CO055193 70A 50µH 50 27.5 130 140 7.5 72.5 92.5 155 302.5 ∅7 M8
CO055253 110A 50µH 108 85 60 35 160 170 10 76 101 190 341 ∅9 M6 I/P & M8
O/P
CO055255 180A 50µH 108 85 60 35 160 170 10 101 127 190 366 ∅9 M6 I/P & M8
O/P
CO057960 270A 50µH 110 110 80 60 255 200 40 170 200 280 380 ∅13 M8
CO387886 360A 50µH 135 145 80 60 255 200 40 170 200 280 380 ∅13 ∅11/∅13
CO057962 550A 25µH 200 157 110 73 306 250 58 189 220 366 398 ∅13 ∅13
CO057963 720A 25µH 200 157 110 73 306 250 58 189 220 366 398 ∅13 ∅13
For use with EMC filters
CO463036 35A 485µH 108 85 60 35 160 170 10 76 101 190 341 ∅9 M8
CO463037 70A 242µH 108 85 60 35 160 170 10 90 116 190 355 ∅9 M8
CO463038 110A 154µH 108 85 60 35 160 170 10 102 128 190 367 ∅9 M8
CO463039 180A 113µH 108 85 57 37 255 200 40 170 200 280 380 ∅13 M6 I/P & M8
O/P
Figure 3-26 Fitting details for the AC Line Choke

590 Capacitor Box
Figure 3-27 Capacitor Box for 590 : CO468398


Operating the Converter 4-1
4 OPERATING THE CONVERTER
6
Pre-Operation Checks
Initial checks before applying power:
• Mains power supply voltage is correct.
• Auxiliary power supply voltage is correct.
• Motor is of correct armature voltage and current rating.
• Check all external wiring circuits - power, control, motor and earth connections.
Note: Completely disconnect the Converter before point-to-point checking with a buzzer, or
when checking insulation with a Meggar.
• Check for damage to equipment.
• Check for loose ends, clippings, drilling swarf etc. lodged in the Converter and system.
• If possible check that the motor can be turned freely, and that any cooling fans are intact and
free from obstruction.
Ensure the safety of the complete system before the Converter is energised:
• Ensure that rotation of the motor in either direction will not cause damage.
• Ensure that nobody else is working on another part of the system which will be affected by
powering up.
• Ensure that other equipment will not be adversely affected by powering up.
Prepare to energise the Converter and system as follows:

• Remove the main external HRC fuses to prevent the main 3-phase and single phase auxiliary
supply from being connected.
• Disconnect the load from the motor shaft, if possible.
• If any of the Converter’s control terminals are not being used, check whether these unused
terminals need to be tied high or low. Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications”-
Control Terminals.
• If there is any doubt about the integrity of a particular installation, insert a high wattage
resistor, i.e. fire elements, in series with the motor armature.
• Check external run contacts are open.
• Check external speed setpoints are all zero.
590 Series DC Digital Converter

4-2 Operating the Converter
Setting-up the Converter

Note: Refer to Chapter 5: “The Man-Machine Interface (MMI)” to familiarise yourself with the
MMI’s LED indications, and how to use the keys and menu structure.
The following instructions are written in logical order. Complete each stage successfully
before progressing to the next.
Calibration
NO POWER IS CONNECTED AT THIS STAGE
You must first calibrate the Converter for use with the motor:
The settings for Armature Current, Field Current, Armature Voltage and the Tacho Calibration
Option Board (if fitted) are selected on the control board. Lift the hinged terminal cover to
reveal the switchable calibration panel and the switchable tacho calibration option board (if
fitted).
TACHO CALIBRATION
OPTION BOARD
SWITCHABLE CALIBRATION PANEL
TEST
POINTS
IMPORTANT: You must not exceed the maximum drive and motor ratings. Refer to the Product Code or
maximum rating label, and the motor rating plate.
Switchable Calibration Panel

IA CAL IF CAL VA CAL
.
ON
1
2
3
4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7
Armature Current (IA CAL)

Note the maximum armature current from the motor rating plate and set this value using SW1,
SW2 and SW3. The switches set Amps in hundreds, tens and units. The illustration above shows
an IA CAL setting of 77A.
Field Current (IF CAL)

Note the nominal field current from the motor rating plate and set this value using SW4, SW5
and SW6. The switches set Amps in tens, units and tenths. The illustration shows an IF CAL
setting of 5.7A. The maximum current is 19.9A, setting a higher value than this results in 0A.
Note: If using an external stack controller, set the switches for one quarter less current than you
require, i.e. if you want 12A of field current, set the switches to 9A. (This allows for a
different turns ratio used in the current transformers of external stack modules).

Armature Voltage (VA CAL)
Set this using the 4-way switch, SW7. The switch sets voltage according to the table below.
VA Armature Volts VA (Volts)
Switch 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
3 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A “1” indicates that the switch is ON.

The illustration on the previous page shows a VA CAL setting of 200V.
Note: Calibration up to 700V is possible with external stacks. Refer to Parker SSD Drives.
Analog Tacho Calibration Option Board

Note: This option is not required if armature
link wire
voltage or encoder feedback is to be used.
The board fits on to a 10-way connector. It 1
also requires the connecting link wire to the 0123456789
control board. This link is inherent but must
be connected for operation. 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The board supports AC and DC analog tachos 0
with a calibration range of 10 to 209V (see AC
100
note): DC
• For AC tacho feedback, use terminals G1
and G2 with the selector switch in the AC + - + -
G1 G2 G3 G4
position.
AC DC
• For DC tacho feedback, use terminals G3
and G4 with the selector switch in the DC position
Calculate the tacho voltage by multiplying the required maximum speed by the tacho calibration
factor, e.g. motor speed 1500 rpm and tacho calibration factor 60V per 1000 rpm is 90V.
The tacho calibration volts are set using the 2 in-line switches (10-way). The switches set Volts
in units and tens. The hundreds are set by the 1-way switch. The illustration above shows a
setting of 90V.
Note: Do not set the calibration volts to greater than 200V, the maximum terminal block rating.
Calibration for Voltages greater than 200V
For full speed tacho voltages greater than 200V, an external resistor, value RE, is required in
series with the tachogenerator connection to terminal G3.
Set the switches on the Tacho Calibration Option Board to give a value of 200V, as shown
opposite.
RE then is given by the formula: 1
0123456789
(tachovolts − 200)
RE = kΩ
5 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The power dissipation of this resistor is given by the
0
formula
W = (tacho volts - 200) x 5 milliwatts 100
Microtach/Encoder Feedback Option Board

The option board assumes a 1000 lines per rev encoder is being used. Speed is set directly by
the ENCODER RPM parameter. If you are using an alternative lines per rev encoder, you must
set the ENCODER LINES parameter on the MMI later in the Operating Instructions.
Selecting Speed Feedback
AUXILIARY POWER ONLY IS CONNECTED AT THIS STAGE
Connect the auxiliary power supply to power terminals D7 and D8 (but do not connect the main
3-phase power supply at this stage). Check that the correct voltage appears between terminals
D7 and D8.
The MMI will now display the Welcome screen, and the Health and Overcurrent Trip MMI
LEDs will be illuminated (assuming that the Converter’s control terminals are wired as shown in
Figure 3-4, Minimum Connection Requirements).
Use a digital voltmeter to check for the following:
+24V rail at terminal C9, +10V rail at terminal B3, -10V rail at terminal B4
Using the MMI, select the correct speed feedback option. The default MMI Menu Map
is ARM VOLTS FBK. (Note that this is the last selection in the list, 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
use the ↑ (UP) key to reveal other selections).
2 SPEED LOOP
The selections are ARM VOLTS FBK, ANALOG TACH, ENCODER
SPEED FBK SELECT
and ENCODER/ANALOG.
Note: Refer to Chapter 13: “Standard and Optional Equipment” - Speed Feedback Option
Boards for further information.

Initial Start-up Routine
Complete steps 1 to 18, including steps 16 and 17 as appropriate.
Note: This routine assumes that the Converter’s control terminals are wired as shown in Figure
5-12, Minimum Connection Requirements. The field is “Enabled” and is in Voltage
Control (default settings).
IMPORTANT: Do not change any of the previously made calibration settings once the main contactor is
energised.
1 Normally, the setpoint ramp input at control terminal A4 is the speed reference source.
Use the MMI to display the value of the ANIN 3 (A4). Vary the
MMI Menu Map
setpoint potentiometer and observe the input voltage display change.
1 DIAGNOSTICS
Additional Setpoint Inputs may also appear at ANIN 1 (A2) and ANIN ANIN 1 (A2)
2 (A3). Check these if present. ANIN 2 (A3)
ANIN 3 (A4)
The sum of all the setpoints is given by the value of the SPEED MMI Menu Map
SETPOINT parameter, and is also output at terminal A8. 1 DIAGNOSTICS
SPEED SETPOINT
2 Use the MMI to check the external current clamp settings (refer to Chapter 6:
“Programming Your Application” - ANIN for setting details):
MMI Menu Map
• If using a single external clamp, C6 low (0V):
1 DIAGNOSTICS
Check that ANIN 5 (A6) is +10V or is adjustable up to +10V. ANIN 4 (A5)
ANIN 5 (A6)
• If using dual external clamps, C6 high (+24V):
Check the ANIN 5 (A6) is at +10V or is adjustable up to +10V and that ANIN 4 (A5)
is at -10V or is adjustable up to -10V.
3 If possible, check the speed feedback by rotating the shaft manually in the forward
direction.
• Analog Tachogenerator: MMI Menu Map
1 DIAGNOSTICS
The voltage at G3 (DC Tach Input) should go positive.
TACH INPUT (B2)
• MICROTACH/Encoder
MMI Menu Map
The ENCODER parameter should give a positive reading. 1 DIAGNOSTICS
ENCODER
Also check the SPEED FEEDBACK parameter is reading a positive MMI Menu Map
value. If there is no feedback signal from the Microtach, verify that all
1 DIAGNOSTICS
3 LEDs on the Microtach Option Board are illuminated. If one or more
of these LED's are extinguished, check that 24V is applied to the SPEED FEEDBACK
Microtach and all ancillary products, and that the fibre optic transmission length is not
exceeded.
4 Scroll through the SETUP PARAMETERS menu and take a note of the MAIN CURR.
LIMIT parameter’s value. You will need this later.
MMI Menu Map
Set the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter to 0.00%. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Select the correct setting for the SPEED FBK SELECT. 2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR. LIMIT

Note: Save any parameters that have been changed. Refer to Chapter
5: “The Man-Machine Interface (MMI)” - How to Save, Restore
and Copy your Settings. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 SPEED LOOP
SPEED FBK SELECT

5 With the Program Stop and Coast Stop LEDs illuminated:
• Apply the "Start/Run" command to C3.
The main 3-phase contactor should pull-in and remain energised, (it may de-energise
almost immediately due to the 3-phase fail alarm).
• Remove the "Start/Run" command from C3.
The main 3-phase contactor should drop-out and remain de-energised.
If the above sequence does not function, remove the auxiliary power and check start/stop
sequencing and contactor wiring.
If the contactor is left energised for an extended time during this check, the controller will detect
that 3-phase is not connected and switch off the contactor, flagging the 3-phase alarm.
The main contactor should never be operated by any means other than the drive internal
controls, nor should any additional circuitry be placed around the contactor coil circuit.
WARNING!
Only continue with the set-up instructions if the stop/start circuits and contactor
operate correctly.
6 Switch off all power supplies to the equipment and, when the whole system is totally
isolated and safe, re-connect the main 3-phase power supply.
• Switch on the auxiliary supply.
• Switch on the main 3-phase supply.
MAIN & AUXILIARY POWER ARE CONNECTED AT THIS STAGE
7 Set the Speed Setpoints to zero so that the value of the SPEED SETPOINT parameter
is zero, this is also output at Terminal A8.
MMI Menu Map
1 DIAGNOSTICS
SPEED SETPOINT
8 Verify that the MAIN CURR. LIMIT is set to 0.00%, or that the ANIN 5 (A6)
parameter in the DIAGNOSTICS menu at level 1 is displaying 0.00V.
MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR.LIMIT
MMI Menu Map

1 DIAGNOSTICS
ANIN 5 (A6)
9 Apply the Start/Run command and check that 3-phase mains is applied to Power
Terminals L1, L2 and L3. Initiate "Enable" (C5) and immediately check that the correct field
voltage appears between Terminals D4 and D3.
This is high voltage DC, proceed with caution. Do not continue if this is incorrect, switch
off all supplies and check connections. Refer to 9.1 or 9.2 on the next page:

If the field voltage is not correct, make the following checks:
9.1 Internally Supplied Field:
• Check that 3-phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3 when the main contactor
is closed.
MMI Menu Map
• Check that the 3 coding fuses on the power board are 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
healthy.
2 FIELD CONTROL
• The FIELD ENABLE parameter should be set to
FIELD ENABLE
ENABLE.
• With the FIELD ENABLE parameter in view, press the ↓ (DOWN) key. The
display changes to FLD CTRL MODE IS. Press the M key. Is this set to
VOLTAGE CONTROL or CURRENT CONTROL?
MMI Menu Map
If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
of the RATIO OUT/IN parameter. This should be
set to 90% maximum. 2 FIELD CONTROL
If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field 3 FLD VOLTAGE VARS

current calibration set-up, refer back to RATIO OUT/IN
“Calibration”.
If the field volts are at maximum, check the field continuity. (The
field current may initially be lower than the rated value due to a
cold field.)
9.2 Externally Supplied Field:
• Check the voltage applied (externally fused) to terminals D1 and D2.
• Check the phasing of voltage applied to D1 and D2:
D1 must be connected directly or indirectly to the Red phase on main power
terminal L1.
D2 must be connected directly or indirectly to the
MMI Menu Map
Yellow phase on main power terminal L2.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
• The FIELD ENABLE should be set to ENABLE. 2 FIELD CONTROL

FIELD ENABLE
• With the FIELD ENABLE parameter in view, press the ↓
(DOWN) key. The display changes to FLD CTRL MODE MMI Menu Map
IS. Press the M key. Is this set to VOLTAGE CONTROL 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
or CURRENT CONTROL?
2 FIELD CONTROL
If set to VOLTAGE CONTROL, check the value
of the RATIO OUT/IN parameter. This should be set 3 FLD VOLTAGE VARS
to 90% maximum. RATIO OUT/IN
If set to CURRENT CONTROL, check the field current calibration set-up,

refer back to “Calibration”.
Check that 3-phase is applied to terminals L1, L2 and L3.
10 Check that all six MMI LEDs are now illuminated. Note that any external interlocks
which affect the Enable input C5 will affect the state of the RUN LED.
11 If the STANDSTILL LOGIC parameter in the STANDSTILL menu at level 2 is
ENABLED, temporarily set it to DISABLED.
MMI Menu Map

1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL LOGIC

Caution
During the following set-up instructions, be ready to STOP the converter should the
motor try to overspeed.
12 Set the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED

MMI Menu Map
SETPOINT is about 5%, 0.5V at setpoint input (terminal A8).
1 DIAGNOSTICS
Perform the next operation with ARM VOLTS FBK selected for SPEED SETPOINT
the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter (because it is hard-wired
and therefore the sign will be correct). Select it now. MMI Menu Map
Slowly increase the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter up to a maximum 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
of about 20%. The motor should begin to rotate if all connections are
2 SPEED LOOP
made correctly. The motor speed will settle at about 5% of full speed if
SPEED FBK SELECT
the motor is unloaded. Check the feedback from the Tacho or Encoder
using the appropriate Diagnostic menu.
Now stop the drive. Re-instate your selection for the SPEED FBK SELECT parameter (if
other than ARM VOLTS FBK) and perform the same test again.
If the test was successful perform a PARAMETER SAVE and go to 14. If just direction of
rotation is wrong go to 13, otherwise check as below.
MMI Menu Map
If 5% speed (approx.) is exceeded and the motor continues to
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
accelerate a reversed connection is implied, decrease the MAIN
CURR.LIMIT parameter to zero. 2 CURRENT LOOP
MAIN CURR.LIMIT
12.1 Reversed Connections - Analog Tachogenerator:
Open the main contactor and switch off all supplies, then correct the connections.
If the motor is turning in the correct direction, reverse the tachogenerator
connections only.
If the motor is turning in the wrong direction, reverse the field connections only.
12.2 Reversed Connections - MICROTACH/Encoder:
MMI Menu Map
Open the main contactor.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
If the motor is turning in the right direction, change over
2 SPEED LOOP
the ENCODER SIGN parameter.
ENCODER SIGN
If the motor is turning in the wrong direction, switch off all
supplies then reverse the field connections only.
Re-connect the supplies if disconnected and repeat the test from the beginning.
If the motor still runs out of control, check the tachogenerator and the wiring continuity. In the
case of the MICROTACH there are three LED's on the MICROTACH option board, all these
LED's should be ON indicating healthy operation of the wiring and tacho. If in doubt about the
operation of the tachogenerator either Analog or MICROTACH during this test, monitor
terminal A7 with respect to signal ground on a meter. This will show if a feedback is present.
Note: If the drive trips on speed feedback alarm with

MMI Menu Map
tachogenerator feedback of the correct polarity, check the
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
armature voltage calibration.
Check the SPEED FBK SELECT. This could be set incorrectly 2 SPEED LOOP
allowing the drive to run open loop. SPEED FBK SELECT
If the motor does not turn at all when the MAIN CURR.LIMIT is
increased to 20%, check the CURRENT FEEDBACK parameter to MMI Menu Map
verify that current is flowing into the armature. If no current is 1 DIAGNOSTICS
flowing, switch off and check the armature connections. CURRENT FEEDBACK
Is the motor connected to the converter?
Verify that calibration has been carried out correctly.

WARNING!
Only continue with the set-up instructions if this test is completed satisfactorily.
13 If the drive has run satisfactorily without any need for reconnection of the field or
tachogenerator but the direction of rotation is wrong, open the main contactor and disconnect
all supplies.
13.1 Analog Tachogenerator:
MMI Menu Map
Reverse both field and tachogenerator connections.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
13.2 MICROTACH/Encoder:
2 SPEED LOOP
Reverse the field, re-establish the auxiliary supply and reverse ENCODER SIGN
the ENCODER SIGN parameter.
IMPORTANT: When satisfactory operation has been achieved, perform a PARAMETER SAVE. Refer to
Chapter 5: “The Man-Machine Interface (MMI)” - Saving Your Application.
14 With the MAIN CURR.LIMIT parameter set to 20% or the level required to achieve
rotation, set the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED SETPOINT is about 10%,
1.0V at setpoint input (Terminal A8). The motor will accelerate to this speed setting.
14.1 4 Quadrant Drives which require reverse rotation:

MMI Menu Map
Alter the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED
1 DIAGNOSTICS
SETPOINT parameter is about -10% and check that motor
runs in the reverse direction. SPEED SETPOINT
14.2 Adjustment of ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter:

4 Quadrant, non-reversing drives MMI Menu Map
Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
adjust the ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter for
2 CALIBRATION
minimum shaft rotation.
ZERO SPD.OFFSET
2 Quadrant, non-reversing drives
Set the Speed Setpoint potentiometer to zero and adjust the ZERO SPEED
OFFSET parameter until the shaft is just rotating then reduce level until the
shaft stops.
4 Quadrant, reversing drives
Set the ZERO SPEED OFFSET parameter to MMI Menu Map
balance maximum speed in forward and reverse 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
directions.
2 STANDSTILL
You can also set the STANDSTILL LOGIC parameter to STANDSTILL LOGIC
ENABLE if a stationary shaft is required.
15 Gradually increase the Speed Setpoints so that the value of the SPEED SETPOINT
(DIAGNOSTIC menu) is at maximum. Check the shaft speed is
correct. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
If fine adjustment is required adjust the calibration as appropriate to
the speed feedback selection: 2 CALIBRATION
ARMATURE V CAL.
• Armature Voltage feedback has a +2/-10% trim, greater changes
ANALOG TACH CAL.
outside this range require re-setting of the calibration switches.
ENCODER RPM
• Analog Tachogenerator has a +2/-10% trim, greater changes
outside this range require re-setting of the calibration switches.
• The MICROTACH/Encoder should give an absolute rotational speed for which adjustment
is unnecessary however the motor speed may not be the relevant factor thus speed of rotation
can be altered by simply adjusting the calibration.

16 Adjustment for field weakening:
If the drive is to be run with a top speed greater than the base speed (usually 1500 rpm) then
`field weakening’ is used to achieve that top speed. (Refer to Chapter 9: “Control Loops” -
Field Control for a more detailed explanation.
MMI Menu Map
Note: Note that the drive must be operating in Field Current Control.
Select CURRENT CONTROL on the FLD CTRL MODE IS 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
parameter. Also, field weakening cannot be used if you have 2 FIELD CONTROL
Armature Voltage feedback selected. FLD CTRL MODE IS
Run the drive up to base speed and check the motor volts are correct.
In the FLD WEAK VARS menu, verify that field weakening is MMI Menu Map
selected (FIELD WEAK ENABLE) and that the MIN FLD
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
CURRENT parameter is set appropriately. Adjust the maximum
armature volts to the required scaled level by setting the MAX VOLTS 2 FIELD CONTROL
parameter.
3 FLD CURRENT VARS
Increase the speed above the base speed, checking that the armature
4 FLD WEAK VARS
volts remain constant whilst the field current reduces.
FLD. WEAK ENABLE
Gradually increase to maximum speed. Monitor the armature volts at MIN FLD CURRENT
maximum speed and trim the speed using the appropriate control as MAX VOLTS
detailed in Step 15. PROCEED WITH CARE - MAKE SMALL
ADJUSTMENTS.
Trim the MIN FLD CURRENT parameter to the appropriate setting (5% lower than the field
current at full speed).
17 Adjustment for reversing drives:
For reversing drives, check the maximum reverse speed. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
Imbalance in reversing drives can only be corrected by adjusting the
ZERO SPD OFFSET parameter, which may be to the detriment of 2 CALIBRATION
operation at Zero Setpoint. ZERO SPD.OFFSET
18 Re-set the MAIN CURR. LIMIT parameter to the original setting that you previously
noted. If in doubt, set it to 100% to correspond to 100% full load current (FLC).
Note: The controller cannot achieve 200% current unless the CUR LIMIT/SCALER parameter is
increased to 200% (from its default setting of 100%). Until this is done, the External
Current Clamp will limit the current to 100%, refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your
Application” - CURRENT LOOP.
MMI Menu Map
• If the current limit is set higher (maximum 200%) and the motor 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
runs into an overload condition, the current is automatically
2 CURRENT LOOP
reduced from the current limit level down to 110% FLC (continual
MAIN CURR.LIMIT
rating).
• If the motor is overloaded, the controller will reduce the current to 110% of the current
calibration. (If the motor continues to rotate it may overheat and thermal protection should
be provided).
• If the motor is overloaded and the current provided by the controller is not enough to
maintain rotation, i.e. it stalls, the controller will trip out showing STALL TRIP alarm, if
enabled.

Performance Adjustment
Current Loop - The Autotune Feature
Now perform an Autotune to identify and store the following Current Loop parameters:
PROP. GAIN
INT. GAIN
DISCONTINUOUS
Initial Conditions
1. Main contactor open, i.e. no Start/Run signal at terminal C3.
2. Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to OFF.
3. Program Stop (terminal B8) and Coast Stop (terminal B9) should be high, i.e. 24V.
4. If the field is being supplied by a third-party controller, remove the field manually. (If the
field is internally regulated, Autotune automatically quenches the field).
IMPORTANT: The shaft may require clamping for certain motors to prevent rotation >20% during the
Autotune sequence. If the motor is either a compound motor (series field), has some
residual magnetism, or is a permanent magnet motor it WILL rotate and the shaft must
be clamped. If in any doubt, CLAMP OR BE READY TO STOP THE MOTOR."
Performing an Autotune MMI Menu Map

• Set the AUTOTUNE parameter to ON. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
• Close the main contactor, i.e. Start/Run signal to terminal C3. 2 CURRENT LOOP
AUTOTUNE
• Energise the Enable terminal (C5).
The Autotune sequence is initiated. When complete (after approximately 10 seconds), the main
contactor is opened automatically signalling the end of the sequence and the AUTOTUNE
parameter is reset to OFF.
• Perform a PARAMETER SAVE now. Refer to Chapter 5: “The Man-Machine Interface
(MMI) - Saving Your Application.
• If necessary, restore field connections and remove the mechanical clamp.
Autotune Failed?
• The MMI displays the message AUTOTUNE ABORTED
If any one of the Initial Conditions above are removed, or the Autotune sequence times out
(after 2 minutes), then the Autotune sequence is aborted causing the main contactor to drop
out.
• The MMI displays the message AUTOTUNE ERROR
If during the Autotune sequence the motor speed feedback is greater than 20% of rated
speed, or the field current is detected above 6% of rated field current, then the Autotune
sequence is suspended causing the main contactor to drop out.
Note: Refer to Chapter 9: “Control Loops” - Current Control for manual tuning instructions.
Speed Loop
You will need to adjust the Speed Loop for your particular application although in most cases
the default settings are acceptable.
The optimum Speed Loop performance is achieved by adjusting the PROP. GAIN and INT.
TIME CONST. parameters.
Produce a small step-change to the speed setpoint and observe the response on the
tachogenerator feedback. If the Converter is using Microtach/Encoder feedback, then the speed
response can be monitored on Terminal A7.
Adjust the two parameters until you have rapid change of speed feedback between the setpoint
values, but with minimum overshoot.

Incorrect Speed Response Incorrect Speed Response
Speed
Speed
8
Under damped response
Time
8 Time
Over damped response takes a

long time to reach Steady Sate
causing overshoot or `ringing'
Correct Response
Speed
4%
9
Time
Critically Damped Response with no more than 4% of

maximum speed from first overshoot to first undershoot
Starting and Stopping Methods
Stopping Methods
Note:
• If the Converter is “non-regenerative” (2-quad - 591, 599) it effectively coasts to a stop once
the current demand reverses.
• If the Converter is “regenerative” (4-quad - 590, 598) then it can stop faster because it uses
energy from the load, i.e. reverse current is allowed to flow.
Normal Stop and Program Stop are only relevant for a “regenerative” controller.
The parameters STOP TIME and PROG STOP TIME have associated timers which initiate a
Coast Stop after the timed period.
MMI Menu Map
The Coast Stop has direct control of the Run relay with no intervening
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
electronics.
2 STOP RATES
All associated parameters can be found in the STOP RATES menu.
Terminal Description Function Parameter Priority
B9 Coast Stop Motor coasts to rest -- Overrides Program

Stop and Normal
Stop
B8 Program Stop Motor decelerates at STOP TIME Overrides Normal

Program Stop rate Stop
C3 Start/Run Motor decelerates at PROG STOP TIME --

(Normal Stop) Normal Stop rate

Normal Stop (C3)
This is achieved by removing 24V from Terminal C3. MMI Menu Map
The motor speed is brought to zero in a time defined by the STOP 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
TIME parameter. 2 STOP RATES
STOP TIME
NORMAL STOP
SPEED SETPOINT (100%)
Control Signals
START / RUN (C3)
0%
t
SPEED DEMAND
100% = SPEED SETPOINT
Speed Demand
0%
t
STOP TIME DEFAULT 10.0 SEC
SPEED FEEDBACK
= SPEED SETPOINT
Actual Speed ACTUAL STOPPING RATE
DEPENDS ON LOAD INTERTIA,
MOTOR HP AND OVERLOAD
CAPABILITY OF MOTOR/DRIVE
DRIVE IS DISABLED BELOW

STOP ZERO SPEED
IF SET > 0.25%
STOP ZERO
SPEED
0%
(DEFAULT 2%) t
DRIVE REMAINS ENABLED

FOR CONTACTOR DELAY
IF STOP ZERO SPEED < 0.25%
Enable DRIVE ENABLE =ENABLED

(DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC)
t
0%
DRIVE ENABLE = DISABLED
Indicators DRIVE RUN LED

AND START CONTACTOR
t
0%
CONTACTOR DELAY
(DEFAULT 1.0 SECS)

TIME-OUT IN NORMAL STOP
SPEED SETPOINT
Control Signals
START/RUN (C3)
t
0%
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED DEMAND
Speed Demand
t
0%
CONTACTOR WILL DROP OUT

IF SPEED FEEDBACK > STOP ZERO SPEED
= SPEED SETPOINT
WHEN STOP LIMIT TIMED OUT
Actual Speed SPEED FEEDBACK
STOP ZERO SPEED

0%
(DEFAULT 2% ) t
STOP LIMIT ( DEFAULT 60.0 SEC )
Indicators DRIVE RUN LED

AND START CONTACTOR
DRIVE ENABLE =ENABLED t
DRIVE RUN LED & START CONTACTOR
0%
DRIVE ENABLE =DISABLED

Program Stop (B8)
This is achieved by removing 24V from Terminal B8. MMI Menu Map
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
The motor speed is brought to zero under conditions defined by the
PROG. STOP TIME (ramp rate) and PROG. STOP I LIMIT 2 STOP RATES
parameters. PROG. STOP TIME
PROG. STOP I LIMIT
PROGRAM STOP TIMING
SPEED SETPOINT ( 100% )

Control Signals
PROGRAM STOP LED ON ( PROGRAM STOP FALSE )

LED (PROGRAM STOP IS A
OFF LATCHED FUNCTION) t
0%
SPEED DEMAND
100% = SPEED SETPOINT
Speed Demand
t
0%
PROG STOP TIME
DEFAULT 0.1 SEC
SPEED FEEDBACK
= SPEED SETPOINT
CURRENT LIMIT SET BY
Actual Speed PROG STOP I LIMIT
( DEFAULT 100% )
ACTUAL STOPPING RATE DEPENDS

STOP ZERO ON LOAD INERTIA, MOTOR HP AND
SPEED OVERLOAD CAPABILITY OF MOTOR/DRIVE
(DEFAULT 2%)
t
0%
DRIVE IS DISABLED
AND CONTACTOR
TURNS OFF BELOW
Indicators
DRIVE RUN LED STOP ZERO SPEED
AND START CONTACTOR
DRIVE ENABLE =ENABLED
t
DRIVE RUN LED AND START CONTACTOR
0%

TIME-OUT IN PROGRAM STOP
SPEED SETPOINT
Control Signals
LED ON (PROGRAM STOP FALSE )
PROGRAM STOP LED
0%
OFF t
SPEED DEMAND
SPEED SETPOINT
Speed Demand
0%
t
SPEED FEEDBACK CONTACTOR WILL DROP OUT IF

SPEED SETPOINT SPEED FEEDBACK > STOP ZERO SPEED
Actual Speed WHEN PROG STOP LIMIT TIMED OUT
STOP ZERO SPEED

( DEFAULT 2% ) t
0%
PROG STOP LIMIT
(DEFAULT 60.0 SEC)
Enable DRIVE RUN LED AND START CONTACTOR

DRIVE ENABLE =ENABLED
DRIVE RUN LED & START CONTACTOR t

0%
Coast Stop (B9)

This is achieved by removing 24V from Terminal B9.
The stack is automatically quenched and the contactor is opened. The motor coasts to a stop.
Note: The motor coast stop rate is dictated by the motor inertia - the drive does not control the
motion.
Standstill MMI Menu Map

Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” - 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
STANDSTILL.
2 STANDSTILL
STANDSTILL LOGIC
ZERO THRESHOLD
The Trip Condition
When a trip condition is detected, a similar stopping method to Coast Stop is used. The power
stack cannot be re-enabled until the trip condition has been cleared and successfully reset.
Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” for further details.

Normal Starting Method
To achieve a normal start of the Converter:
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C5 (Enable)
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C3 (Start)
Note: The Converter will not start if there are alarms present, or if Terminals B8 (Program Stop)
or B9 (Coast Stop) are low, 0V.
Ensure that Program Stop and Coast Stop are valid before Start/Run is applied.
Advanced Starting Methods

Starting Several Converters Simultaneously
2. Use Terminal C5 (Enable) to synchronise the start-up of the Converters
Jog
1. Apply 24V to Terminal C5 (Enable)
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Jog Mode)
Note: The Converter will not start if there are alarms present.
The Converter can be started using JOG SPEED 1, JOG SPEED 2 (allowing for two different
setpoints, or perhaps to provide an Inch Forward/Inch Reverse).
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” - JOG/SLACK for further information.
Also refer to the STOP RATES function block: the CONTACTOR DELAY parameter is used to
prevent multiple operations of the main contactor from rapid use of the Jog switch.
Crawl
2. Apply 24V to Terminal C4 (Jog Mode)
Note: The Converter will not start if there are alarms present.
Start the Converter using a crawl speed, in Forward or Reverse.
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” - JOG/SLACK for further information.


The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) 5-1
5 THE MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (MMI)
Introducing the MMI
Health
Run
DC DIGITAL DRIVE E Start Contactor
ISSUE 4.X Overcurrent Trip
M Program Stop
Coast Stop
The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) consists of a liquid crystal display, control keys and LEDs
that allow full use of the Converter’s features. The Liquid crystal display can be seen through
the hinged cover that protects the MMI. Lower the protective cover to see the control keys.
The MMI provides for application programming and monitoring of the Converter for remote
control.
Welcome Screen
On power-up, a self-test is displayed. This is quickly replaced by a default Welcome screen
showing the product description and software version of the Converter. The display then
changes to MENU LEVEL after a further 15 seconds (you can press the M key to display this
screen immediately). This screen is at the top of the MMI’s menu system.
Using the MMI

Control Keys
Keys for Programming the Converter
Note: See “ Navigating the Menu System”, page 5-3 for a quick-start to using the menu.
UP Navigation - Moves upwards through the list of parameters.

Parameter - Increments the value of the displayed parameter.
Δ
Command Acknowledge - Confirms action when in a command menu.
DOWN Navigation - Moves downwards through the list of parameters.
∇ Parameter - Decrements the value of the displayed parameter.
ESCAPE Navigation - Displays the previous level’s Menu.

Parameter - Returns to the parameter list.
E
Trip Acknowledge - Acknowledges displayed Trip or Error message.
Navigation - Displays the next Menu level, or the first parameter of the
MENU current Menu.
M Parameter - Allows a writable parameter to be modified

5-2 The Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
LED Indications
There are six LEDs that indicate the status of the Converter. Each LED is considered to operate
in two different ways:
{ OFF The LEDs are labelled HEALTH, RUN, START

CONTACTOR, PROGRAM STOP, OVER
z ON CURRENT TRIP, and COAST STOP. The status of
the LEDs have the following meanings:
HEALTH Converter State
{ Drive fault condition
z Drive normal condition
RUN Converter State

{ Drive not enabled:
• the thyristor bridge is disabled
• the main contactor control relay is de-energised
• an alarm is present
z Drive in run condition
Drive is healthy (as indicated by the HEALTH LED)
Ready (which requires a Start instruction) and enabled;
indicates that the controller is in a normal run condition.
The main contactor control relay is energised and the
thyristor bridge is enabled.
START CONTACTOR Converter State
{ Start contactor is Open
z Start contactor is Closed (by a start instruction). The drive

is healthy
PROGRAM STOP Converter State
{ The program stop line is open and the program stop is
carried out until main contactor drop-out occurs
z No program stop (+24V is applied to terminal B8)
OVER CURRENT TRIP Converter State

{ Armature current exceeded 280% full load. The drive has
tripped, refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” -
Trip Messages (OVER I TRIP)
z Armature current normal
COAST STOP Converter State

{ Hardware stop by main contactor drop-out
z Stop not active (+24V is applied to terminal B8)
In normal run condition, all LEDs on the MMI are illuminated. Any LED which is off indicates
a condition which prevents operation of the controller.
HINT:
The general rule for LED indications is
“ON IS GOOD, OFF IS BAD”

The Menu System
The menu system is divided into a `tree’ structure with 8 “MENU LEVEL” main menus.
Consider these main menus to be at Menu Level 1 (refer to the Menu System Map on the next
page). Parameters contained in Menu Level 1 are the most frequently used, as you descend the
menu levels the parameters are less frequently used.
The Operator Station has selectable “viewing levels” which The Menu System
can restrict the view of the menu system, refer to “ Menu Self-Test and
Viewing Levels”, page 5-5. Welcome Screen
timeout from press to skip

Below is a simple description of the main menus: M
power-up the timeout
• DIAGNOSTICS: a view of important diagnostic DIGITAL DC DRIVE

MENU LEVEL
parameters contained in the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu.
M
• SETUP PARAMETERS: contains all the function block
parameters for programming your application, including MENU LEVEL
parameters for tuning the Converter. DIAGNOSTICS
• PASSWORD: contains all the Password parameters MENU LEVEL

SETUP PARAMETERS
required for security.
MENU LEVEL
• ALARM STATUS: a view of the alarm diagnostic PASSWORD
parameters contained in the FUNCTION BLOCKS menu.
MENU LEVEL
• MENUS: allows full or reduced menu displays on the ALARM STATUS
Operator Station.
MENU LEVEL
• PARAMETER SAVE: Save the application/parameters. MENUS
MENU LEVEL
• SERIAL LINKS: contains all the parameters for external
PARAMETER SAVE
communications set-up and operation.
MENU LEVEL
• SYSTEM: contains all the parameters for I/O SERIAL LINKS
configuration. Also contains the Reserved Menu.
MENU LEVEL
SYSTEM
Figure 5-1 The Menu System showing Main Menus
Navigating the Menu System

On power-up, the MMI defaults into the Welcome screen.
Press the M key to skip the timeout and move immediately to the top of the menu system. Press
the M key again to display the first menu level.
scroll
The menu system can be thought of as map which
is navigated using the four keys shown opposite.
exit to
Keys E and M navigate through the menu levels. previous E M next menu
The up (↑) and down (↓) keys scroll through the menu
Menu and Parameter lists.
The keys will repeat if you hold them down. This
is an easy way to step through and view a menu’s scroll
contents. NAVIGATING THE MENU
Refer to “The Menu System Map” to see how the menu is mapped.
HINT: Remember that because the Menu and Parameter lists are looped, the ↑ key can
quickly move you to the last Menu or Parameter in the loop.

The Menu System Map
1 2 3 4
DIGITAL DC DRIVE MENU LEVEL
MENU LEVEL DIAGNOSTICS
MENU LEVEL
RAMPS
SETUP PARAMETERS
AUX I/O
MENU LEVEL JOG/SLACK

PASSWORD RAISE/LOWER
SPECIAL BLOCKS DIAMETER CALC.

MENU LEVEL
ALARMS STATUS TAPER CALC.
TORQUE CALC.
MENU LEVEL SETPOINT SUM 2

MENUS
PID
MENU LEVEL TENS+COMP CALC.

PARAMETER SAVE FIELD CONTROL FLD VOLTAGE VARS
FLD CURRENT VARS FLD WEAK VARS
CURRENT PROFILE
STOP RATES
CALIBRATION
INHIBIT ALARMS
CURRENT LOOP
SPEED LOOP ADVANCED ADAPTION
ZERO SPD.QUENCH
SETPOINTS
STANDSTILL
SETPOINT SUM 1
MENU LEVEL MAIN PORT P1

SERIAL LINKS
AUX PORT P2
SYSTEM PORT P3 P3 SETUP 5703 SUPPORT
PNO CONFIG BISYNCH SUPPORT
MENU LEVEL SOFTWARE

SYSTEM
CONFIGURE I/O ANALOG INPUTS ANIN 1 (A2)
MINILINK ANIN 5 (A6)
PEEK ANALOG OUTPUTS ANOUT 1 (A7)
RESERVED ANOUT 2 (A8)
DIGITAL INPUTS DIGIN 1 (C6)
DIGIN 3 (C8)
DIGITAL INPUT C4
E M DIGITAL INPUT C5
DIGITAL OUTPUTS DIGOUT 1 (A5)
DIGOUT 3 (B7)
CONFIGURE 5703
BLOCK DIAGRAM
FULL & REDUCED VIEWS
INTERNAL LINKS LINK 1

FULL VIEW ONLY
LINK 11

Changing a Parameter Value
Refer to “The Menu System Map” above to see how increment
the menu is mapped.
Each menu contains parameters.
exit menu
With the Parameter you want on view, press M to
menu E M change
change
begin editing.
The up (↑) and down (↓) keys will now change the
parameter/function value. decrement
Press E to finish editing. EDITING PARAMETERS
The four keys will once again navigate around the Menus. Refer back to “ Navigating the
Menu System”, page 5-3.
Alarm Message Displays

An alarm message will be displayed on the MMI when the unit is tripped.
• The Converter has tripped.

The top line indicates a trip has occurred while
the bottom line gives the reason for the trip. * * * 1 ALARM * * *
1
See example opposite. HEATSINK TRIP
Acknowledge the trip message by pressing the E key.

Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” for trip messages and reasons.
Quick Diagnostics
Hold down the M key to enter the DIAGNOSTICS menu in the first entry, SPEED DEMAND.
Special Key Combinations

A special key combination restores ALL default parameters to the Converter.
• Hold down the four MMI keys (↑, ↓, E, M), then power-up the Converter.
Special Menu Features

Menu Viewing Levels
For ease of operation there are two `viewing levels` for the MMI: full view or reduced view.
The setting for the viewing level decides how much of the menu system will be displayed.
Refer to “The Menu System Map”, page 5-4 to see how the viewing level changes the displayed
menu.
To change the viewing level, go to the MENUS menu. The first parameter in this menu, FULL
MENUS selects the viewing level.
• Select DISABLED to use the reduced menu system.
• Select ENABLED to use the full menu system.
Selecting the Display Language
There is an option to select a different display language.
The choice of display language is selected by the LANGUAGE parameter in MENUS menu.
Remember to perform a PARAMETER SAVE if you need the new language to be saved on
power-down.
The available languages are: ENGLISH and FRENCH. However, other languages are available
by contacting Parker SSD Drives.

Password Protection
When in force, the password prevents unauthorised parameter modification by making all
parameters “read-only”. If you attempt to modify a password protected parameter, it will cause
“PASSWORD ??” to flash on the display. By default, the password feature is disabled, i.e.
0x0000.
There are two password parameters, stored in the PASSWORD menu at level 1:
ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD.
The ENTER PASSWORD and CHANGE PASSWORD values are hidden by “XXXX” until
you press the M key to begin editing the parameter.
To Activate Password Protection

1. Use the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) keys in the CHANGE CHANGE
1 PASSWORD
PASSWORD parameter to set a password (anything
other than 0000). Press the E key to exit the parameter. 0x0000 1
2. Move to the ENTER PASSWORD parameter. Enter

any number other than the password and press the E
key to exit. The system is now `password locked’. ENTER
1 PASSWORD
1
0x0000
Having activated the password protection, you can no

longer edit the CHANGE PASSWORD parameter until you deactivate the password protection.
To Deactivate Password Protection

Enter the current password in the ENTER PASSWORD
parameter. Press the E key to exit.
ENTER
1 PASSWORD
1
0x0000
To Reactivate Password Protection

Having deactivated your password, you can quickly
reactivate the same password by pressing the M key when
in the CLEAR PASSWORD menu. CLEAR
1 PASSWORD
1
This clears the value of the password in the CHANGE

PASSWORD menu and instead displays “****”.
Note: At default the password is 0000, password protection is not activated because 0000 is
the value for both CHANGE PASSWORD and ENTER PASSWORD.

How to Save, Restore and Copy your Settings
Saving Your Application
Note: Ensure that CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED before performing MMI Menu Map
a PARAMETER SAVE (when set to ENABLED, the drive cannot run). 1 SYSTEM
The PARAMETER SAVE menu, available in the both the full and 2 CONFIGURE I/O
reduced view levels, is used to save any changes you make to the MMI CONFIGURE ENABLE
settings.
Pressing the ↑ (UP) key, as instructed, saves all parameter
values in non-volatile memory, i.e. values are stored PARAMETER
1 SAVE
1
during power-down. UP TO ACTION
Restoring Saved Settings

If you are unsure about any changes you have made and you have not yet performed a
PARAMETER SAVE, simply switch the Converter off, and power-up again. The “last saved”
parameter settings will be restored.
Copying an Application
Copying an application requires a host computer connection to the Converter’s P3 port.
Information can then be downloaded to the computer (and uploaded to the Converter).
Refer to Chapter 14: “Serial Communications” for further information.


Programming Your Application 6-1
6 PROGRAMMING YOUR APPLICATION
Programming with Block Diagrams
You can program the Converter for specific applications using the MMI or suitable
programming tool, such as “ConfigEd Lite” which is Parker SSD Drives’ block programming
software.
The Converter is supplied with a basic set-up which can be used as a starting point for
application-specific programming. This programming could simply involve the inputting of
parameter values, or it may require the making or breaking of programmable links, which is a
feature of this unit.
Block diagram programming provides a visual method of planning the software to suit your
application. The basic block diagram is provided in Chapter 15 and shows the software
connections consisting of function blocks and links:
• Each function block contains the parameters required for setting-up a particular processing
feature. Sometimes more than one function block is provided for a feature, i.e. for multiple
digital inputs.
• Software links are used to connect the function blocks. Each link transfers the value of an
output parameter to an input parameter of another (or the same) function block.
Each individual block is a processing feature, i.e. it takes the input parameter, processes the
information, and makes the result available as one or more output parameters.
Modifying a Block Diagram

Configuration and Parameterisation Modes
There are two modes of operation used while modifying a block MMI Menu Map
diagram: Parameterisation and Configuration modes. 1 SYSTEM
The CONFIGURE ENABLE command is used to toggle between 2 CONFIGURE I/O

these two modes of operation.
CONFIGURE ENABLE
Parameterisation Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED)

In parameterisation mode you can change parameter values. The Converter can be
DEFAULT running or stopped. Note that some parameters can only be changed when the
Converter is stopped. It is not possible to modify the internal links when the Converter
is in parameterisation mode.
Configuration Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = ENABLED)

In the configuration mode you can modify the links in the function block diagram.
You can also change parameter values, as above. The Converter cannot run in this
mode.
Making and Breaking Links in Configuration Mode

Links can be moved, added or deleted from a block diagram whilst in the Configuration mode.
There are 12 links available, each has its own identification number (“link” number). You make
a link by setting the link’s “source” and “destination” tags to be the two parameter tag numbers
to be linked. The outputs of function blocks are not updated whilst in this mode.
Note: Links 11 and 12 can be configured to perform one of a number of basic functions upon
the source and/or auxiliary source tag values, to be output at the selected destination tag.
Programming Rules
The following rules apply when programming:
Parameterisation Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED)

6-2 Programming Your Application
• Function block output parameter values cannot be changed (because they are a result of the
function block’s processing)
• Function block input parameter values that receive their values from a link cannot be
changed (as they will change back to the value they receive from the link when the
Converter is running).
Configuration Mode (CONFIGURE ENABLE = ENABLED)

• A link’s destination tag must be set to an input parameter (only one link per input
parameter).
• A link’s source tag may be set to any parameter. Both input and output parameters can be
used as a source.
• Disable a link/function block by setting the “destination” and “source” tag to zero.
Saving Your Modifications

Ensure that CONFIGURE ENABLE = DISABLED before performing a PARAMETER SAVE.
If parameter values or links have been modified, the new settings must be saved. The Converter
will then retain the new settings during power-down. Refer to Chapter 5: “The Man-Machine
Interface (MMI)” - Saving Your Application.
Understanding the Function Block Description

The following function
Instance Name
blocks show the parameter
information necessary for Tag Number
programming the Converter. Default Value ANIN 1 (A2
Input parameters are shown – –
OUTPUT [246] 100
on the left hand side, and
1.0000 – [230] CALIBRATION –
output parameters are shown Output Parameter
100.00 % – [231] MAX VALUE –
on the right hand side of the Name
-100.00 % – [232] MIN VALUE –
block.
– ANIN 1 (A2) [ 50] – 0.00V
Some parameters are
indicated as “Reserved”, Tag Number
these parameters are for use
Default Value
by Parker SSD Drives Input Parameter Name
engineers.
Figure 6-1 Function Block Parameter Information
Instance Name Names the function block type

Default Value The default value of the unmodified factory set-up
Input/Output The name shown on ConfigEd Lite
Parameter Name
Tag Number Unique identification used for linking and communications
MMI Menu Map
1 SYSTEM MMI Menu Maps
The function block descriptions include an easy-find menu showing the menu levels and titles
2 CONFIGURE I/O
encountered to find the appropriate menu title, and the parameters contained in the menu(s).
3 ANALOG INPUTS The menu maps are shown as if the full view level is selected.
4 ANIN 1 (A2) Where there is more than one sub-menu, i.e. ANALOG INPUTS as illustrated, the parameters
shown will be for the last sub-menu. In many cases, these parameters will reflect the name and
4 ANIN 5 (A6)
number of the last sub-menu.
CALIBRATION
MAX VALUE Because of this intuitive naming of parameters, which is designed to make using the Operator
MIN VALUE Station easier, MMI parameter names may vary slightly from Function Block names.
DESTINATION TAG
A function block may also be represented by more than one MMI menu, e.g. FIELD
CONTROL. In contrast, the DIAGNOSTICS menu on the MMI is greatly reduced in the DIAGNOSTICS function block,
the remaining parameters being included in related function blocks.

Hexadecimal Representation of Trips

The HEALTH WORD and HEALTH STORE parameters use a four digit hexadecimal number
to identify individual trips. Each trip has a unique corresponding number as shown below.
Trip Trip Code
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
0 OVERSPEED 1
1 MISSING PULSE 2
2 FIELD OVER I 4
3 HEATSINK TRIP 8
4 THERMISTOR 1
5 OVERVOLTS (VA) 2
6 SPEED FEEDBACK 4
7 ENCODER FAILED 8
8 FIELD FAILED 1
9 3 PHASE FAILED 2
10 PHASE LOCK 4
11 5703 RCV ERROR 8
12 STALL TRIP 1
13 OVER I TRIP 2
14 Not used 4
15 ACCTS FAILED 8
Decimal number Display When more than one trip is to be represented at the
10 A same time then the trip codes are simply added together
11 B to form the value displayed. Within each digit, values
12 C between 10 and 15 are displayed as letters A to F
13 D
14 E
15 F For example, if the HEALTH WORD parameter is
01A8 then this represents a “1” in digit 3, an “8” and a
“2” in digit 2, (8+2 = 10, displayed as A) and an 8 in digit 1. This in turn represents the active
trips FIELD FAILED, ENCODER FAILED, OVERVOLTS (VA) and HEATSINK TRIP (an
unlikely situation).

Function Block Descriptions

Note: Remember to select the correct mode, Parameterisation or Configuration, whilst editing.
Refer back to “ Modifying a Block Diagram”, page 6-1. You must select the full view
level to see all of the function blocks, go to MENUS menu at level 1 on the MMI.
Function Block Page Function Block Page
ANALOG INPUTS 6-5 * MAIN PORT P1 6-36
ANALOG OUTPUTS 6-7 * MENUS 6-37
AUX I/O 6-8 * miniLINK 6-38
AUX PORT P2 6-10 PID 6-39 *
CALIBRATION 6-11 * RAISE/LOWER 6-42 *
CURRENT LOOP 6-14 * RAMPS 6-44 *
CURRENT PROFILE 6-17 SETPOINT SUM 1 6-48 *
DIAGNOSTICS 6-18 * SETPOINT SUM 2 6-49
DIAMETER CALC 6-22 SPEED LOOP 6-51 *

ª SETPOINTS
DIGITAL INPUTS 6-24
ª DIGITAL INPUT C4 & C5 ADVANCED (Speed Loop) 6-55
ª ADAPTION
DIGITAL OUTPUTS 6-26 ª ZERO SPD QUENCH
FIELD CONTROL 6-27 * STANDSTILL 6-56 *

ª FLD VOLTAGE VARS
ª FLD WEAK VARS STOP RATES 6-57 *
INHIBIT ALARMS 6-30 SYSTEM PORT P3 6-59

ª P3 SETUP
JOG/SLACK 6-32 * ª BISYNCH SUPPORT
ª 5703 SUPPORT
LINK 11 & LINK 12 6-34
TAPER CALC 6-60
TENS+COMP CALC 6-61
TORQUE CALC 6-63
USER FILTER 6-64
* These function blocks contain parameters from the DIAGNOSTICS menu on the MMI.

ANALOG INPUTS
MMI Menu Map ANIN 1 (A2) ANIN 2 (A3)
1 SYSTEM – OUTPUT [246] – 100 1.0000 – [233] CALIBRATION –
1.0000 – [230] CALIBRATION – 100.00 % – [234] MAX VALUE –
2 CONFIGURE I/O
100.00 % – [231] MAX VALUE – -100.00 % – [235] MIN VALUE –
3 ANALOG INPUTS -100.00 % – [232] MIN VALUE – – ANIN 2 (A3) – 0.00V
– ANIN 1 (A2) – 0.00V
4 ANIN 1 (A2)
ANIN 3 (A4) ANIN 4 (A5)
4 ANIN 2 (A3) – OUTPUT [249] – 5 – OUTPUT [250] – 48
1.0000 – [236] CALIBRATION – 1.0000 – [239] CALIBRATION –
4 ANIN 3 (A4)
100.00 % – [237] MAX VALUE – 100.00 % – [240] MAX VALUE –
4 ANIN 4 (A5) -100.00 % – [238] MIN VALUE – -100.00 % – [238] MIN VALUE –
– ANIN 3 (A4) – 0.00V – ANIN 4 (A5) – 0.00V
4 ANIN 5 (A6)
ANIN 5 (A6)
CALIBRATION – OUTPUT [247] – 301
MAX VALUE The analog input block is used to scale
1.0000 – [242] CALIBRATION –
MIN VALUE and clamp the inputs for terminals A2 to
100.00 % – [243] MAX VALUE –
DESTINATION TAG A6.
-100.00 % – [244] MIN VALUE –
– ANIN 5 (A6) – 0.00V
Note: ANIN 2 (A3) is not reconfigurable and is connected directly to the SETUP PARAMETERS::
SPEED LOOP:: SETPOINTS:: RATIO 2 (A3) input, and the SETUP PARAMETER:: CURRENT
LOOP:: I DMD. ISOLATE switch. Refer to Chapter 15: The Default Application” block
diagram for more information.
Tag 493 allows access to the calibrated value of ANIN 2 (via an internal link for
example). To avoid interference with other drive functions the parameter RATIO 2 (A3)
must be set to zero, and the I DMD. ISOLATE parameter must be set to DISABLED, i.e.
selecting the Speed Loop as shown in the main block diagram.
ANIN 2 (A3) is a direct input into the speed loop/current loop and is scanned
synchronously with the current loop (typically every 3.33ms) rather than every micro cycle
time (typically 7ms). Therefore it should be used for any signal whose response is critical
e.g. a trim input from a digital speed and position locking system.
Parameter Descriptions
CALIBRATION Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000
The analog input scaling ratio.
MAX VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00
The maximum value of the scaled analog input.
MIN VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00
The minimum value of the scaled analog input
ANIN 1 (A2) to ANIN 5 (A6)
Refer to the DIAGNOSTICS function block description, page 6-18.
OUTPUT Range: 0 to 499
(DESTINATION TAG)
The destination Tag No. of the scaled analog input value.

Functional Description
Configurable Analog Inputs
CALIBRATION
MAX VALUE
0 OUTPUT
MIN VALUE
DIAGNOSTIC

ANALOG OUTPUTS
MMI Menu Map ANOUT 1 (A7) ANOUT 2 (A8)
1 SYSTEM – [251] INPUT – – [252] INPUT –
100.00 % – [245] 10V CAL – 100.00% – [248] 10V CAL –
2 CONFIGURE I/O
0.00 % – [464] OFFSET – 0.00% – [465] OFFSET –
3 ANALOG OUTPUTS FALSE – [362] MODULUS – FALSE – [363] MODULUS –
– ANOUT 1 (A7) [ 55] – 0.00V – ANOUT 2 (A8) [ 56] – 0.00V
4 ANOUT 1 (A7)
4 ANOUT 2 (A8)
% TO GET 10V This function block converts the demand percentage into a form suitable for driving the analog
MODULUS
output electronics of the Converter.
OFFSET
SOURCE TAG
INPUT Range: 0 to 499
(SOURCE TAG)
The source Tag No. of the output value.
10V CAL Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
(% TO GET 10V)
Scaler value which produces 10V output.
OFFSET Range: -100.00% to 100.00%
Offset value added to the normal output value after the scaler and before the modulus.
MODULUS Range: TRUE/FALSE
Unsigned analog output enable
ANOUT 1 (A7) to ANOUT 2 (A8)
Configurable Analog Outputs
MODULUS OFFSET
INPUT
DIAGNOSTIC
10V CAL

AUX I/O
MMI Menu Map The auxiliary I/O parameters are primarily AUX I/O
1 SETUP PARAMETERS intended to extend the functionality of the START (C3) [ 68] – OFF
serial links by allowing them access to the JOG INPUT (C4) [ 69] – OFF
2 AUX I/O drive analog and digital terminals. ENABLE (C5) [ 70] – OFF
AUX START
ON – [161] AUX START –
AUX JOG
ON – [227] AUX JOG –
AUX ENABLE
ON – [168] AUX ENABLE –
AUX DIGOUT 1
OFF – [ 94] AUX DIGOUT 1 –
AUX DIGOUT 2
AUX DIGOUT 3 OFF – [ 95] AUX DIGOUT 2 –
ANOUT 1 OFF – [ 96] AUX DIGOUT 3 –
ANOUT 2 0.00 % – [128] ANOUT 1 –
JOG/SLACK 0.00 % – [129] ANOUT 2 –
ENABLE OFF – [496] JOG/SLACK –
OFF – [497] ENABLE –
AUX START Range: ON/OFF
Software Start/Run command.
AUX JOG Range: ON/OFF
Software Jog command.
AUX ENABLE Range: ON/OFF
Software Enable command.
AUX DIGOUT 1 Range: ON/OFF
Software digital output 1.
ANOUT 1 Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Software analog output 1.
ANOUT 2 Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Software analog output 2.
JOG/SLACK
Reserved parameter for use by Parker SSD Drives.
ENABLE
START (C3)
JOG INPUT (C4)
(DIGITAL INPUT C4)
ENABLE (C5)
(DIGITAL INPUT C5)

In the case of auxiliary digital inputs AUX START, AUX JOG and AUX ENABLE, the overall
input will be the result of the "AND" gating of the normal terminal signal with the auxiliary
signal.
In the case of the digital and analog outputs, the relevant Tag No’s are internal memory
locations which can be attached by configuration to the digital or analog output terminals and
are controlled by the serial links or the MMI.
ANOUT 1 & 2 can also be used as general "staging posts" for connecting inputs to outputs.
Example: Connect Analog Input 1 (A2) directly to Analog Output 1 (A7)
Tag No. 128
ANOUT 1
ANIN 1 (A2) ANOUT 1

Destination Tag = 128 Source Tag = 128
AUX I/O
DEFAULT
TAG # PARAMETER SETTING
D:32
161 AUX START ON
START C3 68
D:33 227 AUX JOG ON

JOG C4 69
AM D:34 ENABLE 168 AUX ENABLE ON

C5 70
Note (1)
CONFIGURABLE AUX I/O POINTS
C9 +24V NOTE (2)
94 AUX DIGOUT 1 OFF 94
ANOUT 1 0.00% 128
128
129 ANOUT 2 0.00% 129
NOTE (1) DC CONTACTOR AM AUXILIARY

JOG RUN
INTERLOCK WITH DRIVE ENABLE
TO DRIVE START
TO JOG/SLACK
NOTE (2) 3 CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL AND 2 CONFIGURABLE
ANALOG AUX POINTS ARE AVAILABLE. THESE AUX
I/O POINTS ALLOW INPUTS OR SERIAL INFORMATION TO DRIVE ENABLE
TO BE CONNECTED TO OUTPUTS. (INPUTS MAY BE
SENT TO THESE TAG DESTINATIONS AND OUTPUTS
MAY READ THESE LOCATIONS AS SOURCE TAGS).

AUX PORT P2 AUX PORT P2
ENABLED – [147] SRL LINK ENABLE –
MMI Menu Map This function block configures the port for
0 – [140] GROUP ID (GID) –
1 SERIAL LINKS connecting to a suitable unit, i.e. the 5721
0 – [141] UNIT ID (UID) –
Operator Station for controlling the 5720
ASCII – [149] PROTOCOL –
2 AUX PORT P2 Quadraloc controller.
9600 – [151] BAUD RATE –
SRL LINK ENABLE
GROUP ID (GID) DISABLED – [153] ESP SUP. (ASCII) –
UNIT ID (UID) 0.00% – [145] CHANGEBAND (BIN) –

PROTOCOL 00C0 – [150] ERROR REPORT –
BAUD RATE FFFF – [148] PNO. 7 –
ESP SUP. (ASCII)
CHANGEBAND (BIN)
ERROR REPORT
PNO.7
SRL LINK ENABLE Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
Enables port operation.
GROUP ID (GID) Range: 0 to 7
The Parker SSD Drives protocol group identity address.
UNIT ID (UID) Range: 0 to 15
The Parker SSD Drives protocol unit identity address.
PROTOCOL Range: See below
Selects the protocol to be used. The selections are:
ASCII
BINARY
OPTION (select OPTION if say a Profibus option is fitted)
BAUD RATE Range: See below
Selects the Baud Rate.
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600 (default)
19200
ESP SUP. (ASCII) Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
Enable if communicating with a unit using Parker SSD Drive’s own ESP protocol.
CHANGEBAND (BIN) Range: 0.00% to 327.67%
Percentage change in value to trigger a BINARY Enquiry Poll update.
ERROR REPORT Range: 0000 to FFFF
Displays the last error as a hexadecimal code. Writing any value to this parameter will set the
value to >00C0 (No Error). Refer to Chapter 14: “Serial Communications” - Reference for a list
of codes.
PNO. 7 Range: 0000 to FFFF
Control word for Multi-Parameter Polling (refer to the COMMS Option Board Technical
Manual - Parameter Specification Tables.

CALIBRATION
MMI Menu Map This function block contains motor-specific CALIBRATION
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
parameters.
– TERMINAL VOLTS [ 57] – 0.00%
– TACH INPUT (B2) [ 58] – 0.0%
2 CALIBRATION
– ENCODER [ 59] – 0 RPM
ARMATURE V CAL
– BACK EMF [ 60] – 0.00%
IR COMPENSATION
– STALL TRIP [112] – OK
ENCODER RPM
– FIELD I FBK. [181] – 0.0%
ENCODER LINES
ANALOG TACH CAL 1.0000 – [ 20] ARMATURE V CAL. –
ZERO SPD. OFFSET 0.00 % – [ 21] IR COMPENSATION –

ARMATURE I (A9) 1000 RPM – [ 22] ENCODER RPM –
SPD FBK ALM LEVEL 1000 – [ 24] ENCODER LINES –
STALL THRESHOLD 1.0000 – [ 23] ANALOG TACH CAL –
STALL TRIP DELAY 0.00 % – [ 10] ZERO SPD. OFFSET –
OVERSPEED LEVEL BIPOLAR – [ 25] ARMATURE I (A9) –
FIELD I CAL
50.0 % – [180] SPDFBK ALM LEVEL –
95.00 % – [263] STALL THRESHOLD –
10.0 SECS – [224] STALL TRIP DELAY –
125.00 % – [188] OVERSPEED LEVEL –
1.0000 – [182] FIELD I CAL –
0x2710 – [267] POSITION COUNT –
10000 – [275] POSITION DIVIDER –
ARMATURE V CAL Range: 0.9800 to 1.1000
Trim adjustment of the motor armature volts to give exactly 100% at the required actual voltage
value (e.g. 460V etc.).
Note: - Primary voltage calibration is achieved by adjusting VA calibration values using SW7.
IR COMPENSATION Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Compensation for motor IR drop to improve regulation when using armature voltage feedback as
the speed feedback.
ENCODER RPM Range: 0 to 6000 RPM
Motor top speed setting when using encoder feedback.
ENCODER LINES Range: 10 to 5000
The 5901 Microtach has 1000 lines per revolution as standard. Proprietary encoders of other
specifications can be normalised by setting this parameter as appropriate.
ANALOG TACH CAL Range: 0.9800 to 1.1000
Trim adjustment of the motor speed to give exactly 100% at the required actual speed value (e.g.
1500 RPM etc). Note: Primary tacho calibration is achieved by adjusting SW1 - 3 on the tacho
calibration board.
ZERO SPD. OFFSET Range: -5.00 to 5.00 %
If the speed feedback is not zero when the drive is stationary (possibly due to hardware offsets
etc.) the setting of this parameter to the value of the offset will result in a zero reading from the
speed feedback.
ARMATURE I (A9) Range: UNIPOLAR/BIPOLAR
Selects operation of the current meter output (terminal A9), either bipolar or unipolar.
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %
The speed feedback alarm compares speed feedback to armature voltage. The alarm level is the
threshold which the difference between the two signals should exceed for the alarm to activate.

STALL THRESHOLD Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %

Stall comparator current feedback threshold level.
STALL TRIP DELAY Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Stall comparator time-out delay before stall output becomes true.
ZERO SPD. OFFSET
CURRENT FEEDBACK
Comparator DELAY STALL TRIP
STALL THRESHOLD
STALL TRIP DELAY
OVERSPEED LEVEL Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %

Speed feedback level for overspeed alarm
FIELD I CAL. Range: 0.9800 to 1.1000
Trim adjustment of the motor field current to give exactly 100% at the required actual current
value (e.g. 1.5A etc.). Note: Primary field calibration is achieved by adjusting IF calibration
using SW1 - 3.
POSITION COUNT
POSITION DIVIDER
TERMINAL VOLTS
TACH INPUT (B2)
ENCODER
BACK EMF
STALL TRIP
FIELD I FBK.

CALIBRATION
DEFAULT
SETTING PARAMETER TAG#
0.00% ZERO SPD. OFFSET 10
0001 ENCODER LINES 24

TO SPEED LOOP 1000 RPM ENCODER RPM 22
SPEED FEEDBACK
SELECTION
206 ENCODER
ENCODER D:48
59 INTERFACE
OPTION PCB
1.0000 ANALOG TACH CAL 23
ANALOG
308 TACH
TACH INPUT (B2) D:47
58 B2
1.0000 ARMATURE V CAL. 20
BLACK EMF VA/100

TO FIELD TERMINAL VOLTS D:45
60 57
REGULATOR
D:46
-
+ 0.00% IR COMPENSATION 21
SPEED FEEDBACK
FROM SPEED LOOP ARMATURE
ACCT
TO INHIBIT ALARMS 50.0% SPDFBK ALM LEVEL 180

SPEED FEEDBACK ALARM
10.0 SECS STALL TRIP DELAY 224
95.00% STALL THRESHOLD 263

FROM
CAL CIRCUIT POWER
STALL
BOARD
TRIP
TO INHIBIT ALARMS 112 t
D:15
AT ZERO SPEED
FROM STANDSTILL
BIPOLAR ARMATURE I (A9 ) 25

ARMATURE CURRENT
-10V -0 +10V A9 ia
OR 0- +10V
lial
1.0000 FIELD I. CAL 182
FIELD
D:23 ACCT
TO FIELD 300 FIELD I FBK
CONTROL 181

CURRENT LOOP
MMI Menu Map This function block allows user CURRENT LOOP
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
parameterisation of the conventional
– AT CURRENT LIMIT [ 42] – FALSE
current/torque loop of the converter.
– CURRENT FEEDBACK [298] – 0.00%
2 CURRENT LOOP
– CURRENT DEMAND [299] – 0.00%
CUR. LIMIT/SCALER
100.00 % – [ 15] CUR. LIMIT/SCALER –
MAIN CURR. LIMIT
200.00 % – [421] MAIN CURR. LIMIT –
PROP GAIN
45.00 – [ 16] PROP GAIN –
INT. GAIN
AUTOTUNE 3.50 – [ 17] INT. GAIN –
DISCONTINUOUS – AUTOTUNE [ 18] – OFF

ADDITIONAL DEM 12.00 % – [137] DISCONTINUOUS –
BIPOLAR CLAMPS 0.00 % – [ 30] ADDITIONAL DEM –
REGEN MODE DISABLED – [ 90] BIPOLAR CLAMPS –
POS. I CLAMP ENABLED – [201] REGEN MODE –
NEG. I CLAMP 100.00 % – [301] POS. I CLAMP –
I DMD. ISOLATE
-100.00 % – [ 48] NEG. I CLAMP –
DISABLED – [119] I DMD. ISOLATE –
– ILOOP SUSPEND [ 46] – TRUE
CUR. LIMIT/SCALER Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Current limit scaler. It scales bipolar/unipolar clamps.
MAIN CURR. LIMIT Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Main current limit parameter which is independent of current limit scaler and in series with the
other three current limit blocks.
PROP GAIN Range: 0.00 to 200.00
Proportional gain control for armature current PI loop. This parameter is set during the autotune
function.
INT. GAIN Range: 0.00 to 200.00
Integral gain control for armature current PI loop. This parameter is set during the autotune
function.
DISCONTINUOUS Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Discontinuous-to-continuous mean armature current boundary level. This parameter is set during
the autotune function and affects the performance of the adaptive algorithm.
ADDITIONAL DEM Range: -200.00 to 200.00 %
Additional current demand input.
BIPOLAR CLAMPS Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
Select input for bipolar (asymmetric) or unipolar (symmetric) current clamps for the 4 quadrants
of operation. Default setting of DISABLED means UNIPOLAR clamps selected.
REGEN MODE Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
Select input for regenerative (4-quadrant) or non-regenerative (2-quadrant) mode of operation. If
the stack is a 2-quadrant (only one thyristor bridge) this parameter should be set to Disabled.
Note: we recommend that this parameter is not changed whilst the machine is running.
POS. I CLAMP Range: -200.00 to 200.00 %
Positive current clamp in Bipolar Clamp mode.
NEG. I CLAMP Range: -200.00 to 200.00 %
Negative current clamp in Bipolar Clamp mode.
Note on bipolar current clamps: these clamps in bipolar mode can cross-over onto the same
quadrant as long as the POS. I CLAMP is always greater (algebraically) than the NEG. I
CLAMP.

I DMD. ISOLATE Range: ENABLED/DISABLED

Speed loop bypass; the current demand is taken from ANIN 2 (A3).
The simplified diagram below shows how the I DMD ISOLATE parameter selects the controlling
loop.
Current Feedback
I DMD ISOLATE
Speed Demand shown ENABLED
+
SPEED LOOP PI Current Demand -
- CURRENT LOOP PI Motor
+
Speed Feedback
Analog I/P2 (A3)
Digital I/P3 (C8)
AUTOTUNE Range: ON/OFF

This is the autotune function trigger input.
ILOOP SUSPEND
AT CURRENT LIMIT
CURRENT FEEDBACK
CURRENT DEMAND

CURRENT LOOP
FROM FROM
CURRENT INVERSE TIME
PROFILE OVERLOAD
DEFAULT
TAG# PARAMETER SETTING
16 AUTOTUNE OFF
16 PROP.GAIN 45.00
17 INT. GAIN 3.50
137 DISCONTINUOUS 12.00
201 REGEN MODE ENABLED
30 ADDITIONAL DEM 0.00%

FROM ACTUAL
ANALOG POS I LIM
I/P 2 D:8 NOTE (2)
67
+ CURRENT 10+
DEMAND PHASE
FROM 66 P1 ANGLE
SPEED + 299 CONTROL
D:4 10-
LOOP
61
DRIVE
ACTUAL ENABLED
NEG D:9
I LIM
42
ANALOG I/P 3 NOTE (1) D:11
C8 119 IDMD. ISOLATE DIGITAL I/P 3 AT CURRENT
CURRENT LIMIT LIMIT
PROGRAM STOP
SWITCH
SELECTS PROG STOP
I LIM SET IN D:7 88 87 D:6
ANALOG I/P 1 "STOP RATES" MENU NEG I
CLAMP POS I
CLAMP D:5 CURRENT
C6 90 BIPOLAR CLAMPS DIGITAL I/P 1
FEEDBACK
-1
ANALOG I/P 4
A5 48 NEG I CLAMP ANALOG I/P 4
15 CUR. LIMIT/SCALER 100.00%

ANALOG I/P 5
A6 301 POS. I CLAMP ANALOG I/P 5
421 MAIN CURR. LIMIT 200.00%
298 65
ARMATURE CURRENT
FROM CALIBRATION BOARD
Note 1: IDMD isolate removes speed loop demand and selects analog I/P 2 as current
regulator demand.
IDMD isolate is overridden by program stop and stop to return drive to speed
regulation.
Note 2: Regen mode disable prevents negative current demand. Non-regenerative drives
should have regen mode disabled.

CURRENT PROFILE
MMI Menu Map When speed control is obtained by field CURRENT PROFILE
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
weakening, the ability of the motor to
100.0 % – [ 32] SPD BRK 1 (LOW) –
commutate armature current is reduced at
100.0 % – [ 31] SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) –
2 CURRENT PROFILE low field currents. Also some motors exhibit
200.0 % – [ 93] IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1) –
SPD BRK 1 (LOW) commutation limitations at higher speeds
200.0 % – [ 33] IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2) –
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) even with rated field current.
IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
SPD BRK 1 (LOW) Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %
This is the motor speed at which current limit profiling begins.
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %
This is the upper speed limit at which current limit profiling ends.
IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1) Range: 0.0 to 200.0 %
This sets the current limit value at or below speed break-point 1, provided the other current
limits are greater than this setting.
IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2) Range: 0.0 to 200.0 %
This sets the current limit value at or above speed break-point 2, provided the other current
limits are greater than this setting.
Current Limit
IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1)
IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2)
Speed Demand
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)

DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
MMI Menu Map This function block is used to monitor
– SPEED FEEDBACK [207] – 0.00%
the status of the drive, internal variables,
1 DIAGNOSTICS
and its inputs and outputs. – SPEED ERROR [297] – 0.00%
D:1 SPEED DEMAND – CURRENT DEMAND [299] – 0.00%
D:2 SPEED FEEDBACK The Parameter Descriptions table below – CURRENT FEEDBACK [298] – 0.00%
D:3 SPEED ERROR describes the parameters contained in – POS. I CLAMP [ 87] – 0.0%
D:4 CURRENT DEMAND the DIAGNOSTICS function block. – NEG. I CLAMP [ 88] – 0.0%
D:5 CURRENT FEEDBACK
D:6 POS. I CLAMP
The MMI DIAGNOSTICS Menu listing – ACTUAL POS I LIM [ 67] – 0.0%
D:7 NEG. I CLAMP

on the next page contains all the – ACTUAL NEG I LIM [ 61] – 0.0%
D:8 ACTUAL POS I LIM

parameters in the DIAGNOSTICS – DRIVE START [ 82] – OFF
D:9 ACTUAL NEG I LIM menu. Each parameter is given a – DRIVE ENABLE [ 84] – DISABLED
D:10 INVERSE TIME O/P number, i.e. D:32, the thirty-second – FIELD I FBK. [300] – 0.00%
D:11 AT CURRENT LIMIT entry in the MMI DIAGNOSTICS menu – TACH INPUT (B2) [308 – 0.0%
D:12 AT ZERO SPEED - many of the functional diagrams in this – ENCODER [206] – 0 RPM
D:13 AT ZERO SETPOINT chapter refer to diagnostics using this
D:14 AT STANDSTILL numbering system.
D:15 STALL TRIP
(Note the reference in brackets where each parameter appears in another function block.)
D:16 RAMPING
D:17 PROGRAM STOP
D:18 DRIVE START Parameter Descriptions
D:19 DRIVE ENABLE
D:20 OPERATING MODE SPEED FEEDBACK Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
D:21 FIELD ENABLE Speed loop feedback. (Refer to SPEED LOOP, page 6-51)
D:22 FIELD DEMAND
D:23 FIELD I FBK. SPEED ERROR Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
D:24 FLD. FIRING ANGLE Speed loop error. (Refer to SPEED LOOP, page 6-51)
D:25 ANIN 1 (A2)
D:26 ANIN 2 (A3) CURRENT DEMAND Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
D:27 ANIN 3 (A4) Current loop demand (speed error PI output or external current demand clamped by all the
D:28 ANIN 4 (A5) current limits). (Refer to CURRENT LOOP, page 6-14)
D:29 ANIN 5 (A6)
D:30 ANOUT 1 (A7) CURRENT FEEDBACK Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
D:31 ANOUT 2 (A8) Scaled and filtered armature current. (Refer to CURRENT LOOP, page 6-14)
D:32 START (C3)
D:33 DIGITAL INPUT C4 POS. I CLAMP Range: -200.0% to 200.0%
D:34 DIGITAL INPUT C5 Positive current clamp. (Refer to CURRENT LOOP, page 6-14)
D:35 DIGIN 1 (C6)
D:36 DIGIN 2 (C7) NEG. I CLAMP Range: -200.0% to 200.0%
D:37 DIGIN 3 (C8) Negative current clamp. (Refer to CURRENT LOOP, page 6-14)
D:38 DIGOUT 1 (B5)
D:39 DIGOUT 2 (B6) ACTUAL POS I LIM Range: -200.0% to 200.0%
D:40 DIGOUT 3 (B7) Overall positive current limit value. (DIAGNOSTIC only)
D:41 RAISE/LOWER O/P
D:42 PID OUTPUT ACTUAL NEG. I LIM Range: -200.0% to 200.0%
D:43 PID CLAMPED Overall negative current limit value. (DIAGNOSTIC only)
D:44 PID ERROR
D:45 SPT SUM 1 OUTPUT DRIVE START Range: ON/OFF
D:46 RAMP OUTPUT Controller start/run command. (DIAGNOSTIC only)
D:47 SPEED SETPOINT
D:48 TERMINAL VOLTS DRIVE ENABLE Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
D:49 BACK EMF Drive speed and current loop are enabled/quenched. (DIAGNOSTIC only)
D:50 TACH INPUT (B2)
D:51 ENCODER FIELD I FBK. Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
Scaled field current feedback. (Refer to CALIBRATION, page 6-11)
TACH INPUT (B2) Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback. (Refer to CALIBRATION, page 6-11)
ENCODER Range: 0 RPM to 6000 RPM
Encoder speed feedback in RPM. (Refer to CALIBRATION, page 6-11)

The MMI DIAGNOSTICS Menu
SPEED DEMAND Tag No. 89 - D:1 -105.00% to 105.00%
Speed loop total setpoint after the ramp-to-zero block.
(Refer to STOP RATES, page 6-57)
SPEED FEEDBACK Tag No. 207 - D:2 -300.00% to 300.00%
Speed loop feedback.
(Refer to SPEED LOOP, page 6-51)
SPEED ERROR Tag No. 297 - D:3 -300.00% to 300.00%
Speed loop error.
CURRENT DEMAND Tag No. 299 - D:4 -300.00% to 300.00%
Current loop demand (speed error PI output or external current demand clamped by all the
current limits).
(Refer to CURRENT LOOP, page 6-14)
CURRENT FEEDBACK Tag No. 298 - D:5 -300.00% to 300.00%
Scaled and filtered armature current.
POS I CLAMP Tag No. 87 - D:6 -200.00% to 200.00%
Positive current clamp.
NEG I CLAMP Tag No. 88 - D:7 -200.00% to 200.00%
Negative current clamp.
ACTUAL POS I LIM Tag No. 67 - D:8 -200.00% to 200.00%
Overall positive current limit value.
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
ACTUAL NEG I LIM Tag No. 61 - D:9 -200.00% to 200.00%
Overall negative current limit value.
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
INVERSE TIME O/P Tag No. 203 - D:10 0.00% to 200.00%
Inverse time clamp output level.
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
AT CURRENT LIMIT Tag No. 42 - D:11 TRUE/FALSE
Current demand is being restrained by the overall current limit.
AT ZERO SPEED Tag No. 77 - D:12 TRUE/FALSE
At zero speed feedback.
(Refer to STANDSTILL, page 6-56)
AT ZERO SETPOINT Tag No. 78 - D:13 TRUE/FALSE
At zero speed demand.
AT STANDSTILL Tag No. 79 - D:14 TRUE/FALSE
AT ZERO SPEED and AT ZERO SETPOINT.
STALL TRIP Tag No. 112 - D:15 OK/FAILED
Armature current is above STALL THRESHOLD and AT ZERO SPEED but not AT ZERO
SETPOINT.
(Refer to CALIBRATION, page 6-11)
RAMPING Tag No. 113 - D:16 TRUE/FALSE
If the difference between the ramp input and the ramp output is greater than the RAMP
THRESHOLD, then RAMPING is TRUE.
(Refer to RAMPS, page 6-44)

PROGRAM STOP Tag No. 80 - D:17 TRUE/FALSE
State of program stop (Terminal B8). When B8 is at 24V, then PROGRAM STOP is FALSE
and the program stop front panel LED is also ON.
(Refer to STOP RATES, page 6-57)
DRIVE START Tag No. 82 - D:18 ON/OFF
Controller start/run command.
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
DRIVE ENABLE Tag No. 84 - D:19 ENABLED/DISABLED
Drive speed and current loop are enabled/quenched.
(DIAGNOSTIC only)
OPERATING MODE Tag No. 212 - D:20
Indicates whether the drive is in RUN, JOG 1....STOP etc.
(Refer to JOG/SLACK, page 6-32)
FIELD ENABLE Tag No. 169 - D:21 ENABLED/DISABLED
Drive field loop is enabled/quenched.
(Refer to FIELD CONTROL, page 6-27)
FIELD DEMAND Tag No. 183 - D:22 0.00% to 100.00%
Field current demand.
FIELD I FBK Tag No. 300 - D:23 -300.00% to 300.00%
Scaled field current feedback.
FLD.FIRING ANGLE Tag No. 184 - D:24 0 DEG to 180 DEG
Field firing angle in degrees: 155 degrees is the value for back stop (min field) and 5 degrees is
the value for front stop (max field).
ANIN 1 (A2) Tag No. 50 - D:25 -100.00 to 100.00 VOLTS
Speed setpoint no. 1.
(Refer to ANALOG INPUTS, page 6-5)
Speed setpoint no. 2/current demand.
Speed setpoint no. 3 (ramped).
Negative current clamp; this is only active if bipolar clamps are enabled (C6 = ON).
Main current limit or positive current clamp if C6 = ON.
ANOUT 1 (A7) Tag No. 55 - D:30 -100.00 to 100.00 VOLTS
Scaled speed feedback.
(Refer to ANALOG OUTPUTS, page 6-7)
ANOUT 2 (A8) Tag No. 56 - D:31 -100.00 to 100.00 VOLTS
Total speed setpoint.
(Refer to ANALOG OUTPUTS, page 6-7)
START (C3) Tag No. 68 - D:32 ON/OFF
Start/Run terminal.
(Refer to AUX I/O, page 6-8)
DIGITAL INPUT (C4) Tag No. 69 - D:33 ON/OFF
Jog/Take-up Slack terminal.
(Refer to DIGITAL INPUTS, page 6-24 and AUX I/O, page 6-8)

DIGITAL INPUT (C5) Tag No. 70 - D:34 ON/OFF
Electronic enable/quench terminal (ON = Enabled).
(Refer to DIGITAL INPUTS, page 6-24 and AUX I/O, page 6-8)
DIGIN 1 (C6) Tag No. 71 - D:35 ON/OFF
Symmetrical current clamps/Asymmetrical (bipolar) current clamps (ON = Bipolar).
(Refer to DIGITAL INPUTS, page 6-24)
Ramp hold input (ON = Hold).
Current demand isolate; giving speed or current mode of operation. (ON = Current mode).
DIGOUT 1 (B5) Tag No. 74 - D:38 ON/OFF
At zero speed.
(Refer to DIGITAL OUTPUTS, page 6-26)
Drive healthy. Health is also displayed on the front panel LED, always ON when the start is
low.
Drive ready to run (all alarms healthy and mains synchronisation achieved)
RAISE/LOWER O/P Tag No. 264 - D:41 -300.00% to 300.00%
(OUTPUT) Value of the raise/lower ramp function.
(Refer to RAISE/LOWER, page 6-42)
PID OUTPUT Tag No. 417 - D:42 -315.00% to 315.00%
PID block output.
(Refer to PID, page 6-39)
PID CLAMPED Tag No. 416 - D:43 TRUE/FALSE
Logic output indicating whether the PID limits are active.
PID ERROR Tag No. 415 - D:44 -105.00% to 105.00%
PID error = Input 1 - Input 2
SPT SUM 1 OUTPUT Tag No. 86 - D:45 -200.00% to 200.00%
Setpoint sum 1 output.
(Refer to SETPOINT SUM 1, page 6-48)
RAMP OUTPUT Tag No. 85 - D:46 -100.00% to 100.00%
Setpoint ramp output.
(Refer to RAMPS, page 6-44)
SPEED SETPOINT Tag No. 63 - D:47 -300.00% to 300.00%
Speed loop total setpoint including the ramp output before the ramp-to-zero function.
TERMINAL VOLTS Tag No. 57 - D:48 -125.00% to 125.00%
Scaled terminal volts.
BACK EMF Tag No. 60 - D:49 -150.00% to 150.00%
Calculated motor back EMF including IR. compensation.
TACH INPUT (B2) Tag No. 308 - D:50 -300.00% to 300.00%
Scaled analog tachogenerator feedback.
ENCODER Tag No. 206 - D:51 0 RPM to 6000 RPM
Encoder speed feedback in RPM.

DIAMETER CALC.
MMI Menu Map This block calculates the diameter of a reel DIAMETER CALC.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
as a function of the reel speed and the line
– DIAMETER [427] – 0.00%
speed.
– MOD OF LINE SPEED [428] – 0.00%
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
– MOD OF REEL SPEED [429] – 0.00%
3 DIAMETER CALC. – UNFILTERED DIAMETER [430] – 0.00%
LINE SPEED 0.00 % – [424] LINE SPEED –

REEL SPEED 0.00 % – [437] REEL SPEED –
MIN DIAMETER 10.00 % – [425] MIN DIAMETER –
MIN SPEED 5.00 % – [426] MIN SPEED –
RESET VALUE 10.00 % – [462] RESET VALUE –
EXTERNAL RESET DISABLED – [463] EXTERNAL RESET –
RAMP RATE
5.0 SECS – [453] RAMP RATE –
DIAMETER
LINE SPEED Range: -105.00 to 105.00 %
This will usually be configured to be the analog tacho input and scaled appropriately during
calibration.
REEL SPEED Range: -105.00 to 105.00 %
This will usually be configured to be the drive's own speed feedback, i.e. encoder or arm.volts
feedback
MIN DIAMETER Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This is normally the empty core diameter.
MIN SPEED Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This is the minimum LINE SPEED level below which the diameter calculation is frozen.
RESET VALUE Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Normally for winders this will be set to the MIN DIAMETER value. This value will be
preloaded into the ramp (filter) output when EXTERNAL RESET is enabled.
EXTERNAL RESET Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
Whilst this input is being enabled the ramp is held at the RESET VALUE.
RAMP RATE Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
This is used to filter the output of the diameter calculator.
DIAMETER Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This is the output of the block and it can be connected to the appropriate points in the winder
block.
MOD OF LINE SPEED
MOD OF REEL SPEED
UNFILTERED DIAMETER

DIAMETER CALC.
z
MIN SPEED [426] X<Z
x
RAMP RATE [453]
Hold
LINE SPEED [424] |X| [428]
MIN DIAMETER [425] aX/Y DIAMETER [427]
REEL SPEED [437] |Y| [429]
[430]
RESET VALUE EXTERNAL RESET

[462] [463]
Line Speed (S)
ωr
Reel Diameter (D) Core Diameter (d)
Circumference = πD or Line Speed (S) = Reel Speed (ωr) x D
Thus D = S
ωr
i.e. D ∝ Line Speed (S)

Reel Speed (ωr )
Therefore with the web intact we can calculate the diameter from the two speeds

DIGITAL INPUTS
MMI Menu Map DIGIN 1 (C6) DIGIN 2 (C7)
1 SYSTEM – OUTPUT [102] – 90 – OUTPUT [105] – 118
0.01 % – [103] VALUE TRUE – 0.01 % – [106] VALUE TRUE –
2 CONFIGURE I/O
0.00 % – [104] VALUE FALSE – 0.00 % – [107] VALUE FALSE –
3 DIGITAL INPUTS – DIGIN 1 (C6) [ 71] – OFF – DIGIN 2 (C7) [ 72] – OFF
DIGIN 3 (C8)
4 DIGIN 1 (C6)
– OUTPUT [108] – 119
This function block allows the user to
4 DIGIN 2 (C7) 0.01 % – [109] VALUE TRUE –
control the digital operating parameters
0.00 % – [110] VALUE FALSE –
4 DIGIN 3 (C8) of the software. The digital input can be
– DIGIN 3 (C8) [ 73] – OFF
VALUE FOR TRUE
configured to point to a destination
VALUE FOR FALSE
location and to set that destination TRUE
DESTINATION TAG or FALSE depending upon programmable values.
MMI Menu Map

1 SYSTEM Parameter Descriptions
2 CONFIGURE I/O
VALUE TRUE Range: -300.00 % to 300.00%
3 DIGITAL INPUTS The value that OUTPUT assumes when input is TRUE.
4 DIGITAL INPUT C4 VALUE FALSE Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
The value that OUTPUT assumes when input is FALSE.
4 DIGITAL INPUT C5
DESTINATION TAG DIGIN 1 (C6) to DIGIN 3 (C8)

(DESTINATION TAG)
The destination Tag No. of the assumed value.
The destination for a digital input can be any valid Tag No, this means that a digital input can be
used to select one of two values for a given parameter. It is also possible to treat the values for
TRUE and FALSE as destination tags from other functions or inputs.
With regard to destinations

Configurable Digital Inputs
expecting logic parameters, 0.00% is
regarded as Logic 0 and any other DIAGNOSTIC
value is regarded as Logic 1. This
refers to the values set in both
VALUE TRUE and VALUE
FALSE.
Inverting the digital input is Value True
therefore simple; set VALUE TRUE Output
to 0.00% and VALUE FALSE to Value False
0.01% or any other non-zero
number.

Additional Inputs
It is possible to use an Analog Input as
a Digital Input to extend the number of Using Analog I/P as Digital I/P
Digital Inputs available. Again, 0.00%
100%
is regarded as Logic 0 and any other
value is regarded as Logic 1. 100%
0 Digital Dest.n TAG
0%
DIAGNOSTIC
DIGITAL INPUT C4 and DIGITAL INPUT C5

Digital Inputs C4 and C5 have DESTINATION TAGs only. They do not support VALUE
TRUE and VALUE FALSE, (VALUE TRUE is fixed at 0.01%, and VALUE FALSE is fixed at
0.00%).
DIGITAL INPUT C4
Only the OUTPUT (DESTINATION TAG) parameter of this digital input can be configured.
By default it is set to 496, which is the Tag No. for JOG/SLACK in the AUX I/O function
block.
DESTINATION TAG
Destination of DIGITAL INPUT C4
Range: 0 to 499
Default: 496
TAG N°: 494
DIGITAL INPUT C5
Only the OUTPUT (DESTINATION TAG) parameter of this digital input can be configured.
By default it is set to 497, which is the Tag No. for ENABLE in the AUX I/O function block.
DESTINATION TAG
Destination of DIGITAL INPUT C5
Range: 0 to 499
Default: 497
TAG N°: 495
If terminal C5 is used for anything other than “drive enable”, i.e. DESTINATION TAG
(Tag No. 495) is not set to 497, then the ENABLE parameter, Tag No. 497, must be set to
ON, otherwise the drive will not run.

DIGITAL OUTPUTS
MMI Menu Map DIGOUT 1 (B5) DIGOUT 2 (B6)
1 SYSTEM – [ 97] INPUT – – [ 98] INPUT –
FALSE – [359] INVERTED – FALSE – [360] INVERTED –
2 CONFIGURE I/O
0.00 % – [195] THRESHOLD – 0.00 % – [196] THRESHOLD –
3 DIGITAL OUTPUTS TRUE – [ 43] MODULUS – TRUE – [ 44] MODULUS –
– DIGOUT 1 (B5) [ 74] – ON – DIGOUT 2 (B6) [ 75] – ON
4 DIGOUT 1 (B5)
DIGOUT 2 (B6)
4 DIGOUT 2 (B6) – [ 99] INPUT –
This function block allows the user to FALSE – [361] INVERTED –
4 DIGOUT 3 (B7)
output digital parameters within the 0.00 % – [197] THRESHOLD –
THRESHOLD (>) software to other equipment. The digital TRUE – [ 45] MODULUS –
MODULUS output can be configured to point to any – DIGOUT 3 (B7) [ 76] – ON
SOURCE TAG digital value within the software system
INVERTED and output information depending upon
the status of that value.
(SOURCE TAG) Defines the source of the variable to control the digital output.
INVERTED Range: TRUE/FALSE
Selects inverted output
THRESHOLD Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
The threshold which the value must exceed to set the output to TRUE.
MODULUS Range: TRUE/FALSE
Output set TRUE for absolute or modulus of the Tag No. value.
DIGOUT 1 (B5) to DIGOUT 3 (B7)
Configurable Digital Outputs
MODULUS INVERTED
X 1
INPUT
|X| IP OP
0
%
THRESHOLD DIAGNOSTIC

FIELD CONTROL
MMI Menu Map This function block contains FIELD CONTROL
1 SETUP PARAMETERS all the parameters for the field
– FIELD ENABLE [169] – DISABLED
operating mode. It is viewed
2 FIELD CONTROL – FIELD DEMAND [183] – VOLTAGE
in three separate menus on the
– FLD. FIRING ANGLE [184] – 0 DEG
FIELD ENABLE MMI.
ENABLED – [170] FIELD ENABLE –
FLD CTRL MODE IS
In the FIELD CONTROL VOLTAGE – [209] FLD CTRL MODE IS –
menu, you select the field operating mode: open loop 90.00% – [210] RATIO OUT/IN –
MMI Menu Map voltage control or closed loop 100.00% – [171] SETPOINT –
1 SETUP PARAMETERS current control. 0.10 – [173] PROP. GAIN –
1.28 – [172] INT. GAIN –
2 FIELD CONTROL
FLD VOLTAGE VARS DISABLED – [174] FLD. WEAK ENABLE –
3 FLD VOLTAGE VARS Contains the parameters for 2.00 – [175] EMF LEAD –
RATIO OUT/IN
the open loop voltage control 40.00 – [176] EMF LAG –
SETPOINT
mode. 0.30 – [177] EMF GAIN –
PROP. GAIN 10.00% – [179] MIN FIELD CURRENT –
INT. GAIN FLD WEAK VARS 100.00% – [178] MAX VOLTS –
Contains the parameters for 100 – [191] BEMF FBK LEAD –
MMI Menu Map the closed loop current control 100 – [192] BEMF FBK LAG –
mode. 0.0 SEC – [185] FLD. QUENCH DELAY –
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
In certain applications of a DC QUENCH – [186] FLD. QUENCH MODE –
2 FIELD CONTROL
motor controller, high speeds
3 FLD WEAK VARS can only be achieved by reducing the field current and therefore the resultant torque. This is
termed as the Constant-Horsepower region or Field-Weakening region, and the speed at which
FLD. WEAK ENABLE
it begins is known as the Base Speed.
EMF LEAD
EMF LAG
EMF GAIN Parameter Descriptions
MIN FLD CURRENT
MAX VOLTS FIELD ENABLE Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
BEMF FBK LEAD Unquenches field current loop.
BEMF FBK LAG
FLD QUENCH DELAY FLD CTRL MODE IS Range: VOLTAGE
FLD. QUENCH MODE CONTROL/
CURRENT CONTROL
There are two field control modes:
(a) Field Voltage Control is an open loop phase angle control to give a certain
voltage output.
(b) Field Current Control is a closed loop current control for accurate field
control or expansion to field weakening.
RATIO OUT/IN Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

This parameter controls the output voltage from the open loop voltage control. The ratio is
defined as the DC output voltage over the AC RMS input voltage.
The default setting is equivalent to a single-phase diode rectifier.
SETPOINT Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Field current setpoint.
PROP. GAIN Range: 0.00 to 100.00
This is the proportional gain adjustment of the field current PI loop. The default of 0.10 is
equivalent to a real gain of 10.
INT. GAIN Range: 0.00 to 100.00
This is the integral gain adjustment of the field current PI loop.

FLD. WEAK ENABLE Range: ENABLED/DISABLED

Activates the additional motor back emf PID loop for field weakening (field spillover) control.
EMF LEAD Range: 0.10 to 50.00
With field weakening control enabled, a PID loop is brought into operation. This is the lead time
constant adjustment of the field weakening PID loop.
With a default of 2.00, real time constant = 200ms.
EMF LAG Range: 0.00 to 200.00
This is the lag time constant adjustment of the field weakening PID loop
With a default of 4.00, real time constant = 4000ms.
EMF GAIN Range: 0.00 to 100.00
This is the gain adjustment of the field weakening PID loop.
With a default of 3.00, real gain = 30.
MIN FLD CURRENT Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
The field weakening loop reduces the field current to achieve speed control above base speed. At
top speed the field reaches a minimum value. The Min Fld Current should be set below this
minimum value to allow reasonable margin for transient control near the top speed but not lower
than 6% as this could then cause the "Field Fail" alarm to operate.
MAX VOLTS Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Maximum volts is the voltage level at which field weakening begins. It is also known as
"Spillover Bias". The default value is 100% of the nominal value as set by the armature voltage
calibration value. For commissioning purposes this value can be set to another (lower) desirable
level. Subsequently, it is advisable to return it to 100% for normalisation.
BEMF FBK LEAD Range: 10 to 5000 (ms)
This is the lead time constant of the back emf feedback filter which is used for reducing
armature voltage overshoots when accelerating fast through base speed.
BEMF FBK LAG Range: 10 to 5000 (ms)
This is the lag time constant of the above feedback filter. If the filter is active, the ratio of lead /
lag should always be greater than 1 to give an overall lead action which reduces the voltage
overshoot and less than, typically, 3 for stable control. The default values 100/100 = 1 cancel
each other and make the filter inactive.
FLD QUENCH DELAY Range: 0.00 to 600.00 SECS
If dynamic breaking is used the field must be maintained for a period after the drive is disabled.
The field quench delay is the period of time which the field is maintained for.
FLD. QUENCH MODE Range: QUENCH/STANDBY
After the field quench delay has expired, the field can be entirely quenched or put into a standby
mode at 50% of rated current or volts depending whether in current or voltage control mode
respectively. (The default standby value of 50% can be modified through the "SYSTEM /
Reserved" Menu which is primarily for factory use only and requires the “super” password.)
FIELD ENABLE
FIELD DEMAND
FLD. FIRING ANGLE

FIELD CONTROL
DEFAULT
170 FIELD ENABLE ENABLED OUTPUT IN VOLTAGE MODE:
NOTE (2)
FLD VOLTAGE VARS
SUPPLY RATIO FIELD OUTPUT
210 RATIO OUT/IN 90.00% 460V 90% 410V
FIELD 460V 67% 300V
AC VOLTAGE 230V 90% 200V
[VF (AC) RMS]
230V 67% 150V
VOLTAGE TO FIELD
FROM FIELD CONTROL D:21 SCR FIRING
CURRENT LOOP O/P
(FLD CURRENT 169
VARS) CURRENT FIELD ENABLE
CONTROL
QUENCH
NOTE [1] STAND BY
209 FLD CTRL MODE VOLTAGE ____
=O/P
2
186 FLD QUENCH MODE QUENCH
185 FLD QUENCH DELAY 0.0 SECS
t
NOTE [2]
DISABLING FIELD ENABLE PARAMETER DRIVE RUN
WILL AUTOMATICALLY OVERRIDE FIELD
FAILURE ALARM.
FLD CURRENT VARS

DEFAULT
173 PROP. GAIN 0.10
172 INT. GAIN 1.28
FIELD CURRENT
FEEDBACK TO FIELD CONTROL
MODE SELECT
- D:22 - D:24 (CURRENT / VOLTAGE)
FIELD WEAKENING
CURRENT DEMAND 183 PI 184
+
(FROM FLD WEAK VARS) + FIELD DEMAND
FLD FIRING
ANGLE
171 SETPOINT 100.00%
FLD WEAK VARS

NOTE [1]
TAG# PARAMETER DEFAULT STABLE FIELD WEAKENING
NOTE [1] SETTING OPERATION REQUIRES ENCODER
OR ANALOG TACH FEEDBACK
174 FLD WEAK ENABLE DISABLED
175 EMF LEAD 2.00

176 EMF LAG 40.00
177 EMF GAIN 0.30
191 BEMF FBK LEAD 100 TO FIELD
192 BEMF FBK LAG 100 CURRENT LOOP FLD
- CLAMP
CURRENT VARS
BACK EMF MOTOR -
FEEDBACK BEMF PID
CALIBRATION FILTER +
178 MAX VOLTS 100.00%
179 MIN FLD CURRENT 100.00%

INHIBIT ALARMS
MMI Menu Map This function block provides a view into ALARMS
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
the current and past trip conditions, and
– READY [125] – NOT READY
allows some trips to be disabled.
– HEALTHY [122] – HEALTHY
2 INHIBIT ALARMS
– HEALTH WORD [115] – 0x0210
FIELD FAIL
– HEALTH STORE [116] – OK
5703 RCV ERROR
ENABLED – [ 19] FIELD FAIL –
STALL TRIP
ENABLED – [111] 5703 RCV ERROR –
TRIP RESET
SPEED FBK ALARM DISABLED – [ 28] STALL TRIP –
ENCODER ALARM TRUE – [305] TRIP RESET –

ENABLED – [ 81] SPEED FBK ALARM –
ENABLED – [ 92] ENCODER ALARM –
FIELD FAIL Range: ENABLED/INHIBITED
Inhibits the field fail alarm.
5703 RCV ERROR Range: ENABLED/INHIBITED
Inhibits 5703 serial communications receive error. Only active in Slave Mode.
STALL TRIP Range: ENABLED/INHIBITED
Inhibits the stall trip alarm from tripping the contactor out.
TRIP RESET Range: TRUE/FALSE
When this is FALSE the faults are latched permanently and the HEALTHY output remains
inactive after toggling the Start input (C3) off/on. The Trip Reset must then be set to TRUE for
the faults to be reset and the HEALTHY output to go active (high) when C3 goes low. This
feature can be used in applications where you want to reset the faults under your own control,
rather than automatically with the Start/Run command.
SPEED FBK ALARM Range: ENABLED/INHIBITED
Inhibits the speed feedback alarm.
ENCODER ALARM Range: ENABLED/INHIBITED
Inhibits the encoder option board alarm.
READY
HEALTHY
HEALTH WORD Range: 0000 to FFFF
The hexadecimal sum of any alarms present. Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding” -
Alarm Messages.
HEALTH STORE Range: 0000 to FFFF
The hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm. Refer to Chapter 7: “Trips and Fault Finding”
- Alarm Messages.

INHIBIT ALARMS
DEFAULT TO ALARM STATUS
FIELD FAIL
19 FIELD FAIL ENABLED
FIELD CURRENT
LESS THAN 6% [1]
5703 RCV ERROR

111 5703 RCV ERROR ENABLED
5703 IN SLAVE MODE
AND COMMS ERROR
STALL TRIP
28 STALL TRIP INHIBITED
FROM CALIBRATION
STALL DELAY
AND STALL THRESHOLD
81 SPEED FBK ALARM ENABLED SPEED FBK ALARM
FROM CALIBRATION
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
ENCODER ALARM
92 ENCODER ALARM ENABLED
ENCODER FEEDBACK
SELECTED AND ERROR
DETECTED
305 TRIP RESET TRUE HEALTH RESET
DRIVE
START
NOTE [1]:
FIELD FAIL THRESHOLD IS 6% IN CURRENT CONTROL
12% IN VOLTAGE CONTROL

JOG/SLACK
MMI Menu Map This block holds all the parameters that
JOG/SLACK
1 SETUP PARAMETERS concern the Jog functionality on the
– OPERATING MODE [212] – STOP
converter.
2 JOG SLACK 5.00 % – [218] JOG SPEED 1 –
JOG SPEED 1 -5.00 % – [219] JOG SPEED 2 –
JOG SPEED 2 5.00 % – [253] TAKE UP 1 –

TAKE UP 1 -5.00 % – [254] TAKE UP 2 –
TAKE UP 2 10.00 % – [225] CRAWL SPEED –
CRAWL SPEED FALSE – [228] MODE –
MODE 1.0 SECS – [355] RAMP RATE –
RAMP RATE
JOG SPEED 1 Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Jog speed 1 setpoint.
JOG SPEED 2 Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Jog speed 2 setpoint.
TAKE UP 1 Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Take-up slack speed setpoint 1.
TAKE UP 2 Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Take-up slack speed setpoint 2.
CRAWL SPEED Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Crawl speed setpoint.
MODE Range: TRUE/FALSE
Jog/Slack operating mode select. To use the full block functionality, MODE must be
connected to a digital input.
RAMP RATE Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
The ramp rate used while jogging is independent of the main ramp rate during normal running.
The acceleration and deceleration times in jog are always equal.
OPERATING MODE
To fully make use of all the modes of operation the MODE select input (Tag No. 228) must be
connected to a free digital input.
Note: The setpoint column in the table below refers to the Ramp Input ONLY as indicated in the
relevant column of the table. Any direct setpoints present will also add to this setpoint to
make the total speed setpoint. If this is not desirable, as for example during jogging, then
the direct setpoints should be disconnected during the appropriate conditions.
Operating Mode Mode Start Jog Ramp Input Ramp Time Contactor
Tag No C3 C4
228
Stop False OFF OFF Setpoint Default OFF
Stop True OFF OFF Setpoint Default OFF
Run False ON OFF Setpoint Default ON
Take-Up Slack 1 False ON ON Setpoint + Take-Up Slack 1 Default ON
Take-Up Slack 2 True ON OFF Setpoint + Take-Up Slack 2 Default ON

Operating Mode Mode Start Jog Ramp Input Ramp Time Contactor
Tag No C3 C4
228
Inch / Jog 1 False OFF ON Jog Speed 1 Jog Ramp Rate ON
Inch / Jog 2 True OFF ON Jog Speed 2 Jog Ramp Rate ON
Crawl True ON ON Crawl Speed Default ON
RAMP INPUT
RUN (C3)
JOG (C4) JOG (C4)
t
0%
RAMP INPUT + TAKE UP 1
RAMP INPUT
JOG SPEED 1
t
0%
RAMP RATE RAMP ACCEL TIME RAMP DECEL TIME

set in JOG/SLACK set in RAMPS set in RAMPS
Block Diagram
TAKE UP 1
0
TAKE UP 2
MIN SPEED
RAMP INPUT (see RAMPS
(from RAMPS
function block) % S-RAMP
function block)
(see RAMPS
function block)
JOG 1 CRAWL SPEED
JOG 2
RAMP RATE
Jog/Slack Function

LINK 11 & LINK 12
MMI Menu Map LINK 11 LINK 12
1 SYSTEM – OUTPUT [391] – 0 – OUTPUT [396] – 0
0 – [390] INPUT – 0 – [395] INPUT –
2 CONFIGURE I/O
0 – [394] AUX INPUT – 0 – [399] AUX INPUT –
3 INTERNAL LINKS OFF – [392] ADVANCED – OFF – [397] ADVANCED –
SWITCH – [393] MODE – SWITCH – [398] MODE –
4 LINK 11
4 LINK 12
Links 11 and 12 allow further functionality within the block diagram. The following diagram
SOURCE TAG shows the internal schematic for an advanced link.
DESTINATION TAG
ADVANCED
MODE
AUX. SOURCE
(SOURCE TAG)
AUX INPUT Range: 0 to 499
(AUX. SOURCE)
Provides the second input for the two-input functions of the MODE selection.
ADVANCED Range: OFF/ON
When OFF it makes the extended link appear as a standard link, i.e. it copies INPUT to
OUTPUT. When ON it extends the link's functionality according to the MODE selected (see
below).
MODE Range: See below
This determines which operation is performed on the INPUT (and sometimes also the AUX
INPUT) before copying the result into the OUTPUT. It can be combined with ADVANCED to
dynamically switch the OUTPUT between two inputs (INPUT and AUX INPUT). The
functionality of the various MODE selections are shown in the table.
COMPARATOR
MODULUS
SIGN CHANGER
OR
AND
INVERTER
SWITCH

(DESTINATION TAG)

Link 11 & Link 12
Mode
Aux Source Inverter Switch
AND
OR
Sign Chg
-1
x Modulus
|x|
Comparator
Source Dest
Advanced
Mode Description
SWITCH If ADVANCED = OFF DESTINATION = SOURCE

If ADVANCED = ON DESTINATION = AUX SOURCE
INVERTER If ADVANCED = OFF DESTINATION = SOURCE

If ADVANCED = ON DESTINATION = Logic Inversion of SOURCE
AND If ADVANCED = OFF DESTINATION = SOURCE

If ADVANCED = ON DESTINATION = SOURCE AND AUX SOURCE
OR If ADVANCED = OFF DESTINATION = SOURCE

If ADVANCED = ON DESTINATION = SOURCE OR AUX SOURCE
SIGN CHANGER If ADVANCED = OFF DESTINATION = SOURCE

If ADVANCED = ON DESTINATION = Value sign change of SOURCE
MODULUS If ADVANCED = OFF DESTINATION = SOURCE

If ADVANCED = ON DESTINATION = Modulus of SOURCE
COMPARATOR If ADVANCED = OFF DESTINATION = SOURCE

If ADVANCED = ON If SOURCE < AUX SOURCE DESTINATION = 0
If SOURCE > AUX SOURCE DESTINATION = 1

MAIN PORT P1 MAIN PORT P1
ENABLED – [146] SRL LINK ENABLE –
MMI Menu Map This function block configures the
0 – [138] GROUP ID (GID) –
1 SERIAL LINKS
Converter to use the plug-in COMMS
0 – [139] UNIT ID (UID) –
Option Board.
2 MAIN PORT P1 ASCII – [148] PROTOCOL –
9600 – [150] BAUD RATE –
SRL LINK ENABLE
DISABLED – [152] ESP SUP. (ASCII) –
GROUP ID (GID)
UNIT ID (UID) 0.00% – [144] CHANGEBAND (BIN) –
PROTOCOL 00C0 – [158] ERROR REPORT –

BAUD RATE FFF – [142] PNO. 7 –
ESP SUP. (ASCII) EVEN – [334] PARITY –
CHANGEBAND (BIN) 0 – [400] OPTION ADDRESS –
ERROR REPORT OPTION VERSION [303] – 0.00
PNO.7
OPTION ADDRESS
OPTION VERSION
PARITY Parameter Descriptions
SRL LINK ENABLE Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
Enables port operation.
GROUP ID (GID) Range: 0 to 7
The Parker SSD Drive's protocol group identity address.
UNIT ID (UID) Range: 0 to 15
The Parker SSD Drive's protocol unit identity address.
PROTOCOL Range: See below
Selects the protocol to be used. The selections are:
ASCII
BINARY
OPTION (select OPTION if say a Profibus option is fitted)
BAUD RATE Range: See below
Selects the Baud Rate.
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600 (default)
19200
ESP SUP. (ASCII) Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
Enable if communicating with a unit using Parker SSD Drives' own ESP protocol.
CHANGEBAND (BIN) Range: 0.00% to 327.67%
Percentage change in value to trigger a BINARY Enquiry Poll update.
ERROR REPORT Range: 0000 to FFFF
Displays the last error as a hexadecimal code. Writing any value to this parameter will set the
value to >00C0 (No Error). Refer to Chapter 14: “Serial Communications” for a list of codes.
PNO. 7 Range: 0000 to FFFF
Control word for Multi-Parameter Polling (refer to the COMMS Option Board Technical
Manual - Parameter Specification Tables).
PARITY Range: ODD/EVEN
Selects odd or oven parity.
OPTION ADDRESS
OPTION VERSION

MENUS
MMI Menu Map MENUS
This function block allows selection of
1 MENUS ENABLED – [ 37] FULL MENUS –
either the full menu structure, or a
30 – [ 38] MENU DELAY –
FULL MENUS reduced menu structure for easier
ENGLISH – [304] LANGUAGE –
MENU DELAY navigation of the menu. It also selects the
LANGUAGE display language for the MMI.
FULL MENUS Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
When enabled, the full MMI menu structure is displayed on the MMI.
MENU DELAY Range: 0 to 65535
This setting affects the speed at which the menu is stepped through when an MMI key (↑,↓,M,E)
is pressed or held down. Increasing the value slows the menu.
LANGUAGE Range: ENGLISH/FRENCH
Selects the MMI display language.

miniLINK
MMI Menu Map This function block is no longer supported. miniLINK
1 SYSTEM 0.00 % – [339] VALUE 1 –
0.00 % – [340] VALUE 2 –
2 miniLINK
0.00 % – [341] VALUE 3 –
VALUE 1
0.00 % – [342] VALUE 4 –
VALUE 2
0.00 % – [343] VALUE 5 –
VALUE 3
0.00 % – [344] VALUE 6 –
VALUE 4
VALUE 5 0.00 % – [345] VALUE 7 –
VALUE 6 0.00 % – [379] VALUE 8 –

VALUE 7 0.00 % – [380] VALUE 9 –
VALUE 8 0.00 % – [381] VALUE 10 –
VALUE 9 0.00 % – [382] VALUE 11 –
VALUE 10 0.00 % – [383] VALUE 12 –
VALUE 11 0.00 % – [384] VALUE 13 –
VALUE 12
0.00 % – [385] VALUE 14 –
VALUE 13
OFF – [346] LOGIC 1 –
VALUE 14
OFF – [347] LOGIC 2 –
LOGIC 1
LOGIC 2 OFF – [348] LOGIC 3 –

LOGIC 8
VALUE 1 to VALUE 14 Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
LOGIC 1 to LOGIC 8 Range: OFF/ON

PID
MMI Menu Map This is a general purpose PID block which PID
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
can be used for many different closed loop
– PID OUTPUT [417] – 0.00%
control applications. The PID feedback can
– PID CLAMPED [416] – FALSE
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS be loadcell tension, dancer position or any
– PID ERROR [415] – 0.00%
other transducer feedback such as pressure,
3 PID 1.0 – [404] PROP. GAIN –
flow etc.
PROP. GAIN 5.00s – [402] INT. TIME CONST. –
INT. TIME CONST. Features: 0.000s – [401] DERIVATIVE TC –
DERIVATIVE TC • Independent adjustment of gain and 100.00% – [405] POSITIVE LIMIT –
POSITIVE LIMIT time constants. -100.00% – [406] NEGATIVE LIMIT –
NEGATIVE LIMIT
• Additional first-order filter (F). 0.2000 – [407] O/P SCALER (TRIM) –
O/P SCALER (TRIM) 0.00% – [410] INPUT 1
INPUT 1
• Functions P, PI, PD, PID with/without –
F individually selected. 0.00% – [411] INPUT 2 –

INPUT 2
1.0000 – [412] RATIO 1 –
RATIO 1 • Ratio and divider for scaling each
1.0000 – [413] RATIO 2 –
RATIO 2 input.
1.0000 – [418] DIVIDER 1 –
DIVIDER 1 • Independent positive and negative
DIVIDER 2 1.0000 – [414] DIVIDER 2 –
limits.
ENABLE ENABLED – [408] ENABLE –
INT. DEFEAT
• Output scaler (Trim). OFF – [409] INT. DEFEAT –
FILTER T.C. • Gain profiled by diameter for centre- 0.100s – [403] FILTER T.C. –
MODE driven winder control. 0 – [473] MODE –
MIN PROFILE GAIN 20.00% – [474] MIN PROFILE GAIN –
PROFILED GAIN
– PROFILED GAIN [475] – 0.0
This is a pure gain factor which shifts up or down the whole Bode PID transfer function leaving
the time constants unaffected. A value of P = 10.0 means that, for an error of 5%, the
proportional part (initial step) of the PID output will be:
10 x [ 1 + (Td/Ti) ] x 5 % , i.e. approx. 50% for Td << Ti.
INT. TIME CONST. Range: 1.000s to 10.000s
The integrator time constant (Ti)
DERIVATIVE TC Range: 0.000s to 10.000s
The differentiator time constant (Td). When Td = 0 the transfer function of the block becomes a
P+I.
POSITIVE LIMIT Range: 0.00% to 105.00%
The upper limit of the PID algorithm.
NEGATIVE LIMIT Range: -105.00% to 0.00%
The lower limit of the PID algorithm.
O/P SCALER (TRIM) Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000
The ratio which the limited PID output is multiplied by in order to give the final PID Output.
Normally this ratio would be between 0 and 1.
INPUT 1 Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset.
INPUT 2 Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
This can be either a position/tension feedback or a reference/offset
RATIO 1 Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000
This multiplies Input 1 by a factor (Ratio 1).
RATIO 2 Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000
This multiplies Input 2 by a factor (Ratio 2).

DIVIDER 1 Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000

This divides Input 1 by a factor (Divider 1).
This divides Input 2 by a factor (Divider 2).
ENABLE Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
A digital input which resets the (total) PID Output as well as the integral term when FALSE.
INT. DEFEAT Range: ON/OFF
A digital input which resets the integral term when TRUE. The block transfer function then
becomes P+D only.
FILTER T.C. Range: 0.000s to 10.000s
In order to attenuate high-frequency noise a first order filter is added in conjunction with the
differentiator. The ratio k of the Derivative Time Constant (Td) over the Filter Time Constant
(Tf) (typically 4 or 5) determines the high-frequency lift of the transfer function. For Tf = 0 this
filter is eliminated.
MODE Range: 0 to 4
This determines the law which the profiler follows versus diameter.
For Mode = 0, Profiled Gain = constant = P.
For Mode = 1, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter - min diameter) + B.
For Mode = 2, Profiled Gain = A * (diameter - min diameter)^2 + B.
MIN PROFILE GAIN Range: 0.00% to 100.00%
This expresses the minimum gain required at min diameter (core) as a percentage of the (max) P
gain at full diameter (100%).
PROFILED GAIN Range: 0.0 to 100.0
The output of a profiler block which varies the gain versus diameter. This is primarily to be used
with Speed Profiled Winders for compensation against varying diameter and therefore inertia.
When MODE is not ZERO (see above) this overrides the P gain above.
PID OUTPUT
PID CLAMPED
PID ERROR
The following block diagram shows the internal structure of the PID block.
PID is used to control the response of any closed loop system. It is used specifically in system
applications involving the control of drives to allow zero steady state error between Reference
and Feedback, together with good transient performance.
Proportional Gain (PROP. GAIN)
This is used to adjust the basic response of the closed loop control system. It is defined
as the portion of the loop gain fed back to make the complete control loop stable. The
PID error is multiplied by the Proportional Gain to produce an output.

Integral (INT. TIME CONST.)
The Integral term is used to give zero steady state error between the setpoint and
feedback values of the PID. If the integral is set to a small value, this will cause an
underdamped or unstable control system.
Derivative (DERIVATIVE TC)
This is used to correct for certain types of control loop instability, and therefore
improve response. It is sometimes used when heavy or large inertia rolls are being
controlled. The derivative term has an associated filter to suppress high frequency
signals.
Integral Defeat Enable

PID Gain Gain Profiler
[409] [408]
Prop Mode = 0
[404]
Mode
[473]
Profiled Gain
1
[475]
Pmin 4
[474]
Diam*
Dmin Dmax
Ratio 1 Divider 1
O/P Scaler
[412] [418]
(Trim) [407]
P
Input 1 Pos limit
[410] Reset [405]
+ [402] [403]
+
I +
F PID Output
+ [417]
Input 2 [401] + 0%
[411]
D Neg Limit
Ratio 2 Divider 2 [406]
[413] [414] PID Clamped
PID Error [416]
[415]
* - Linked internally to Diameter Calculator
Critically Damped Response

You should achieve a Underdamped
critically damped
response, which allows
the mechanics to track as
Setpoint
precisely as possible a Value
step change on the
setpoint.
Overdamped
Critically damped
Time
Setpoint
Time
RAISE/LOWER
MMI Menu Map This function block acts as an internal RAISE/LOWER
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
motorised potentiometer (MOP).
– OUTPUT [264] – 0.00%
The OUTPUT is not preserved during the 0.00 % – [255] RESET VALUE –
2 RAISE/LOWER
power-down of the Converter. 10.0 SECS – [256] INCREASE RATE –
RESET VALUE
10.0 SECS – [257] DECREASE RATE –
INCREASE RATE
FALSE – [261] RAISE INPUT –
DECREASE RATE
FALSE – [262] LOWER INPUT –
RAISE INPUT
LOWER INPUT -100.00 % – [258] MIN VALUE –
MIN VALUE 100.00 % – [259] MAX VALUE –

MAX VALUE FALSE – [307] EXTERNAL RESET –
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
This reset value is pre-loaded directly into the output when EXTERNAL RESET is TRUE, or at
power-up. It will be clamped by min and max values.
INCREASE RATE Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Rate of change of increasing output value.
DECREASE RATE Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Rate of change of decreasing output value.
RAISE INPUT Range: TRUE/FALSE
Command to raise output.
LOWER INPUT Range: TRUE/FALSE
Command to lower output.
MIN VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Minimum ramp output clamp. This is a plain clamp, not a ramped "min speed" setting.
MAX VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Maximum ramp output clamp.
EXTERNAL RESET Range: TRUE/FALSE
If EXTERNAL RESET is TRUE, the output of the Raise/Lower block is set to the RESET
VALUE.
OUTPUT
Refer to the DIAGNOSTICS function block description.

EXTERNAL RESET RAISE INPUT LOWER INPUT RAISE INPUT
t
0%
100%
RAISE/LOWER OUTPUT
t
0%
RESET VALUE INCREASE RATE DECREASE RATE

DEFAULT=0% DEFAULT 10.0 SEC DEFAULT 10.0 SEC
(256) INCREASE RATE

(257) DECREASE RATE
(255) RESET VALUE

(261) RAISE INPUT
RAISE / LOWER OUTPUT
(262) LOWER INPUT RAMP
(307) EXTERNAL RESET Dest. Tag.
(260)
(259) MIN VALUE
(258) MAX VALUE
If Reset, Output = Reset Value (Clamped)

RAMPS
RAMPS
MMI Menu Map This function block forms part of the
reference generation. It provides the facility RAMP OUTPUT [ 85] – 0.00%
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
to control the rate at which the Converter RAMPING [113] – FALSE
2 RAMPS will respond to a changing setpoint. 10.0 SECS – [ 2] RAMP ACCEL TIME –
10.0 SECS – [ 3] RAMP DECEL TIME –
RAMP ACCEL TIME
OFF – [118] RAMP HOLD –
RAMP DECEL TIME
0.00 % – [ 5] RAMP INPUT –
RAMP HOLD
RAMP INPUT 2.50 % – [266] % S-RAMP –
% S-RAMP 0.50 % – [286] RAMPING THRESH. –
RAMPING THRESH. ENABLED – [287] AUTO RESET –
AUTO RESET DISABLED – [288] EXTERNAL RESET –
EXTERNAL RESET 0.00 % – [422] RESET VALUE –
RESET VALUE 0.00 % – [126] MIN. SPEED –
MIN SPEED
RAMP ACCEL TIME Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Acceleration time (100% change)
RAMP DECEL TIME Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Deceleration time (100% change)
RAMP HOLD Range: ON/OFF
While ON, the ramp output is held at its last value. This is overridden by Ramp Reset.
RAMP INPUT Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Ramp Input TAG.
% S-RAMP Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Percentage of ramp with S-shaped rate of change. A value of zero is equivalent to a linear
ramp. Changing this value affects the ramp times.
RAMPING THRESH. Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Ramping flag threshold level. The threshold is used to detect whether the ramp is active.
AUTO RESET Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
If TRUE, then the ramp is reset whenever SYSTEM RESET is TRUE, that is each time the
Speed/Current loop is unquenched. (SYSTEM RESET Tag No. 374 is an internal flag that is
set TRUE for one cycle after the Speed/Current loop is enabled, i.e. every time the drive is
started).
EXTERNAL RESET Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
If TRUE, then the ramp is held in reset. EXTERNAL RESET does not depend on AUTO
RESET for its operation.
RESET VALUE Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
This value is pre-loaded into the output when RAMP RESET is TRUE, or at power-up. In
order to catch a spinning load smoothly (`bumpless transfer’) connect SPEED FEEDBACK
Tag No. 62 (source) to RESET VALUE Tag No. 422 (destination).

MIN SPEED Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
The minimum speed clamp is fully bi-directional and operates with a 0.5% hysterisis. This
clamp operates on the input to the ramp and it can therefore be overridden by the RESET
VALUE as far as the ramp output is concerned.
Minimum Speed
Output
Input
-0.5 0 0.5
RAMP OUTPUT
RAMPING
RAMPING THRESH.
I/P
1
RAMPING
O/P
% S-RAMP
0
I/P
O/P
Jog / 0 RAMP OUTPUT
RAMP INPUT
Slack t
"S" RAMP
MIN. SPEED
RAMP DECEL TIME
RAMP ACCEL TIME
RAMP HOLD
AUTO RESET
EXTERNAL RESET
RESET VALUE

ACCELERATION/DECELERATION RATES
RAMP INPUT (+ 100%)
t
0%
+100%
RAMP OUTPUT
t
0%
RAMP ACCEL TIME RAMP DECEL TIME
(S RAMP 0%) (S RAMP 0%)
ACTUAL ACCEL TIME ACTUAL DECEL TIME

WITH S RAMP WITH S RAMP
t
0%
RAMP INPUT (-100%)
t
0%
RAMP OUTPUT
-100%
RAMP ACCEL TIME RAMP DECEL TIME

(S RAMP 0%) (S RAMP 0%)
ACTUAL ACCEL TIME ACTUAL DECEL TIME

WITH S RAMP WITH S RAMP
RAMP HOLD
RAMP INPUT
RAMP HOLD ON
RAMP HOLD OFF RAMP HOLD OFF t

0%
RAMP OUTPUT
t
0%

RAMP RESET
AUTO RESET ENABLED
RAMP INPUT = X%
DRIVE ENABLED DRIVE ENABLED
DRIVE DISABLED t
0%
= RAMP INPUT X %
RAMP OUTPUT
t
0%
RESET VALUE = 0.00 %
EXTERNAL RESET
RAMP INPUT X%
EXTERNAL RESET ENABLED
0% t
= RAMP I/P X%
RAMP OUTPUT
Y% t
t
0%
RESET VALUER = Y%
MIN SPEED
DRIVE ENABLED (AND AUTO RESET ENABLED)
RAMP INPUT
MIN. SPEED
0% t
RAMP INPUT
RAMP OUTPUT
MIN. SPEED
0% t
NOTE: THE POLARITY OF SPEED SETPOINT DETERMINES THE DIRECTION OF MIN. SPEED

SETPOINT SUM 1
MMI Menu Map This can be configured to perform one of a SETPOINT SUM 1
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
number of functions upon a fixed number
– SPT. SUM 1 OUTPUT – 0.00%
of inputs.
1.0000 – [ 6] RATIO 1 –
2 SETPOINT SUM 1
1.0000 – [208] RATIO 0 –
RATIO 1
POSITIVE – [ 8] SIGN 1 –
RATIO 0
POSITIVE – [292] SIGN 0 –
SIGN 1
1.0000 – [419] DIVIDER 1 –
SIGN 0
DIVIDER 1 1.0000 – [420] DIVIDER 0 –
DIVIDER 0 0.0 % – [131] DEADBAND –

DEADBAND WIDTH 105.00 % – [375] LIMIT –
LIMIT 0.00 % – [423] INPUT 2 –
INPUT 2 0.00 % – [100] INPUT 1 –
INPUT 1 0.00 % – [309] INPUT 0 –
INPUT 0
RATIO 1 Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000
Analog input 1 scaling.
RATIO 0 Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000
Input 0 scaling.
SIGN 1 Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE
Analog input 1 polarity.
SIGN 0 Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE
Input 0 polarity.
Analog input 1 scaling. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.
Input 0 scaling. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.
DEADBAND WIDTH Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %
Analog input 1 deadband width.
LIMIT Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
The Setpoint Sum INPUT 2
programmable limit is
symmetrical and has the INPUT 1
range 0.00% to 200.00%.
The limit is applied both
to the intermediate results
of the RATIO calculation INPUT 0
and the total output.
LIMIT -1
INPUT 2 Range: -200.00 to 200.00 %

Input 2 value. By default this is not connected to any analog input.
INPUT 1 Range: -200.00 to 200.00 %
Input 1 value. By default this is connected to Analog Input 1 (A2).
INPUT 0 Range: -200.00 to 200.00 %
SPT. SUM 1 OUTPUT

SETPOINT SUM 2
MMI Menu Map Setpoint Sum 2 is a general purpose SETPOINT SUM 2
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
summing and ratio block. Additional
– SPT. SUM 2 [451] – 0.00%
outputs are provided to gain access to each
0.00 % – [444] INPUT 0 –
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS of Input 0 and Input 1 channel sub-
1.0000 – [447] RATIO 0 –
calculations.
3 SETPOINT SUM 2 1.0000 – [448] DIVIDER 0 –
INPUT 2 0.00 % – [443] INPUT 1 –

INPUT 1 1.0000 – [446] RATIO 1 –
INPUT 0 1.0000 – [466] DIVIDER 1 –
RATIO 1 0.00 % – [445] INPUT 2 –
RATIO 0 100.00 % – [449] LIMIT –
DIVIDER 1 – OUTPUT 0 [491] –
DIVIDER 0
– OUTPUT 1 [492] –
LIMIT
SPT SUM OUTPUT
INPUT 0 Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
RATIO 0 Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000 %
Input 0 scaling.
DIVIDER 0 Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000 %
Input 0 scaling. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.
INPUT 1 Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Input 1 value. By default this is connected to analog input 1 (A2).
RATIO 1 Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000 %
Analog input 1 scaling.
DIVIDER 1 Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000 %
Analog input 1 scaling. Dividing by 0 (zero) results in a zero output.
INPUT 2 Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
LIMIT Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
The Setpoint Sum programmable limit is symmetrical and has the range 0.00% to 200.00%.
The limit is applied both to the intermediate results of the RATIO calculation and the total
output.
OUTPUT 0
OUTPUT 1
SPT. SUM 2 Range: -200.00% to 200.00%
(SPT SUM OUTPUT)
Main output of Setpoint Sum 2.
This output is connected using the SYSTEM / CONFIGURE I/O / BLOCK DIAGRAM menu.

RATIO 0 [447]
INPUT 0 [444] ÷ OUTPUT 0 [491]
DIVIDER 0 [448]
INPUT 2 [445] MAIN OUTPUT [451]
RATIO 1 [446]
INPUT 1 [443] ÷ OUTPUT 1 [492]
DIVIDER 1 [466]
LIMIT [449]

SPEED LOOP
MMI Menu Map
This function block contains parameters SPEED LOOP
for setting-up the speed loop. The block
1 SETUP PARAMETERS – OUTPUT [356] – 0.00%
is viewed in two menus on the MMI.
– SPEED FEEDBACK [207] – 0.00%
2 SPEED LOOP
– SPEED SETPOINT [ 63] – 0.00%
PROP. GAIN SETPOINTS – SPEED ERROR [297] – 0.00%
INT. TIME CONST. This MMI menu contains the setpoint 10.00 – [ 14] PROP. GAIN –
INT. DEFEAT parameter reference inputs for the 0.500 SECS – [ 13] INT. TIME CONST. –
ENCODER SIGN function block.
OFF – [202] INT. DEFEAT –
SPEED FBK SELECT
POSITIVE – [ 49] ENCODER SIGN –
ARM VOLTS – [ 47] SPEED FBK SEL –
0.00% – [289] SETPOINT 1 –
MMI Menu Map
POSITIVE – [ 9] SIGN 2 (A3) –
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
1.0000 – [ 7] RATIO 2 (A3) –
2 SPEED LOOP – SETPOINT 2 (A3) [290] – 0.00%
0.00% – [291] SETPOINT 3 –
3 SETPOINTS
0.00% – [ 41] SETPOINT 4 –
SETPOINT 1 105.00% – [357] MAX DEMAND –
SIGN 2 (A3) -105.00% – [358] MIN DEMAND –
RATIO 2 (A3)
SETPOINT 2 (A3)
SETPOINT 3 Parameter Descriptions
SETPOINT 4
MAX DEMAND PROP. GAIN Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
MIN DEMAND
Speed loop PI proportional gain adjustment.
INT. TIME CONST. Range: 0.001 to 30.000 SECS
Speed loop PI integral gain adjustment.
INT. DEFEAT Range: ON/OFF
Inhibits the integral part of the speed loop PI control to give proportional only control.
ENCODER SIGN Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE
Since the encoder feedback cannot be reversed electrically, the signal polarity can be reversed by
the control software.
SPEED FBK SELECT Range: See below
Four options are available:
i) Armature voltage feedback

ARM VOLTS
ii) Analog tachogenerator feedback
ANALOG TACH
iii) Encoder feedback
ENCODER
iv) Analog / Encoder feedback
ENCODER / ANALOG
SETPOINT 1 Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %

Speed Setpoint 1 (Default Setpoint Sum 1 O/P).
SIGN 2 (A3) Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE
Speed Setpoint 2 Sign.

RATIO 2 (A3) Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000

Speed Setpoint 2 Ratio.
SETPOINT 2 (A3) Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Speed Setpoint 2 - Fixed (non-configurable) setpoint scanned synchronously with the current
loop
Speed Setpoint 3 (Default Ramp O/P).
Speed Setpoint 4 (Default 5703 I/P).
MAX DEMAND Range: 0.00 to 105.00 %
Sets the maximum input to the speed loop. It is clamped at 105% to allow for overshoot in the
external loops.
MIN DEMAND Range: -105.00 to 0.00%
Sets the minimum input to the speed loop.
OUTPUT
SPEED FEEDBACK
SPEED SETPOINT
SPEED ERROR

Speed Loop PI Output
The PI output is accessible via Tag No. 356. This point is before the I Limit clamps and the
summing of the additional current demand.
This Tag is not visible on the MMI.
Speed Loop PI with Current Demand Isolate

The speed loop output is still valid (active) with the I DMD. ISOLATE parameter enabled.
Note: 1 The speed loop is reset by unquenching the speed loop/current loop.
2 I DMD. ISOLATE is overridden by Program Stop (B8) or Normal Stop (C3).
3 The speed loop PI is holding the integral term as soon as the PI output reaches
current limit. This is true even in Current Demand Isolate mode where it may
interfere depending on the way the speed PI is used. This feature is currently not
suppressible.
105% Speed Demands
The speed demand clamping allows the speed setpoint to reach 105%. This applies only to the
final summing junction immediately before the speed loop and also to the Setpoint Sum 1
output. Individual speed setpoints are still clamped to 100%.
SPEED LOOP
ADVANCED NOTE (2)
DEFAULT
ADAPTION ZERO SPD. QUENCH
14 PROP. GAIN 10.00

GAIN AND INTEGRAL
PROFILING
13 INT. TIME CONST 0.500 SECS
202 INT. DEFEAT OFF TO CURRENT LOOP

SPEED IDMD ISOLATE
(SPEED SETPOINT ERROR
AFTER STOP RATES + SWITCH I/P
SPEED RAMP TO ZERO 64
DEMAND PI 356
- 297 D:3
D:1
D:2 SPEED
FEEDBACK
207 DRIVE NOTE (1)
62 ENABLE
ENCODER/ANALOG FEEDBACK SELECTION USED
ANALOG TACH FEEDBACK FOR THE PROPORTIONAL
47 SPEED FBK SELECT ARM VOLTS TERM OF THE SPEED LOOP PI, AND ENCODER
FEEDBACK FOR THE INTEGRAL TERM. THIS FEEDBACK
ARM SELECTION REQUIRES A COMBINATION ANALOG TACH/
VOLTS ENCODER FITTED TO THE MOTOR.
+
THIS SELECTION CANNOT BE USED WHEN 590 SWITCHABLE
ANALOG - TACHO CARD IS FITTED.
TACH
+
ENCODER NOTE (2)
_
SEE ADVANCED SUB MENU FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION.
ENCODER/ANALOG
NOTE (1)
49 ENCODER SIGN POSITIVE
FROM
CALIBRATION
ZERO SPD OFFSET
FROM CALIBRATION

SPEED LOOP NOTE [1]
SETPOINTS
TO CURRENT LOOP
(I DEMAND ISOLATE SWITCH)
TAG# PARAMETER DEFAULT
SETTING
7 RATIO 2 (A3) 1,0000
ANALOG I/P 2 FROM CURRENT LOOP
+
A3 - I DMD ISOLATE
9 SIGN 2 (A3) POSITIVE
290 SETPOINT 2
FROM 41 SETPOINT 4 5703 RATIO NOTE [1]

5703 SUPPORT
+ ONLY THE SETPOINTS SUB MENU
+
FROM 289 SETPOINT 1 SPT. SUM O/P SHOWN HERE, SEE SPEED LOOP
SETPOINT SUM +
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
+
FROM 291 SETPOINT 3 RAMP OUTPUT
RAMPS
357 MAX DEMAND 105.00%

358 MIN DEMAND -105.00%
SPEED D:44
SETPOINT 63
TO STOP RATES (PROGRAM STOP AND NORMAL STOP RAMPS TO ZERO SPEED

ADVANCED
MMI Menu Map This function block is viewed in three ADVANCED
1 SETUP PARAMETERS menus on the MMI and contains the
0 – [268] MODE –
parameters for the advanced-user.
2 SPEED LOOP 1.00 % – [269] SPD BRK 1 (LOW) –
The ADVANCED MMI menu only 5.00 % – [270] SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) –
3 ADVANCED
contains the I GAIN IN RAMP parameter. 5.00 – [271] PROP. GAIN –
I GAIN IN RAMP 0.500 SECS – [272] INT. TIME CONST. –
POS. LOOP P GAIN
ADAPTION 1.0000 – [274] I GAIN IN RAMP –
This MMI menu contains parameters for 0.00% – [273] POS. LOOP P GAIN –
MMI Menu Map speed loop gain scheduling. 0.50 % – [284] ZERO SPD. LEVEL –
1 SETUP PARAMETERS 1.50 % – [285] ZERO IAD LEVEL –
2 SPEED LOOP
ZERO SPD. QUENCH
Similar to Standstill logic (i.e. it stops
3 ADVANCED making current but keeps the contactor in) except that the speed loop remains enabled and will
cause the current loop to unquench very quickly.
4 ADAPTION
MODE
SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH)
PROP. GAIN Parameter Descriptions
INT. TIME CONST.
MODE Range: 0 to 3
MMI Menu Map 0 - Disabled
1 - Speed Feedback Dependent
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
2 - Speed Error Dependent
2 SPEED LOOP 3 - Current Demand Dependent
3 ZERO SPD. QUENCH SPD BRK 1 (LOW) Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

ZERO SPD. LEVEL IF MODE = 1 Then BRK-points correspond to speed feedback.
ZERO IAD LEVEL ELSE IF MODE = 2 Then BRK-points correspond to speed error.
ELSE IF MODE = 3 Then BRK-points correspond to current demand.
SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %

Above SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) the normal gains (as per main menu above) prevail.
Between the two break-points, a linear variation of the gains is implemented.
Prop gain used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
INT. TIME CONST. Range: 0.001 to 30.000 SECS
Integral time constant used below SPD BRK 1 (LOW)
I GAIN IN RAMP Range: 0.0000 to 2.0000
While the RAMPING (Tag No. 113) flag is TRUE the integral gain is scaled by I GAIN IN
RAMP. This can be used to help prevent integral wind-up while the drive is ramping
(particularly high inertia loads).
POS. LOOP P GAIN
ZERO SPD. LEVEL
ZERO IAD LEVEL

STANDSTILL
Standstill logic is used to inhibit rotation STANDSTILL
MMI Menu Map when operating with Zero Speed demand.
– AT ZERO SETPOINT [ 78] – TRUE
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
If the drive is below the Zero Speed – AT ZERO SPEED [ 77] – TRUE
2 STANDSTILL threshold and Standstill logic is enabled, – AT STANDSTILL [ 79] – TRUE
STANDSTILL LOGIC
then the speed and current loops are 89 – [306] ZERO SETPOINT –
ZERO THRESHOLD
quenched. This prevents shaft oscillation DISABLED – [ 11] STANDSTILL LOGIC –
around zero speed. 2.00% – [ 12] ZERO THRESHOLD –
It is useful in preventing gearbox wear due

to “chattering”.
ZERO SETPOINT
(SOURCE TAG) Reserved parameter for use by Parker SSD Drives.
STANDSTILL LOGIC Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
If TRUE, the Converter is quenched (although the contactor remains in) when the Speed
Feedback and Speed Setpoint values are less than ZERO THRESHOLD.
ZERO THRESHOLD Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Threshold level which defines zero setpoint and zero speed diagnostic outputs and also controls
the zero speed relay output.
AT ZERO SETPOINT
AT ZERO SPEED
AT STANDSTILL
Functional STANDSTILL LOGIC ENABLED

Description t
0%
Standstill Logic inhibits the
SPEED FEEDBACK
controller at zero setpoint and SPEED SETPOINT
zero speed, i.e. at standstill. CURVE DEPENDS ON LOAD
CHARACERISTICS
ZERO THRESHOLD
The main contactor remains in (DEFAULT 2.00%)
t
0%
and the Run LED remains ON.
DRIVE ENABLE OUTPUT

t
0%
STANDSTILL
DEFAULT
TAG# PARAMETER
SETTING
TO
11 STANDSTILL LOGIC DISABLED DRIVE ENABLE
SPEED
FEEDBACK DIGITAL O/P1
AT ZERO SPEED D:12
FROM 77 B5
SPEED LOOP
( DEFAULT
D:14
12 ZERO THREHOLD 2.00% 79 CONFIGURATION )
SPEED AT STANDSTILL
SETPOINT 78
FROM AT ZERO SETPOINT D:13
SETPOINT

STOP RATES
MMI Menu Map This function block holds all the parameters STOP RATES
1 SETUP PARAMETERS concerning the stopping method of the
– SPEED DEMAND [ 89] – 0.00%
converter.
– PROGRAM STOP [ 80] – FALSE
2 STOP RATES
The stopping methods of the converter are 10.0 SECS – [ 27] STOP TIME –
STOP TIME
described in more detail in Chapter 4: 60.0 SECS – [217] STOP LIMIT –
STOP LIMIT
“Operating the Converter” - Starting and 1.0 SECS – [302] CONTACTOR DELAY –
CONTACTOR DELAY
PROG STOP TIME
Stopping Methods. 0.1 SECS – [ 26] PROG STOP TIME –
PROG STOP LIMIT 60.0 SECS – [216] PROG STOP LIMIT –
PROG STOP I LIM 100.00 % – [ 91] PROG STOP I LIM –
STOP ZERO SPEED 2.00 % – [ 29] STOP ZERO SPEED –
STOP TIME Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in normal stop mode (C3 OFF).
STOP LIMIT Range: 0.0 to 600.0 SECS
Delay time limit to allow normal stop action (regenerative breaking) to achieve zero speed
before drive quench and coast stop. The timer is triggered by Start command (C3) going low.
CONTACTOR DELAY Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
This defines the time between the drive reaching STOP ZERO SPEED (Tag No. 29) and the
contactor being opened. This is particularly useful during the jog cycle to prevent multiple
operations of the main contactor.
If STOP ZERO SPEED is ≥ 0.25%, the drive will be quenched during the contactor delay.
The Contactor delay is overridden by Enable (C5).
Maintain zero speed during contactor delay.
If STOP ZERO SPEED is < 0.25%, the drive will not be quenched until CONTACTOR DELAY
expires.
PROG STOP TIME Range: 0.1 to 600.0 SECS
Time to reach zero speed from 100% set speed in program stop mode(B8 OFF).
PROG STOP LIMIT Range: 0.0 to 600.0 SECS
Delay time limit to allow program stop action (regenerative breaking) to achieve zero speed
before drive quench and coast stop. The timer is triggered by Program Stop command (B8)
going low.
PROG STOP I LIM Range: 0.00 to 200.00 %
Main current limit level in program stop mode assuming current limit not overridden by I Profile
or Inverse Time limits.
STOP ZERO SPEED Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Zero speed level in program stop and normal stop modes at which the contactor delay timer
starts timing-out. At the end of this delay the contactor is de-energised.
See also CONTACTOR DELAY above.
SPEED DEMAND
PROGRAM STOP

Stop Hierarchy
Coast Stop - Terminal B9
• 0Disables the drive and opens the contactor via the pilot output
Enable - Terminal C5
• Suspends and resets the Control Loops
Program Stop - Terminal B8
• Independent ramp time
• Stop Timer
• Independent Current Limit that may be higher than normal Current Limit
• Independent zero speed
Normal Run/Stop - Terminal C3
• Independent ramp time
• Contactor Delay
Note: The Converter’s reaction to commands is defined by a state machine. This determines
which commands provide the demanded action, and in which sequence. Consequently,
COAST STOP and PROGRAM STOP must be FALSE, i.e. the Converter is not in Coast or
Program mode, before a Run signal is applied otherwise the controller assumes a Stop
mode and remains disabled. Refer to Chapter 4: “Operating the Converter” - Stopping
Methods for descriptions of Coast Stop and Program Stop.
SPEED TO/FROM SPEED LOOP SPEED

SETPOINT DEMAND
STOP RATES
89
DEFAULT
27 STOP TIME 10.0 SECS
RAMP TO ZERO RAMP TO ZERO TO CURRENT LOOP

26 PROG STOP TIME 0.1 SECS
CURRENT LIMIT SWITCH
91 PROG STOP I LIM 100.00%
217 STOP LIMIT 60.0 SECS t TO COAST

STOP LOGIC
60.0 SECS t
216 PROG STOP LIMIT
29 STOP ZERO SPEED 2.00 %
t
302 CONTACTOR DELAY 1.0 SECS
TO DRIVE ENABLE
PROGRAM STOP IS TRUE PROGRAM

WHEN TERMINAL B8 LOW STOP
STOP (RUN)
(STATUS LED OFF)
SPEED
FEEDBACK

SYSTEM PORT P3
SYSTEM PORT P3
Refer to Chapter 14: “Serial
MMI Menu Map Communications” - System Port P3 for – SCALED 5703 INPUT –
0.0000 – [132] SETPT. RATIO –
1 SERIAL LINKS further information.
POSITIVE – [133] SETPT. SIGN –
2 SYSTEM PORT P3 This function block contains parameters – 5703 INPUT [187] – 0.00%
MMI DUMP -> P3 for configuring the port for connection 0.00% – [189] 5703 OUTPUT –
UDP XFER <- P3 to ConfigEd Lite (or other suitable PC – ESP SUP. (ASCII) [328] – DISABLED
UDP XFER -> P3 programming tool), or another VSD. 0.00% – [331] CHANGEBAND (BIN) –
0x00C0 – [332] ERROR REPORT –
MMI Menu Map SYSTEM PORT P3 0xFFFF – [333] PNO. 7 –
1 SERIAL LINKS The MMI menu contains parameters for 0x00 – [490] UPLOAD REMOTE –
transferring data to and from a PC.
2 SYSTEM PORT P3
P3 SETUP
3 P3 SETUP
The MMI menu contains communication set-up parameters for System Port P3.
MODE
P3 BAUD RATE BISYNCH SUPPORT
MMI Menu Map
The MMI menu contains parameters for supporting the BISYNCH protocol.
1 SERIAL LINKS
5703 SUPPORT
2 SYSTEM PORT P3 The MMI menu contains the parameters for connecting a 5703 Setpoint Repeater Unit.
3 P3 SETUP
4 BISYNCH SUPPORT Parameter Descriptions

GROUP ID (GID) SCALED 5703 INPUT
UNIT ID (UID) Reserved parameter for use by Parker SSD Drives.
ERROR REPORT
SETPT. RATIO Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000
Input scalar
MMI Menu Map
SETPT. SIGN Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE
1 SERIAL LINKS
Input sign
2 SYSTEM PORT P3
CHANGEBAND
3 P3 SETUP Reserved parameter for use by Parker SSD Drives.
4 5703 SUPPORT ERROR REPORT Range: See below
SETPT. RATIO Displays the last error as a hexadecimal code. Writing any value to this parameter will set the
SETPT SIGN value to >00C0 (No Error). Refer to Chapter 14: “Serial Communications” - Reference for a list
5703 INPUT of codes.
5703 OUTPUT
PNO. 7
UPLOAD REMOTE
5703 INPUT Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
5703 input diagnostic
5703 OUTPUT Range: -300.00% to 300.00%
5703 output diagnostic
ESP SUP. (ASCII)

TAPER CALC.
MMI Menu Map The purpose of this block is to profile the TAPER CALC.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
tension demand with diameter.
– TAPERED DEMAND [452] – 0.00%
– TOT. TENS DEMAND [441] – 0.00%
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS
0.00 % – [438] TAPER –
3 TAPER CALC. 0.00 % – [439] TENSION SPT. –
TAPER 0.00 % – [440] TENSION TRIM –

TENSION SPT.
TAPERED DEMAND
TENSION TRIM
TOT. TENS. DEMAND Parameter Descriptions
TAPER Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
This defines the amount of tapering in the tension demand with diameter variation. When
TAPER is positive, the tension demand is hyperbolically decreased as diameter increases
TENSION SPT. Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This is the required tension setpoint.
TENSION TRIM Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
This is the additional tension demand in the form of a trim.
TAPERED DEMAND Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
This is the output of the TAPER calculation on the TENSION SPT.
TOT. TENS. DEMAND Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
This is the final output of this block (total tension demand) which can be connected to the
appropriate points in the block diagram.
*Permanently linked 100
to Diameter Calc. Tension Spt. [439]

0
100
Diameter* Tapered Demand

0 [452]
Taper Function
Min Diameter*
100
Total Tension Demand
-100 [441]
Tension Trim 100
[440]
Taper [438] -100
Hyperbolic Taper Tension

The taper block provides hyperbolic taper tension according to the following equation: -
Tapered Demand = Tension Spt × 100% − { Taper

Diameter
× ( Diameter − Min Diameter ) }
The taper tension characteristics are shown below: -
Tension Torque
-100% Taper -100% Taper
0% Taper
100% Taper 0% Taper

100% Taper
M in 100% M in 100%
D iam eter D iam eter D iam eter D iam eter
100% taper tension is equivalent to constant torque on the centre wind spindle.

TENS+COMP CALC. TENSION & COMP
MMI Menu Map This block, Tension + Compensation – TENS+COMP [478] –
1 SETUP PARAMETERS Calculator, compensates for static and – INERTIA COMP [485] – 0.00%
dynamic friction, as well as the load inertia. 0.00 % – [487] STATIC COMP –
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS 0.00 % – [488] DYNAMIC COMP –
It achieves this by profiling the motor
ENABLED – [489] REWIND –
3 TENS+COMP CALC. torque demand as a function of speed and
0.00 % – [479] FIX. INERTIA COMP –
STATIC COMP acceleration.
0.00 % – [480] VAR. INERTIA COMP –
DYNAMIC COMP
100.00 % – [479] ROLL WIDTH/MASS –
REWIND
0.00 % – [498] LINE SPEED SPT –
FIX. INERTIA COMP
VAR. INERTIA COMP 10 – [482] FILTER T.C. –
ROLL WIDTH/MASS 10 – [483] RATE CAL –

LINE SPEED SPT 0.00 % – [484] NORMALISED dv/dt –
FILTER T.C. 1.0000 – [486] TENSION SCALER –
RATE CAL
NORMALISED dv/dt
INERTIA COMP O/P
TENSION SCALER
STATIC COMP Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Static friction compensation set-up parameter.
DYNAMIC COMP Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Variable friction compensation set-up parameter.
REWIND Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
Switches the sign of the friction compensations when the motor changes direction. This should
be done when the line reverses.
FIX. INERTIA COMP Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Fixed inertia compensation set-up parameter.
VAR. INERTIA COMP Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %
Variable inertia compensation set-up parameter.
ROLL WIDTH/MASS Range: 0.00 to 100.00 %
Scales the inertia compensations dependant on roll width. 100% is maximum roll width.
LINE SPEED SPT Range: -105.00 to 105.00 %
Used to calculate the line speed acceleration rate value for the inertia compensations.
FILTER T.C. Range: 0 to 2000
The line speed acceleration rate value is calculated from the line speed input. The calculated rate
value may have a large ripple content which will disturb the motor torque. The rate signal is
therefore filtered, and this filter has a time constant given by this parameter.
RATE CAL Range: -100.00 to 100.00 %
Scales the inertia compensation acceleration rate value to 100% for the maximum line ramp rate.
This parameter should be set to the maximum line full speed ramp rate in Seconds. The resultant
rate value can be observed on the NORMALISED dv/dt value.
Note - Inertia compensation does not work well for line ramp rates above 100 secs and therefore
this parameter is limited to 100.00.

NORMALISED dv/dt Range: -300.00 to 300.00 %

1. RATE CAL = 0.00: Allows an externally generated rate signal to be used in place of the
calculated value described above. This rate signal must be normalised to 100% for maximum
line ramp rate. Useful for large line ramp rates (>100 Secs)
2. RATE CAL not 0.00: Allows the internally calculated rate value to be monitored.
TENSION SCALER Range: -3.0000 to 3.0000 %
Scales the Tension Demand which is directly connected from the Taper Calculator.
TENS+COMP
INERTIA COMP O/P Range: -200.00 to 200.00 %
Monitor point on the total inertia compensations.

TORQUE CALC.
MMI Menu Map This block is used to split the motor TORQUE CALC.
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
current demand and use the appropriate
– POS. I CLAMP [435] – 0
current limit clamp dependant on winding
– NEG. I CLAMP [436] – 0
2 SPECIAL BLOCKS roll direction.
0.00 % – [432] TORQUE DEMAND –
3 TORQUE CALC. ENABLED – [433] TENSION ENABLE –
TORQUE DEMAND ENABLED – [434] OVER WIND –

TENSION ENABLE
OVER WIND
TORQUE DEMAND Range: -200.00 to 200.00 %
This is the torque input of the block.
TENSION ENABLE Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
When enabled, torque demand is applied. When disabled, the torque demand is zero.
OVER WIND Range: ENABLED/DISABLED
When enabled, Over Wind is selected which means the torque demand is applied in the positive
quadrant (POS. I CLAMP, Tag No. 301). When disabled, Under Wind is selected which means
the torque demand is applied in the negative quadrant (NEG. I CLAMP, Tag No. 48).
POS. I CLAMP
NEG. I CLAMP
Pos. I Clamp
200% Link to [301]
Overwind
[434]
-200% Neg. I Clamp

200%
Current Demand -1 Link to [48]
[432]
Tension
Enable

USER FILTER
This is an internal function block and USER FILTER
does not appear as a menu on the MMI.
– OUTPUT [296] – 0.00
0.00 – [295] INPUT –
INPUT
OUTPUT

Trips and Fault Finding 7-1
7 TRIPS AND FAULT FINDING
Trips
What Happens when a Trip Occurs
When a trip occurs, the Converter’s power stage is immediately disabled causing the motor and
load to coast to a stop. The trip is latched until action is taken to reset it. This ensures that trips
due to transient conditions are captured and the Converter is disabled, even when the original
cause of the trip is no longer present.
MMI Indications
If a trip condition is detected the unit displays and performs the following actions.
1. The HEALTH LED goes out indicating a Trip condition has occurred. The MMI displays
the activated alarm. (Investigate, find and remove the cause of the trip.)
2. Terminal B6 (Healthy) goes low (0V).
3. The alarm message(s) can be acknowledged by pressing the E key, however, the unit will
not restart at this point. Refer to Chapter 5: “The Man-Machine Interface (MMI)” - Alarm
Message Displays.
Resetting a Trip Condition

All trips must be reset before the Converter can be re-enabled. A trip can only be reset once the
trip condition is no longer active, i.e. a trip due to a heatsink over-temperature will not reset
until the temperature is below the trip level.
Note: More than one trip can be active at any time. For example, it is possible for both the
HEATSINK TRIP and the OVERVOLTS (VA) trips to be active. Alternatively it is possible for
the Converter to trip due to a FIELD OVER I error and then for the HEATSINK TRIP trip to
become active after the Converter has stopped (this may occur due to the thermal time
constant of the heatsink).
You can reset the trip(s) in one of two ways:
1. Power -up, or remove and re-apply the auxiliary power supply.
2. Stop and start the converter, i.e. remove and re-apply the Start/Run signal (terminal C3 or
C4).
Success is indicated by the MMI’s HEALTH LED illuminating. The display will return to its
original display.
Alarm Messages MMI Menu Map

When a trip occurs an alarm message is displayed on the MMI, and 1 ALARM STATUS
information about the trip is stored in the ALARM STATUS menu. LAST ALARM
The alarm message and the LAST ALARM parameter are displayed HEALTH WORD
in the selected language of the MMI. HEALTH STORE
The HEALTH STORE and HEALTH WORD parameters display information as hexadecimal
values, or the sum of the hexadecimal values when more than one alarm is active. Thus the
unique value can represent one or more alarms. For a list of alarms refer to Chapter 6:
“Programming Your Application” - Hexadecimal Representation of Trips.
Note: Hexadecimal refers to the common practice of counting to the base of 16 in computing
rather than the base of 10. The sixteen `numbers’ used being 0 to 9, A to F. Thus an 8
bit byte is represented by two characters in the range 00 to FF, while a 16 bit word is
represented by four characters in the range 0000 to FFFF.

7-2 Trips and Fault Finding
LAST ALARM
This display shows the last alarm message to have been displayed. To reset the parameter simply
press the ↓ (DOWN) key to clear the alarm. Alternatively, you can switch the auxiliary supply
off and on, causing NO ACTIVE ALARMS to be displayed.
HEALTH WORD
This parameter is used to continuously monitor the status of the Converter. As alarms are added
or removed, the display will immediately update to show the hexadecimal sum of these alarms.
The value reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V), and when no trip
condition is present.
HEALTH STORE
This displays the hexadecimal value of the first (or only) alarm to occur causing the trip
condition.
The display reverts to 0x0000 when the Start (C3) input is raised (+24V).
Using the MMI to Manage Trips

Trip Messages
Most of the alarms have a delay timer so that the Converter only trips if the condition persists
for the whole of the delay period.
If the Converter trips, then the display immediately shows a message indicating the reason for
the trip. The possible trip messages are given in the table below.
Trip Message and Meaning Possible Reason for Trip

OVERSPEED
Motor overspeed - the speed feedback Badly adjusted speed loop (alarm only operates with
signal has exceeded 125% of rated encoder or armature volts feedback selected)
speed. Alarm time delay : 0.1 seconds
MISSING PULSE
A missing pulse from the 6-pulse Firing plug failure
armature current waveform. Trips when Connection failure
the motor loading exceeds 1.5 times the
DISCONTINUOUS parameter value. Alarm time delay : 60 seconds
FIELD OVER I
The motor field current has exceeded Regulator failure
120% of the calibrated value Badly tuned control loop (alarm only operates with
field current control mode selected)
Alarm time delay : 15 seconds
HEATSINK TRIP
The Converter heatsink temperature is The ambient air temperature is too high
too high Poor ventilation or spacing between Converters
Fan failure, check fuse FS1 on power board, wrong
rotation (models above 70A bridge rating)
Blocked ventilation slots
Clogged air filters
Excessive armature current - nominal armature
current on motor nameplate should be checked
against the current calibration for the Converter.
Note: The stack must be allowed to cool in
order to re-start the Converter.
Alarm time delay : 0.75 seconds

THERMISTOR
The motor temperature is too high Inadequate ventilation
Blower failure -check for direction, clogged air filters
(models above 70A bridge rating)
Excessive armature current - check nominal armature
current on nameplate against current calibration)
Note: The motor must be allowed to cool in
order to re-start the Converter.
Alarm time delay : 15 seconds
OVERVOLTS (VA)
Motor armature voltage has exceeded Loose armature connection
120% of rated volts Badly adjusted field voltage setting
Badly adjusted field current loop
Badly adjusted field-weakening bemf loop
Badly adjusted speed loop
SPEED FEEDBACK
The difference between speed feedback Analog tacho feedback polarity incorrect (terminals
and armature voltage feedback is G3 and G4)
greater than the SPDFBK ALM LEVEL The ENCODER SIGN parameter’s polarity is incorrect
parameter value Disconnection of wiring, including fibre optics
If FLD WEAK ENABLE parameter is Tachogenerator failure
enabled, speed feedback is less than Tachogenerator coupling failure
10% when in the field weakening region
ENCODER FAILED
No speed feedback signal The SPEED FBK SELECT parameter is set to ENCODER
but an optional Encoder board is not fitted
Where applicable, check fibre optic cable for
damage, bend radius, operating length - refer to
Microtach handbook.
Check cable and connections on wire-ended encoder
FIELD FAIL
Field current is less than 6% of rated Open circuit motor field - check connection and
current when in Current Control mode measure field resistance
Field current is less than 50mA when in Faulty operation of field controller
Voltage Control mode (with default Where an ac supply feeds the onboard field
current burden of 15K) regulator, check connections D1 and D2 for line-to-
line voltage (rather than line-to-neutral) - L1 into D1,
L2 into D2. Note that the 3-phase supply must be
present for mains synchronisation purposes.
For loads where no field supply is required, e.g. a
permanent magnet motor, set the FIELD ENABLE
parameter to disable to suspend this alarm.
3-PHASE FAILED
3-phase supply failure Total failure of supply, or missing phase of 3-phase
supply (detected under most circumstances) - check
supply to the controller, check high-speed thyristor
stack protection fuses, check power chassis coding
fuses.
Check the mains voltage of the Converter (refer to
Product Code). This alarm may not operate properly
with controller if the voltage is incorrect, i.e. wrong
unit or controller.

PHASE LOCK
Supply frequency is outside the Check supply frequency
frequency band limits 45 - 65Hz Synchronisation errors caused by distorted supply
5703 RCV ERROR
Invalid data received via P3 port from (Alarm only operates when MODE parameter is set to
another Converter 5703 SLAVE)
STALL TRIP
With motor stationary (AT ZERO SPEED (Alarm only operates when the STALL TRIP parameter
parameter shows TRUE), current has is enabled).
exceeded the STALL THRESHOLD
parameter value for longer than the
STALL TRIP DELAY parameter value
OVER I TRIP
Current feedback value has exceeded (300% loading not exceeding 15ms or 325% not
280% of rated current exceeding 6.6ms is acceptable)
Motor armature windings failure - check insulation
resistance.
Badly tuned current loop
Faulty Converter - refer to Parker SSD Drives
ACCTS FAILED Check armature current transformer plug for correct
AC current transformer plug connection installation.
to Converter power board missing Note: The trip prevents the contactor closing
and the current loop activating without
armature current feedback - important
in the case of external stack controllers
where the thyristor stack is remote from
the control board.
AUTOTUNE ERROR
Speed feedback has exceeded 20% of (Alarm only operates during the Autotune sequence).
rated speed, or current field feedback
has exceeded 6% of rated field current
AUTOTUNE ABORT
The Autotune sequence has been Coast Stop, Program Stop, Enable or Start Run
aborted. terminal(s) disabled during Autotune sequence
The AUTOTUNE parameter reset during the Autotune
sequence
Autotune sequence has timed-out (approximately 2
minutes).
Table 7-1 Trip Messages
Symbolic Alarm Messages

These are generally internal software or hardware. If these should occur please investigate, or
contact Parker SSD Drives Technical Support.
Number Description Action

0xF003 Pre-Ready Fault Coding not present. Replace power
board or chassis. (If an external stack,
check coding supply field).
0xFF03 Aux Power Fail Check Aux. Supply and/or Mains Input

Self Test Alarms
Self Test Alarm and Meaning Possible Reason for Alarm
(EEPROM) CHECKSUM FAIL
Parameters not saved, or are corrupted. (The alarm appears at power-up or at the end of
“Upload” UDP Transfer)
Corrupted UDP file loaded - press the E key and
perform a PARAMETER SAVE. The Converter will be
returned to its factory default values.
ENABLE CONFIG.
The ENABLE CONFIG. parameter has Select Disable for the ENABLE CONFIG. parameter
been left in the Enable state.
LANGUAGE CHECKSUM FAIL
Incorrect language selected, or (The alarm appears at power-up or at the end of
corrupted “Upload” UDP Transfer)
Corrupted UDP file loaded - press the E key and
reload the correct language or de-select the second
language.
INIT CAL FAIL
Self calibration of analog inputs has (The alarm appears at power-up)
exceeded normal tolerance As a temporary measure, the tolerance can be
increased by 0.1% with each press of the E key,
however, this indicates a hardware fault - refer to
Parker SSD Drives.
IA FBK CAL FAIL / IA INST CAL FAIL
The self calibration of the armature (The alarm appears at power-up)
current has failed If powering the unit off and on does not remove the
problem, a hardware failure is suspected. Refer to
Parker SSD Drives.
Setting Trip Conditions

The following function blocks (MMI menus) are used to set trip conditions:
OVER SPEED LEVEL
SPDFBK ALM LEVEL
STALL THRESHOLD
STALL TRIP DELAY
Viewing Trip Conditions

The following function blocks (MMI menus) can be viewed to investigate trip conditions:
HEALTH STORE
HEALTH WORD
STALL TRIP
Inhibiting Alarms
The following alarms can be inhibited in the INHIBIT ALARMS menu.
SPEED FEEDBACK
ENCODER FAILED
FIELD FAILED
5703 RCV ERROR
STALL TRIP
Note: The STALL TRIP parameter in the DIAGNOSTICS menu is set regardless of the state of
STALL TRIP inhibit. The flag is set after the stall time-out expires. The relevant bit (bit 12)
in the HEALTH WORD and HEALTH STORE parameters is only set when STALL TRIP is
enabled.

Fault Finding
Problem Possible Cause Remedy
Converter will not power-up Fuse blown Check supply details, replace
with correct fuse.
Check Product Code against
Model No.
Faulty cabling Check all connections are
correct and secure.
Check cable continuity
Converter fuse keeps blowing Faulty cabling or connections Check for problem and rectify
wrong before replacing with correct
fuse
Faulty Converter Contact Parker SSD Drives
Cannot obtain HEALTH state Incorrect or no supply Check supply details
available
Motor will not run at switch on Motor jammed Stop the Converter and clear
the jam
Motor runs and stops Motor becomes jammed Stop the Converter and clear
the jam
Motor runs at full speed only Reversed tachogenerator or Check tachogenerator
open circuit tachogenerator connections
Open circuit speed reference Check terminal
potentiometer
Table 7-2 Fault Finding
Test Points
The following test points are located on the control board and, used with a meter, will provide
valuable information in the event of a fault. Refer to Parker SSD Drives for further information.
TP1 TP2 TP3
P3 port TP4 TP5 TP6 P2 port
0V TP7 TP8
Test Point Description

TP1 Armature current ± 2.2V ≡ ±200%, (value of CURRENT FEEDBACK diagnostic,
Tag No. 298)
TP2 Buffered analog tach ±10V ≡ ±100%, (value of SPEED FEEDBACK diagnostic,
Tag No. 207)
TP3 Armature volts ±10V ≡ ±100%, (value of TERMINAL VOLTS diagnostic, Tag No. 57)
TP4 Field current 4V ≡ 100%, (value of FIELD I FBK diagnostic, Tag No. 300)
TP5 Not used
TP6 Overcurrent trip 12V to -15V transition on trip
TP7 PEEK software (Parker SSD Drives use)
TP8 Not used
0V 0V

Routine Maintenance and Repair 8-1
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
0
1
Caution
Maintenance and repair should only be performed by competent persons using only the
recommended spares. Use of incorrect parts may create a hazard and risk of injury.
Routine Maintenance
Periodically inspect the Converter for build-up of dust or obstructions that may affect ventilation
of the unit. Remove this using dry air.
Repair
There are no user-serviceable components.
IMPORTANT: MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE UNIT - RETURN IT TO PARKER SSD DRIVES.
Saving Your Application Data
The Converter retains saved settings during power-down. You can download and upload this
back into the repaired unit, if necessary. You may, depending upon your knowledge of the fault,
attempt the back-up of your application data now, refer to Chapter 5: “The Man-Machine
Interface (MMI)” - Copying an Application.
If the fault clearly lies within the MMI, then return the unit for repair.
Returning the Unit to Parker SSD Drives

Please have the following information available:
• The model and serial number - see the unit’s rating label
• Details of the fault
• Complete the “Technical Support Checks” detailed over the page (if electrically competent)
Contact your nearest Parker SSD Drives Service Centre to arrange return of the item.
You will be given a Returned Material Authorisation. Use this as a reference on all paperwork
you return with the faulty item. Pack and despatch the item in the original packing materials; or
at least an antistatic enclosure. Do not allow packaging chips to enter the unit.
Disposal
This product contains materials which are consignable waste under the Special Waste
Regulations 1996 which complies with the EC Hazardous Waste Directive - Directive
91/689/EEC.
We recommend you dispose of the appropriate materials in accordance with the valid
environmental control laws. The following table shows which materials can be recycled and
which have to be disposed of in a special way.{xe "Disposal" \f }
Material Recycle Disposal
metal yes no
plastics material yes no
printed circuit board no yes
The printed circuit board should be disposed of in one of two ways:
1. High temperature incineration (minimum temperature 1200°C) by an incinerator authorised
under parts A or B of the Environmental Protection Act
2. Disposal in an engineered land fill site that is licensed to take aluminium electrolytic
capacitors. Do not dispose of in a land fill site set aside for domestic waste.
Packaging
During transport our products are protected by suitable packaging. This is entirely
environmentally compatible and should be taken for central disposal as secondary raw material.

8-2 Routine Maintenance and Repair
Technical Support Checks

The results of the following checks will be very useful to Parker SSD Drives’ Technical
Support.
Caution
Please only attempt these checks if you are electrically competent.
Miscellaneous Checks or

Check 24V present at Terminals C1 to C9 (C1 is 0V) - dc
Check ±10V present at Terminals B3 and B4 (B1 is 0V) - dc
Check auxiliary supply present at Terminals D7 (neutral) & D8 (line), 110/240V ac
Check the fans rotate, where applicable
WARNING!
Now isolate the unit completely from all supplies. It may be necessary to remove
an armature and field connection to carry out the following checks.
Continuity Test on Fuses Using a Meter

Check the coding fuses on the power board
Check the auxiliary fuses etc. (fan fuse, if applicable)
Diode Check on Power Terminals Using a Meter or
A+ to L1, L2, L3 and Earth Terminal = Open Circuit
A- to L1, L2, L3 and Earth Terminal = Open Circuit
Internal Field Check Using a Meter or
All the coding fuses must be OK before continuing with the following checks since
the fuses are in the circuit.
-ve to L1 & +ve to D3 = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to L2 & +ve to D3 = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to D4 & +ve to D3 = Diode Drop (approximately 0.5V)
-ve to L1 & +ve to D4 = Open Circuit
-ve to L2 & +ve to D4 = Open Circuit
External Field Check Using a Meter or
-ve to D1 & +ve to D4 = Open Circuit
-ve to D2 & +ve to D4 = Open Circuit
Make a note of the Serial No. and Model No.
Serial No. Model No.
Re-establish all connections. All terminals should be secure and not over-torqued.

Control Loops 9-1
CONTROL LOOPS
9
Principle of Operation
Note: Selection between Current Control or Speed Control (default) is MMI Menu Map
made by the I DMD ISOLATE (current demand isolate) parameter
1 SETUP PARAMETERS
using Digital I/P3 (Terminal C8). If ENABLED the Converter
operates as a current controller, and if DISABLED (the default) it 2 CURRENT LOOP
operates as a speed controller. I DMD ISOLATE
Current Loop
The current loop accepts a demand from either the speed loop, or directly from the plant, and
forms an error signal which is the difference between demand and average value of feedback.
The error signal is fed into a Proportional + Integral compensator which produces the output of
the current loop, i.e. the firing angle signal.
In the Converter, the error signal is created in two different forms:
1. The average error is computed as the difference between demand and average value of
feedback and fed into the Integral part of the P + I algorithm.
2. The instantaneous error is computed as the difference between demand and instantaneous
value of feedback and is fed into the Proportional part of the P + I algorithm. This gives
higher transient performance since it does not contain any time lag, unlike the average which
has a built-in lag of 1/6 of mains cycle. However, the average is the true measurement of
torque which is the objective of the current control and this is not affected by the small time
lag in achieving zero steady-state error.
The firing angle signal is translated into a certain time delay from the mains zero cross point
(obtained via a Phase-Lock-Loop) and this results in a firing command being issued to the
thyristor stack every 1/6 of a mains cycle in steady-state.
Some special features of the current controller are discussed separately below.
Adaptive Current Control
The gain of a thyristor 6-pulse converter (voltage-time area over firing angle) drops dramatically
at discontinuous values of armature current. Therefore a gain boost is required in the current
controller to compensate for that.
In the Converter, this is handled by an adaptive algorithm which allows the current to follow the
demand in one step (firing) within the discontinuous region of operation.
Back EMF (BEMF) Estimate

With the motor at standstill, the firing angle for zero current is 120 degrees. When the motor is
rotating at different speeds the firing angle for zero current follows a cosine locus.
It is of paramount importance to track this locus as close as possible throughout the speed range
if the current loop bandwidth is to be maintained at its highest possible level during current
reversals from master to slave bridge and visa-versa.
There are two reasons for the loss of bandwidth at current reversals.
Firstly, the loss of converter gain needs to be compensated in an accurate way which is the
objective of the adaptive algorithm.
Secondly, the above algorithm also relies on the right start-up value of firing angle in the
incoming bridge in order to minimise both the "dead-time" (time interval of zero current referred
to below) as well as the rise time to the required current demand.
In order to get the right start-up value of firing angle the knowledge of the operating BEMF is
necessary. In the Converter, this is achieved by a combination of a hardware peak current
detector and appropriate software algorithm.

9-2 Control Loops
Bridge Changeover Delay
The bridge changeover "dead-time", i.e. time interval of zero current, is programmable from 1 to
1500 (via Reserved Menu) with a default value of 1.
For values from 1 to 6:
The delay can be set at multiples of 1/6 mains period, i.e. max. 6 x 3.33 = 20ms at 50Hz. This is
relevant for use with large power converters where it is advisable to allow more time for
snubber currents to subside before reversal is enabled. It is also relevant for motors with very
large armature inductance where zero current detection is more sensitive and therefore a "factor
of safety" in the bridge changeover delay is advisable.
For values from 7 to 1500:
The delay corresponds to 7 x 1.33μs up to 1500 x 1.33μs = 2ms maximum.
Manual Tuning
Note: This procedure is rarely used or required, if possible use Autotune.
You may need to perform a manual tuning as Autotune does have two limitations:
1. It requires the field to be switched off and therefore the shaft will need clamping when
autotuning a permanent-magnet motor or very rarely with a wound-field motor of relatively
high permanent magnetism.
2. Part 1 of Autotune determines the discontinuous to continuous boundary level, i.e. the
average value at which the armature current becomes "just" continuous. This is achieved by
automatically disabling the field and advancing the firing angle at small steps until the slope
of the current "envelope" changes substantially indicating continuous region of operation.
Part 2 of Autotune applies a step change in the current demand within the continuous region
as determined by Part 1. When the current feedback approaches the final settling value
within 1 to 2 steps, the autotune function terminates and returns the "FIELD ENABLE" to its
previous state. The P & I gains and the value of discontinuous boundary current should then
be saved.
If the value of boundary current (Part 1) is very high (larger than 150% or so), then the
Autotune Part 2 step change will be in the region above 200% which might result in
overcurrent trip. In this case it is advisable to set the I gain to a large enough value (typically
10) to give fast response throughout the discontinuous region, a low value for the P gain
(typically 1, not important since there is no effective armature time constant in the
discontinuous region to compensate for) and finally eliminate the adaptive mode by setting
"Discontinuous" to zero. At the same time though, one must disable the Missing Pulse alarm;
this is activated when the load current is above the "Discontinuous" level and in this case it
would give erroneous trips if left enabled. In order to disable this alarm the special "super-
password" reserved for Parker SSD Drives personnel needs to be entered. Next in the
"Reserved" menu, which will then appear as a submenu of "SYSTEM", a parameter called
"Health Inhibit" should be set to the hexadecimal value 0x002.
The above suggestion assumes that the current limit will prevent the motor from operating in the
continuous region, i.e. above 150% in the example above. If this is not the case, as for example
when the current limit is set at 200%, then a manual tuning will be necessary.
Set the DISCONTINUOUS parameter to the correct value by disabling or disconnecting the
field, set the current limit to zero and start the drive. Gradually increase the current limit
observing the current feedback waveform (see Diagnostics below) on an oscilloscope beam.
When the pulses "just come together", with no zero interval between them, read the value of
current limit (or indeed current demand) and set the DISCONTINUOUS parameter to this value.
If this value is very high (above the current limit), then it should be set to zero and follow the
suggestion in 2 above. In this case the drive will not perform any adaption in the discontinuous
region, so some loss in performance may be noticed in the current loop response.

Control Loops 9-3
Subsequently either
• a squarewave signal should be applied to the current demand input (Terminal A3) with
Current Demand Isolate (terminal C8) on
• or "toggle" between two values of current limit into terminal A6 and operate in normal speed
loop mode.
Ideally this input signal should be offset above the Discontinuous level, such that the drive is
operating in the continuous current region. Then you could increase the value of I gain to give a
fast rise with no more than 10% overshoot and subsequently increase the P gain towards
critically damped response, i.e. practically no overshoot.
8
Current Loop controls incorrectly set.
8
Current Loop controls incorrectly set.
Proportional Gain too low - increase
Integral Time Constant too short
increase Current Loop Integral Time Current Loop Proportional Gain
Constant
Current Loop response

correctly adjusted.
9
Tuning Hints
If the I gain is too high, the response will be underdamped (overshoot will be excessive with
long oscillatory settling). If the I gain is too low, the response will be overdamped (long
exponential rise).
With the I gain optimally set, if the P gain is too low the response will be overdamped. If P is
too high the response will revert to underdamped with the tendency to go totally unstable.
Diagnostics
The diagnostic point for "real" armature current is the first (left-hand side) test point below the
calibration panel. This will give 1.1V average for 100% current. It will also give the operating
bridge, i.e. it will be negative for the Master bridge (positive current demand) and positive for
the Slave bridge (negative current demand).

9-4 Control Loops
Speed Loop
The speed loop accepts a demand from either an outside loop (i.e. position loop) or directly from
the plant and forms the error signal which is the difference between demand and feedback. The
error signal is fed into a Proportional + Integral compensator which produces the output of the
speed loop, i.e. the current demand signal.
The integral gain is translated into a Time Constant (secs) in the MMI which defines more
clearly the function of the compensator against a certain load time constant.
Speed Loop Synchronised with Current Loop

The proportional part of the P+I algorithm is executed immediately before each run of the
current loop, thus ensuring minimum time lag and therefore maximum bandwidth.
Combined Analog Tacho / Encoder Feedback

By using the analog tacho f/b on the Proportional part of the P + I algorithm and the encoder f/b
on the Integral part (using similar principle as in the current loop), the Converter combines
maximum transient response with the increased steady-state accuracy of the digital feedback.
Current Demand Rate Limit (di/dt)

Access to the di/dt limit is currently reserved for Parker SSD Drives personnel only in the
Reserved Menu.
This is a limit imposed on the rate of change of the current demand. It is to be used for motors
with commutation limitations, mechanical systems that cannot absorb rapid torque transients and
also as a means of limiting current overshoot for large current swings (e.g. 0 ¯ 200%). The
default value is set at 35% (i.e. maximum allowable change is 35% of FLC in 1/6 mains cycle)
which has no practical effect on the current response between 0 and 100%.
Field Control
Set-up Notes
The setting of the P + I gains for the current controller is done manually in much the same way
as described in Chapter 4: “Current Loop - Manual Tuning”, and one convenient way is to
switch several times from "quench" to "standby" mode and observe the current response 0 ¯
50% for rise time and overshoot.
The setting of the field weakening gains is achieved by observing the armature voltage feedback
for overshoot and settling time. The EMF GAIN parameter defaults to 0.30 (real gain of 30) and
normally lies in the region 0.20 to 0.70 (larger settings normally lead to instability). The EMF
LEAD parameter should be set at around the time constant for the field current loop. It defaults
to 2.00 (200ms). Finally, the EMF LAG parameter defaults to 40.00 (4000ms) and it should
generally lie in the region of 10 to 50 times the "emf lead".
The tuning of the field weakening loop is also very dependent on the acceleration rate through
base speed and visa-versa. If armature voltage overshoot is a problem for rapid acceleration
rates, then the use of the "feedback lead/lag" compensator is recommended to limit the
overshoot as discussed above. If not, then the default values for the above bemf fbk gains are
recommended (i.e. disabled) which will probably allow further increase in the forward path
transfer function gains ("emf gain" and "emf lead") for faster field response.
In summary, the increased attenuation at the higher frequencies will allow an increase in the
gain whilst maintaining the desired phase margin. Bearing in mind that the negative angle of the
compensator lowers the angle curve, in order to maintain the desired phase margin (45 to 60
degrees) a reduction in the phase-margin frequency is required. This is the frequency at which
the log magnitude curve crosses the 0db line. Since the phase-margin frequency is indicative of
the speed of response of the system, its reduction should be kept to a minimum. This is
achievable by trying to keep the value of the corner-frequency 1 / T1 as low as possible by
setting T1 at values greater than 100ms or so. The upper limit for T1 will be dictated by the
settling time requirement.

Control Loops 9-5
Current Control
The field current loop can accept a demand directly from the plant and/or an outside field
weakening loop and forms the error signal which is the difference between demand and
feedback. The error signal is fed into a P + I compensator which produces the output of the field
loop, i.e. the field firing angle signal.
The firing angle signal is translated into a certain time delay from the mains zero cross point
(obtained via the same Phase-Lock-Loop as for the armature) and this results into a firing
command being issued to the field bridge every 1/2 of a mains cycle in steady-state.
Voltage Control
This offers the facility of an open-loop voltage control for motors which do not provide in the
nameplate the field current rating. The field voltage is controlled by the specified RATIO
OUT/IN which defaults to 90%. This is the maximum dc Volts that can be obtained for a given
ac RMS input in a single-phase rectifier, i.e. 370V dc for 415V ac supply. The specified ratio
determines directly the firing angle at which the controller operates and therefore the thermal
effects on the field resistance as well as mains voltage variations are not compensated for. It is
also worth noting that in this mode the field overcurrent alarm is not active (since there is no
current scaling) and therefore this mode is not recommended for use with supplies much greater
than the field voltage rating.
Field Weakening
The field weakening loop accepts a demand for MAX VOLTS (default 100%) and forms the
error signal which is the difference between demand and arm. volts feedback. The error signal is
fed into a Lead/Lag compensator which produces the output of the field weakening loop, i.e. the
field weakening demand. This gets subtracted from the field setpoint (default 100%) to produce
the field demand into the field current loop. A MIN FLD CURRENT parameter (default 10%)
limits the minimum level in the field weakening region.
The Lead/Lag compensator has a dc gain ("emf gain" = Kp), a lead time constant ("emf lead" =
T1) and a lag time constant ("emf lag" = T2).
Note: Field weakening is not possible when running with Armature Volts feedback. Although
field weakening can be “enabled” in this instance, a software interlock clamps the field
demand at 100% and will not allow the field weakening to reduce it.
Lead/Lag
The slight disadvantage of Lead/Lag { transfer function = Kp * ( 1+sT1 ) / ( 1+sT2 ) }
versus P + I { transfer function = Kp * ( 1+sT ) / sT } is that the DC gain is not "infinity"
and therefore there is a "finite" steady-state error. This is kept sufficiently small for values of
"emf gain" > 0.20 ( i.e. real 20).
The advantage of the Lead/Lag is that it allows greater attenuation at higher frequencies. The
high frequency gain is Kp T1 / T2 and therefore by keeping the ratio T2 / T1 high (generally at
values above 10) the log magnitude is reduced by 20log(T2/T1) for frequencies above 1 / T1.
An extra feedback lead/lag compensator has been added into the arm. volts f/b to minimise the
overshoot in volts. This is particularly useful when accelerating fast through base speed and
therefore increasing the motor bemf at a faster rate than the field current can possibly weaken,
due to the normally large field time constant. The ratio of "bemf fbk lead" / "bemf fbk lag"
should always be greater than 1 to give a "lead" function to allow the field to start weakening
early enough. However, it is not recommended to raise the ratio much higher than 2 to 3 times,
otherwise instability will start creeping in. The absolute setting of the above parameters in
milliseconds depends on the overall field time constant. The default value is set to 1 (100ms /
100ms) which means that the function is disabled.
Standby Field
When the armature current gets quenched, a timer starts timing-out and after a certain delay
("fld quench delay") it will either quench the field totally ("fld quench mode" = "quench") or
will reduce it to 50% of the current or voltage setpoint ("fld quench mode" = "standby"). This
applies to both current and voltage modes.

9-6 Control Loops

Parameter Specification Table 10-1
0
1 PARAMETER SPECIFICATION TABLE
The headings for the Tag No. table are described below.
Tag A numeric identification of the parameter. It is used to identify the

source and destinations of internal links.
Name The parameter name as it appears on the MMI.
Function The menu page and function block under which the parameter is
Block stored.
Minimum This varies with parameter type:
Value INT The upper and lower limits of the parameter, indicating the
Maximum parameter’s true, internally-held, number of decimal (a
Value reduced number of digits may be shown by the MMI).
BOOL 0 = FALSE, 1 = TRUE
TAG The tag number of any parameter
(May be set to a negative value indicating a feedback link).
WORD 0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
ID Serial Communications Mnemonic:
Refer to Chapter 14: “Serial Communications”
Notes RO Read Only
RW Read/Write
Parameter Types:
INT (Signal) fixed point value - 16 bits
BOOL A Boolean (bit) representing FALSE or TRUE
TAG A value representing a choice of TAG
WORD 16 Bit hexadecimal number

10-2 Parameter Specification Table
Specification Table: Tag Number Order
Tag (MMI) Name Function Block Minimum Value Maximum Value Notes
0 Inactive Destination Unallocated 0 0 RW
1 EEprom Checksum Unallocated - - -
2 RAMP ACCEL TIME RAMPS 1 6000 RW
3 RAMP DECEL TIME RAMPS 1 6000 RW
4 CONSTANT ACCEL RAMPS 0 1 RW
5 RAMP INPUT RAMPS -10500 10500 RW
6 RATIO 1 SETPOINT SUM 1 -30000 30000 RW
7 RATIO 2 (A3) SPEED LOOP -30000 30000 RW
8 SIGN 1 SETPOINT SUM 1 0 1 RW
9 SIGN 2 (A3) SPEED LOOP 0 1 RW
10 ZERO SPD. OFFSET CALIBRATION -500 500 RW
11 STANDSTILL LOGIC STANDSTILL 0 1 RW
12 ZERO THRESHOLD STANDSTILL 0 10000 RW
13 INT. TIME CONST. SPEED LOOP 1 30000 RW
14 PROP. GAIN SPEED LOOP 0 20000 RW
15 CUR.LIMIT/SCALER CURRENT LOOP 0 20000 RW
16 PROP. GAIN CURRENT LOOP 0 20000 RW
17 INT. GAIN CURRENT LOOP 0 20000 RW
18 AUTOTUNE CURRENT LOOP 0 1 RW
19 FIELD FAIL INHIBIT ALARMS 0 1 RW
20 ARMATURE V CAL. CALIBRATION 9800 11000 RW
21 IR COMPENSATION CALIBRATION 0 10000 RW
22 ENCODER RPM CALIBRATION 0 6000 RW
23 ANALOG TACH CAL CALIBRATION 9800 11000 RW
24 ENCODER LINES CALIBRATION 10 5000 RW
25 ARMATURE I (A9) CALIBRATION 0 1 RW
26 PROG STOP TIME STOP RATES 1 6000 RW
27 STOP TIME STOP RATES 1 6000 RW
28 STALL TRIP INHIBIT ALARMS 0 1 RW
29 STOP ZERO SPEED STOP RATES 0 10000 RW
30 ADDITIONAL DEM CURRENT LOOP -20000 20000 RW
31 SPD BRK2 (HIGH) CURRENT PROFILE 0 10000 RW
32 SPD BRK1 (LOW) CURRENT PROFILE 0 10000 RW
33 IMAX BRK2(SPD2) CURRENT PROFILE 0 20000 RW
34 FIELD FBKSTOP RESERVED 0 1000 RW
35 FIELD FFRSTOP RESERVED 0 10000 RW
36 IFFB DELAY RESERVED 0 255 RW
37 FULL MENUS MENUS 0 1 RW
38 MENU DELAY MENUS 0 65535 RW
39 CONFIGURE ENABLE CONFIGURE I/O 0 1 RW
40 System I/O Digital Unallocated - - -
41 SETPOINT 4 SPEED LOOP -10500 10500 RW
42 AT CURRENT LIMIT DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
43 MODULUS DIGITAL OUTPUTS 0 1 RW

46 I Loop Suspended Unallocated 0 1 RO
47 SPEED FBK SELECT SPEED LOOP 0 3 RW
48 NEG. I CLAMP CURRENT LOOP -10000 10000 RW
49 ENCODER SIGN SPEED LOOP 0 1 RW
50 ANIN 1 (A2) DIAGNOSTICS -10000 10000 RO
55 ANOUT 1 (A7) DIAGNOSTICS -10000 10000 RO
56 ANOUT 2 (A8) DIAGNOSTICS -10000 10000 RO
57 TERMINAL VOLTS DIAGNOSTICS -12500 12500 RO
58 Analog Tach Feedback Unfiltered Unallocated - - RO
59 Encoder Feedback Unfiltered Unallocated - - RO
60 BACK EMF DIAGNOSTICS -15000 15000 RO
61 ACTUAL NEG I LIM DIAGNOSTICS -20000 20000 RO
62 Speed Feedback Unfiltered Unallocated - - RO
63 SPEED SETPOINT DIAGNOSTICS -30000 30000 RO
64 Speed Loop Error Unfiltered Unallocated - - RO
65 Current Feedback Unfiltered Unallocated - - RO
66 Current Demand Unfiltered Unallocated - - RO
67 ACTUAL POS I LIM DIAGNOSTICS -20000 20000 RO
68 START (C3) DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
69 DIGITAL INPUT C4 DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
70 DIGITAL INPUT C5 DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
71 DIGIN 1 (C6) DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
74 DIGOUT 1 (B5) DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
77 AT ZERO SPEED DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
78 AT ZERO SETPOINT DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
79 AT STANDSTILL DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
80 PROGRAM STOP DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
81 SPEED FBK ALARM INHIBIT ALARMS 0 1 RW
82 DRIVE START DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
83 Main Contactor Unallocated 0 1 RO
84 DRIVE ENABLE DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
85 RAMP OUTPUT DIAGNOSTICS -10000 10000 RO
86 SPT SUM 1 OUTPUT DIAGNOSTICS -20000 20000 RO
87 POS. I CLAMP DIAGNOSTICS -20000 20000 RO
88 NEG. I CLAMP DIAGNOSTICS -20000 20000 RO
89 SPEED DEMAND DIAGNOSTICS -10500 10500 RO
90 BIPOLAR CLAMPS CURRENT LOOP 0 1 RW
91 PROG STOP I LIM STOP RATES 0 20000 RW
92 ENCODER ALARM INHIBIT ALARMS 0 1 RW

93 IMAX BRK1(SPD1) CURRENT PROFILE 0 20000 RW
94 AUX DIGOUT 1 AUX I/O 0 1 RW
97 SOURCE TAG DIGOUT 1 (B5) 0 499 RW
100 INPUT 1 SETPOINT SUM 1 -20000 20000 RW
101 MIN BS DEAD TIME RESERVED 0 6000 RW
102 DESTINATION TAG DIGIN 1 (C6) 0 499 RW
103 VALUE FOR TRUE DIGIN 1 (C6) -30000 30000 RW
104 VALUE FOR FALSE DIGIN 1 (C6) -30000 30000 RW
111 5703 RCV ERROR INHIBIT ALARMS 0 1 RW
112 STALL TRIP DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
113 RAMPING DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
114 Alarm Sequence State Unallocated - - RO
115 HEALTH WORD INHIBIT ALARMS 0 FFFF RO
116 HEALTH STORE INHIBIT ALARMS 0 FFFF RO
117 Health Inhibit Diagnostic Unallocated 0 FFFF RO
118 RAMP HOLD RAMPS 0 1 RW
119 I DMD. ISOLATE CURRENT LOOP 0 1 RW
120 ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD 0 FFFF RW
121 CHANGE PASSWORD PASSWORD 0 FFFF RW
122 Health Flag (Led) Unallocated 0 1 RO
123 PEEK DATA PEEK 24 FFFF RW
124 PEEK SCALE PEEK 0 65535 RW
125 Ready Flag Unallocated 0 1 RO
126 MIN SPEED RAMPS 0 10000 RW
127 Dump Enable Unallocated 0 1 RW
128 ANOUT 1 AUX I/O -10000 10000 RW
129 ANOUT 2 AUX I/O -10000 10000 RW
130 MODE P3 SETUP 0 4 RW
131 DEADBAND WIDTH SETPOINT SUM 1 0 10000 RW
132 SETPT. RATIO 5703 SUPPORT -30000 30000 RW
133 SETPT. SIGN 5703 SUPPORT 0 1 RW
134 SOURCE TAG CONFIGURE 5703 0 499 RW
135 DESTINATION TAG CONFIGURE 5703 0 499 RW
136 FEED FORWARD CURRENT LOOP 10 5000 RW
137 DISCONTINUOUS CURRENT LOOP 0 20000 RW
138 GROUP ID (GID) MAIN PORT (P1) 0 7 RW
139 UNIT ID (UID) MAIN PORT (P1) 0 15 RW
140 GROUP ID (GID) AUX PORT (P2) 0 7 RW

141 UNIT ID (UID) AUX PORT (P2) 0 15 RW
142 PNO. 7 MAIN PORT (P1) 0 FFFF RW
143 PNO. 7 AUX PORT (P2) 0 FFFF RW
144 CHANGEBAND (BIN) MAIN PORT (P1) 0 32767 RW
145 CHANGEBAND (BIN) AUX PORT (P2) 0 32767 RW
146 SRL LINK ENABLE MAIN PORT (P1) 0 1 RW
147 SRL LINK ENABLE AUX PORT (P2) 0 1 RW
148 PROTOCOL MAIN PORT (P1) 0 1 RW
149 PROTOCOL AUX PORT (P2) 0 1 RW
150 BAUD RATE MAIN PORT (P1) 300 19200 RW
151 BAUD RATE AUX PORT (P2) 300 19200 RW
152 ESP SUP. (ASCII) MAIN PORT (P1) 0 1 RW
153 ESP SUP. (ASCII) AUX PORT (P2) 0 1 RW
154 II RESERVED 0 FFFF RW
155 Serial Link Version Number Unallocated
156 Config info Unallocated
157 Block Length Unallocated
158 ERROR REPORT MAIN PORT (P1) - - RW
159 ERROR REPORT AUX PORT (P2) - - RW
160 Mode N° Unallocated
161 AUX START AUX I/O 0 1 RW
162 MIN MMI CYCLE TM RESERVED 0 65535 RW
163 ILOOP PI MODE RESERVED 0 2 RW
164 TOGGLE PERIOD RESERVED 0 FFFF RW
165 TOGGLE REF 1 RESERVED -30000 30000 RW
166 SEL. INT/CUR/SPD RESERVED 0 4 RW
167 TOGGLE REF 2 RESERVED -30000 30000 RW
168 AUX ENABLE AUX I/O 0 1 RW
169 FIELD ENABLE DIAGNOSTICS 0 1 RO
170 FIELD ENABLE FIELD CONTROL 0 1 RW
171 SETPOINT FLD CURRENT VARS 0 10000 RW
172 INT. GAIN FLD CURRENT VARS 0 10000 RW
173 PROP. GAIN FLD CURRENT VARS 0 10000 RW
174 FLD. WEAK ENABLE FLD WEAK VARS 0 1 RW
175 EMF LEAD FLD WEAK VARS 10 5000 RW
176 EMF LAG FLD WEAK VARS 0 20000 RW
177 EMF GAIN FLD WEAK VARS 0 10000 RW
178 MAX VOLTS FLD WEAK VARS 0 10000 RW
179 MIN FLD CURRENT FLD WEAK VARS 0 10000 RW
180 SPDFBK ALM LEVEL CALIBRATION 0 10000 RW
181 Field Current Feedback Unfiltered Unallocated
182 FIELD I CAL. CALIBRATION 9800 11000 RW
183 FIELD DEMAND DIAGNOSTICS 0 10000 RO
184 FLD.FIRING ANGLE DIAGNOSTICS 0 180 RO
185 FLD QUENCH DELAY FIELD CONTROL 0 6000 RW
186 FLD. QUENCH MODE FIELD CONTROL 0 1 RW
187 5703 INPUT SYSTEM PORT P3 -30000 30000 RW
188 OVER SPEED LEVEL CALIBRATION 0 20000 RW

189 5703 OUTPUT SYSTEM PORT P3 -30000 30000 RO
190 PEAK HW SLOPE RESERVED 0 65535 RW
191 BEMF FBK LEAD FLD WEAK VARS 10 5000 RW
192 BEMF FBK LAG FLD WEAK VARS 10 5000 RW
193 TICK LENGTH RESERVED 0 65535 RO
194 DISC ADAPT POT RESERVED 0 10000 RW
195 THRESHOLD (>) DIGOUT 1 (B5) -30000 30000 RW
198 P3 BAUD RATE P3 SETUP 300 57600 RW
199 DELAY INVERSE TIME 1 6000 RW
200 RATE INVERSE TIME 1 6000 RW
201 REGEN MODE CURRENT LOOP 0 1 RW
202 INT. DEFEAT SPEED LOOP 0 1 RW
203 INVERSE TIME O/P DIAGNOSTICS 0 20000 RO
204 AIMING POINT INVERSE TIME 0 20000 RW
205 dI/dt RESERVED 0 20000 RW
206 ENCODER DIAGNOSTICS 0 6000 RO
207 SPEED FEEDBACK DIAGNOSTICS -30000 30000 RO
209 FLD CTRL MODE IS FIELD CONTROL 0 1 RW
210 RATIO OUT/IN FLD VOLTAGE VARS 0 10000 RW
211 HEALTH INHIBIT RESERVED 0 FFFF RW
212 OPERATING MODE DIAGNOSTICS 0 7 RO
213 ZERO CUR OFFSET RESERVED 0 65535 RW
214 ZCD THRESHOLD RESERVED 0 65535 RW
215 G&L Power Meter Unallocated
216 PROG STOP LIMIT STOP RATES 0 6000 RW
217 STOP LIMIT STOP RATES 0 6000 RW
218 JOG SPEED 1 JOG/SLACK -10000 10000 RW
219 JOG SPEED 2 JOG/SLACK -10000 10000 RW
220 12 BIT DAC RESERVED 0 1 RW
221 MMI FILTER T.C. RESERVED 0 65535 RW
222 PRED STEP RESERVED 0 65535 RW
223 SCAN THRESHOLD RESERVED 0 65535 RW
224 STALL TRIP DELAY CALIBRATION 1 6000 RW
225 CRAWL SPEED JOG/SLACK -10000 10000 RW
226 PEAK HW OFFSET RESERVED 0 20000 RW
227 AUX JOG AUX I/O 0 1 RW
228 MODE JOG/SLACK 0 1 RW
229 PRECSN/RESTR CHK RESERVED 0 3 RW
230 CALIBRATION ANIN 1 (A2) -30000 30000 RW
231 MAX VALUE ANIN 1 (A2) -30000 30000 RW
232 MIN VALUE ANIN 1 (A2) -30000 30000 RW

245 % TO GET 10V ANOUT 1 (A7) -30000 30000 RW
246 DESTINATION TAG ANIN 1 (A2) 0 499 RW
248 % TO GET 10V ANOUT 2 (A8) -30000 30000 RW
251 SOURCE TAG ANOUT 1 (A7) 0 499 RW
252 SOURCE TAG ANOUT 2 (A8) 0 499 RW
253 TAKE UP 1 JOG/SLACK -10000 10000 RW
254 TAKE UP 2 JOG/SLACK -10000 10000 RW
255 RESET VALUE RAISE/LOWER -30000 30000 RW
256 INCREASE RATE RAISE/LOWER 1 6000 RW
257 DECREASE RATE RAISE/LOWER 1 6000 RW
258 MIN VALUE RAISE/LOWER -30000 30000 RW
259 MAX VALUE RAISE/LOWER -30000 30000 RW
260 Raise/Lower Dest Unallocated 0 499 RW
261 RAISE INPUT RAISE/LOWER 0 1 RW
262 LOWER INPUT RAISE/LOWER 0 1 RW
263 STALL THRESHOLD CALIBRATION 0 20000 RW
264 RAISE/LOWER O/P DIAGNOSTICS -30000 30000 RO
265 ANALOG IP OFFSET RESERVED -30000 30000 RW
266 % S-RAMP RAMPS 0 10000 RW
267 Position Count Unallocated 0 FFFF RW
268 MODE ADAPTION 0 3 RW
269 SPD BRK1 (LOW) ADAPTION 0 10000 RW
270 SPD BRK2 (HIGH) ADAPTION 0 10000 RW
271 PROP. GAIN ADAPTION 0 20000 RW
272 INT. TIME CONST. ADAPTION 1 30000 RW
273 POS. LOOP P GAIN ADVANCED -20000 20000 RW
274 I GAIN IN RAMP ADVANCED 0 20000 RW
275 Position Count Divider Unallocated 0 30000 RW
276 PLL PROP RESERVED 0 20000 RW
277 PLL INT RESERVED 0 20000 RW
278 PLL Error Unallocated - - RO
279 ARM ENDSTOP RESERVED 0 20000 RW
280 HF C/O DISC GAIN RESERVED 0 20000 RW
281 HF FILTER T.C. RESERVED 0 20000 RW
282 BEMF THRESHOLD RESERVED 0 20000 RW
283 SCAN TC RESERVED 0 20000 RW
284 ZERO SPD. LEVEL ZERO SPD. QUENCH 0 20000 RW

285 ZERO IAD LEVEL ZERO SPD. QUENCH 0 20000 RW
286 RAMPING THRESH. RAMPS 0 10000 RW
287 AUTO RESET RAMPS 0 1 RW
288 EXTERNAL RESET RAMPS 0 1 RW
290 SETPOINT 2 (A3) SPEED LOOP -10500 10500 RO
292 SIGN 0 SETPOINT SUM 1 0 1 RW
293 Ramp O/P Dest Unallocated 0 499 RW
294 SPT Sum 1 Dest Unallocated 0 499 RW
295 User Filter Input Unallocated -30000 30000 RW
296 User Filter Output Unallocated -30000 30000 RO
297 SPEED ERROR DIAGNOSTICS -30000 30000 RO
298 CURRENT FEEDBACK DIAGNOSTICS -30000 30000 RO
299 CURRENT DEMAND DIAGNOSTICS -30000 30000 RO
300 FIELD I FBK. DIAGNOSTICS -30000 30000 RO
301 POS. I CLAMP CURRENT LOOP -10000 10000 RW
302 CONTACTOR DELAY STOP RATES 1 6000 RW
303 OPTION VERSION MAIN PORT P1 0.00 99.99 RO
304 LANGUAGE MENUS 0 1 RW
305 TRIP RESET INHIBIT ALARMS 0 1 RW
306 SOURCE TAG STANDSTILL 0 499 RW
307 EXTERNAL RESET RAISE/LOWER 0 1 RW
308 TACH INPUT (B2) DIAGNOSTICS -30000 30000 RO
310 AUTOCAL RESERVED 0 1 RW
311 IAINST OFFSET RESERVED 0 20000 RW
312 PNO 112 PNO CONFIG 0 499 RW
328 ESP SUP. (ASCII) SYSTEM PORT P3 0 1 RW
329 GROUP ID (GID) SYSTEM PORT P3 0 7 RW
330 UNIT ID (UID) SYSTEM PORT P3 0 15 RW
331 CHANGEBAND (BIN) SYSTEM PORT P3 0 32767 RW
332 ERROR REPORT SYSTEM PORT P3 - - RW

333 PNO. 7 SYSTEM PORT P3 0 FFFF RW
334 PARITY MAIN PORT (P1) 0 1 RW
335 DISABLE MEAN FEEDBACK RESERVED 0 1 RW
336 CHANGEOVER BIAS RESERVED - - RW
337 Thermistor State (Warning) Unallocated 0 1 RO
338 P3 State (Warning) Unallocated 0 1 RO
339 VALUE 1 miniLINK -30000 30000 RW
346 LOGIC 1 miniLINK 0 1 RW
354 EEprom Write Unallocated 0 2 RW
355 RAMP RATE JOG/SLACK 1 6000 RW
356 Speed Loop Output Unallocated -20000 20000 RO
357 MAX DEMAND SPEED LOOP 0 10500 RW
358 MIN DEMAND SPEED LOOP -10500 0 RW
359 INVERTED DIGOUT 1 (B5) 0 1 RW
362 MODULUS ANOUT 1 (A7) 0 1 RW
363 MODULUS ANOUT 2 (A8) 0 1 RW
364 SOURCE TAG LINK 1 0 499 RW
365 DESTINATION TAG LINK 1 0 499 RW
372 Raise Lower Delta Unallocated - - RO
373 System Ramp Delta Unallocated - - RO
374 System Reset Unallocated 0 1 RO
375 LIMIT SETPOINT SUM 1 0 20000 RW
376 Running Unallocated 0 1 RO
377 UDP Length Unallocated - - RW
378 UDP base Unallocated - - RW

386 USER FILTER T.C. RESERVED 0 20000 RW
387 Reserved
388 SYNC OFFSET RESERVED -30000 30000 RW
389 % Encoder RPM Unallocated -30000 30000 RO
392 ADVANCED LINK 11 0 1 RW
393 MODE LINK 11 0 6 RW
394 AUXILIARY SOURCE TAG LINK 11 0 499 RW
397 ADVANCED LINK 12 0 1 RW
398 MODE LINK 12 0 6 RW
399 AUXILIARY SOURCE TAG LINK 12 0 499 RW
400 OPTION ADDRESS MAIN PORT P1 0 499 RW
401 DERIVATIVE TC PID 0 10000 RW
402 INT. TIME CONST. PID 1 10000 RW
403 FILTER T.C. PID 0 10000 RW
404 PROP. GAIN PID 0 1000 RW
405 POSITIVE LIMIT PID 0 10500 RW
406 NEGATIVE LIMIT PID -10500 0 RW
407 O/P SCALER(TRIM) PID -30000 30000 RW
408 ENABLE PID 0 1 RW
409 INT. DEFEAT PID 0 1 RW
410 INPUT 1 PID -30000 30000 RW
411 INPUT 2 PID -30000 30000 RW
412 RATIO 1 PID -30000 30000 RW
413 RATIO 2 PID -30000 30000 RW
414 DIVIDER 2 PID -30000 30000 RW
415 PID ERROR PID -10500 10500 RO
416 PID CLAMPED PID 0 1 RO
417 PID OUTPUT PID -31500 31500 RO
418 DIVIDER 1 PID -30000 30000 RW
419 DIVIDER 1 SETPOINT SUM 1 -30000 30000 RW
421 MAIN CURR. LIMIT CURRENT LOOP 0 20000 RW
422 RESET VALUE RAMPS -30000 30000 RW
424 LINE SPEED DIAMETER CALC. -10500 10500 RW
425 MIN DIAMETER DIAMETER CALC. 0 10000 RW
426 MIN SPEED DIAMETER CALC. 0 10000 RW
427 DIAMETER DIAMETER CALC. 0 10000 RO
428 Modulus Of Line Speed Unallocated 0 10500 RO

429 Modulus Of Reel Speed Unallocated 0 10500 RO
430 Unfiltered Diameter Unallocated 0 10000 RO
431 Diameter Unallocated 0 499 RW
432 TORQUE DEMAND TORQUE CALC. -20000 20000 RW
433 TENSION ENABLE TORQUE CALC. 0 1 RW
434 OVER WIND TORQUE CALC. 0 1 RW
435 POS. I CLAMP TORQUE CALC. 0 499 RW
436 NEG. I CLAMP TORQUE CALC. 0 499 RW
437 REEL SPEED DIAMETER CALC. -10500 10500 RW
438 TAPER TAPER CALC. -10000 10000 RW
439 TENSION SPT. TAPER CALC. 0 10000 RW
440 TENSION TRIM TAPER CALC. -10000 10000 RW
441 TOT.TENS.DEMAND TAPER CALC. -10000 10000 RO
442 Taper Unallocated 0 499 RW
449 LIMIT SETPOINT SUM 2 0 20000 RW
450 Setpoint Sum 2 Unallocated 0 499 RW
451 SPT. SUM OUTPUT SETPOINT SUM 2 -20000 20000 RO
452 TAPERED DEMAND TAPER CALC. 0 10000 RO
453 RAMP RATE DIAMETER CALC. 1 6000 RW
462 RESET VALUE DIAMETER CALC. 0 10000 RW
463 EXTERNAL RESET DIAMETER CALC. 0 1 RW
464 OFFSET ANOUT 1 (A7) -10000 10000 RW
465 OFFSET ANOUT 2 (A8) -10000 10000 RW
471 STANDBY FIELD RESERVED 0 10000 RW
472 Speed Feedback State (Warning) Unallocated 0 1 RO
473 MODE PID 0 4 RW
474 MIN PROFILE GAIN PID 0 10000 RW
475 PROFILED GAIN PID 0 1000 RO
476 3-PHASE FIELD RESERVED 0 1 RW

477 Autotune Flag Diagnostic Unallocated 0 1 RO
478 DESTINATION TAG TENSION+COMP CALC 0 499 RW
479 FIXED INERTIA COMP TENSION+COMP CALC -30000 30000 RW
480 VAR INERTIA COMP TENSION+COMP CALC -30000 30000 RW
481 ROLL MASS / WIDTH TENSION+COMP CALC 0 10000 RW
482 FILTER TC TENSION+COMP CALC 0 20000 RW
483 RATE CAL TENSION+COMP CALC -10000 10000 RW
484 NORMALISED dv/dt TENSION+COMP CALC -30000 30000 RW
485 INERTIA COMP O/P TENSION+COMP CALC 20000 20000 RO
486 TENSION SCALER TENSION+COMP CALC -30000 30000 RW
487 STATIC COMP TENSION+COMP CALC -30000 30000 RW
488 DYNAMIC COMP TENSION+COMP CALC -30000 30000 RW
489 REWIND TENSION+COMP CALC 0 1 RW
490 Remote UDP Upload Select Unallocated 0 FF RW
491 Setpoint Sum 2 Output 0 Unallocated -20000 20000 RO
492 Setpoint Sum 2 Output 1 Unallocated -20000 20000 RO
493 ANIN 2 (A3) SCALED O/P Unallocated -10000 10000 RO
494 DESTINATION TAG DIGITAL INPUT C4 0 499 RW
495 DESTINATION TAG DIGITAL INPUT C5 0 499 RW
496 JOG/SLACK AUX I/O 0 1 RW
497 ENABLE AUX I/O 0 1 RW
498 LINE SPEED SPT TENSION+COMP CALC -10500 10500 RW
499 Option Address Unallocated 0 32767 RW

Technical Specifications 11-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1
Caution
Always use an external ac line choke. Refer to “External AC Supply (RFI) Filters and Line Choke”.
Environmental Details
Operating Temperature 0°C to +55°C (see the “Cooling” table)
Operating temperature is defined as the ambient temperature to the immediate surround of the
Converter, when the Converter and other equipment adjacent to it is operating at worst case
conditions.
Storage Temperature -25°C to +55°C
Shipping Temperature -25°C to +70 °C
Product Enclosure Rating Cubicle Mounted IP00 (Europe)
UL Open Type (North America/Canada)
Altitude If >500 metres above sea level, derate Motor Power rating by 1% per 200 metres to a maximum
of 5,000 metres
Humidity Maximum 85% relative humidity at 40°C non-condensing
Atmosphere Non flammable, non corrosive and dust free
Vibration Unit to be physically isolated from all vibration.
Climatic Conditions Class 3k3, as defined by EN60721-3-3 (1995)
Safety
Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category III
Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2
Europe EN50178 (1998), when fitted inside a cubicle
North America/Canada UL508C
EMC Compliance
All models European Community Directive 89/336/EEC
All models EN50082-1 (1992) and prEN50082-2 (1992) for immunity
EN50081-1(1992) Class B radiated emissions when mounted inside a cubicle
If fitted with external EN50081-2 (1994) Class A conducted emissions

filters

11-2 Technical Specifications
External AC Supply (RFI) Filters and Line Choke

Filters must only be fitted on the mains side of the contactor.
Always use the recommended external AC Line Choke.
AC supply filter and line choke part numbers for conformance with EN55011 Class A.
Armature Current Rating Total Filter Watt Loss Parker SSD Filter Part No. SSD EMC Line Choke
(A) (W)
35 25 1 off CO388965U035 CO463036
70 75 1 off CO388965U110 CO463037
110 75 1 off CO388965U110 CO463038
150, 180 158 1 off CO388965U180 CO463039
270 50 1 off CO467843U340 CO057960
360 50 1 off CO467843U340 CO057961
450 100 2 off CO467843U340 CO057962
720 100 2 off CO467843U340 CO057963
800 100 3 off CO467843U340 CO057963
AC supply filter part numbers for “non CE marked” converters.

Armature Current Rating Total Filter Watt Loss Parker SSD Filter Part No. Line Choke Requirement
(A) (W)
950, 1100 150 3 off CO467843U340
1388 200 4 off CO467843U340 2% minimum,
1600, 1800 250 5 off CO467843U340 refer to
2300 350 7 off CO467843U340 Parker SSD Drives
2800 400 8 off CO467843U340
Cabling Requirements for EMC Compliance

Model Power Supply Motor Cable External Filter to Converter Cable Signal/Control
Cable Cable
Cable Type Unscreened Screened/ Replace flying leads with Screened

(for EMC Compliance) armoured screened/armoured when >0.6m
Segregation From all From all other wiring (noisy) From all other
other wiring wiring (sensitive)
(clean)
Length Limitations Unlimited 50 metres As short as possible 25 metres
With External Filter
Screen to Earth Both ends Both ends Converter end

Connection only

Internal Fuses
PCB Fuses
Board Identification Fuse Rating Parker SSD Drives
Part Number
AH385851 FS1, 5x20mm glass slow-blow (for auxiliary supply, 3A CH540033
contactor, fan supply)
AH385621 FS1, 5x20mm glass slow-blow (for auxiliary supply, 3A CH540033
contactor, fan supply)
AH385128 FS1, 5x20mm glass (fan supply) 1A CH460013
FS2, 5x20mm glass (contactor) 3A CH460033
FS3, 5x20mm glass slow-blow (auxiliary supply) 400mA CH540042
Field Fuses
Identification Fuse Rating Parker SSD Drives
Part Number
10x38mm (all units up to 270A output current) 10A CH430014
10x38mm (all units above 270A output current) 20A CH430024
External Fuses (European)

For fuses where compliance to UL Standards are required, refer to Chapter 12: “Installing the
Converter” - Requirements for UL Compliance.
Product Code BS88 Type Fuse DIN Type Fuse Thyristor A2t
Block 2 Fuse Rating Parker SSD Drives Fuse Rating Part Number @ 125oC Junction
Part Number Temperature
0010 to 0350 35A CH110353 40A CH570044 800 A2t
0351 to 0700 75A CH120753 80A CH570084 8,000 A2t
0701 to 1100 110A CH120114 160A CH580164 8,000 A2t
1101 to 1800 150A CH120154 200A CH580025 15,000 A2t
1801 to 2700 300A CH130035 550A CH590554 125,000 A2t
2701 to 4500 --- --- 700A CH590075 320,000 A2t
4501 to 7200 --- --- 800A CH590085 500,000 A2t
Earthing/Safety Details
Earthing Permanent earthing is mandatory on all units because the earth leakage current exceeds 3.5mA
ac/10mA dc under normal operating conditions. Permanent earthing can be laid in two ways::
1. By using a copper conductor of at least 10mm² cross-sectional area.
2. By using a second conductor, through separate terminals electrically parallel to the
protective conductor.
Note: Each conductor itself must meet the local requirements for a protective earth
conductor.
Input Supply Details Units with or without external filters are suitable for use on earth referenced (TN) supplies, but
units used with a filter are not recommended for non-earth referenced (IT) supplies..
(TN) and (IT)
Earth Leakage Current >50mA (all models)

Electrical Ratings - Power Circuit

Refer to Chapter 3: “Earth Fault Monitoring Systems” for circuit breaker details.
Configuration: 590, *598 - Two anti-parallel 3-phase thyristor bridges
591, *599 - One 3-phase fully controlled thyristor bridge
* External stack options
Short circuit protection semiconductor fuses should be installed in the 3-phase supply to the 590
products. These fuses are suitable for branch circuit short-circuit protection of the solid-state
motor controllers only.
Model Voltage Ranges Output Current Approximate Motor Power @ 460V dc Max Supply Fault Rating
(V) ±10% (armature) Power Loss assuming 95% motor efficiency (A) rms Symmetrical
45/65Hz (A) (W) (kW)
590 110-500 35 105 15 5000
590 110-500 70 210 30 5000
590 110-500 110 330 45 10000
590 110-500 150 450 60 10000
590 110-500 180 540 75 10000
590 110-500 270 710 110 10000
590 110-500 360 1080 150 18000
590 110-500 450 1350 190 18000
590 110-500 720 2160 300 30000
591 110-500 35 105 15 5000
591 110-500 70 210 30 5000
591 110-500 110 330 45 10000
591 110-500 150 450 60 10000
591 110-500 180 540 75 10000
591 110-500 270 710 110 10000
591 110-500 360 1080 150 18000
591 110-500 450 1350 190 18000
591 110-500 720 2160 300 30000
598 220-660 950 2850 395
598 220-660 1100 3300 455
598 220-660 1388 4164 575
598 220-660 1600 4800 660
598 220-660 1800 5400 745
598 220-660 2300 6900 950
598 220-660 2800 8400 1150
599 220-660 950 2850 395
599 220-660 1100 3300 455
599 220-660 1388 4164 575
599 220-660 1600 4800 660
599 220-660 1800 5400 745
599 220-660 2300 6900 950
599 220-660 2800 8400 1150
3-Phase Power Supply Details

Mains Supply 3-phase, 50/60Hz, earth referenced (TN) and non-earth referenced (IT).
Operating Supply Tolerance ±10%
Voltage Ranges 220 to 500V ac - Standard Product
110 to 220V ac - Special Option
220 to 660V ac - External Stack Module (598/599)
Supply Current (0.9 x Idc) Amps ac rms
Field Supply 500V maximum
Phase 3-phase rotation insensitive, no adjustment necessary for frequency change

Electrical Ratings - Output
1
Please refer to Parker SSD Drives for the selection of suitable stack assemblies.
2
The standard overload capacity available is 200% for 10 seconds, 150% for 30 seconds. The
720A chassis has no overload capacity at maximum current whereas at output currents less than
650A overload capacity is as normal.
Model Max Supply Output Current Approximate Overload Capacity Field Current Max Supply Fault Rating
Voltage (armature) Power Loss Available Rating (A) rms Symmetrical
(V) (A) (W) (armature current) (A)
590/1 500 35 105 YES 10 5000
590/1 500 70 210 YES 10 5000
590/1 500 110 330 YES 10 10000
590/1 500 150 450 YES 10 10000
590/1 500 180 540 YES 10 10000
590/1 500 270 710 YES 10 10000
590/1 500 360 1080 YES 20 18000
590/1 500 450 1350 YES 20 18000
590/1 500 720 2160 NO 2 20 30000
598/9 660 950 2850 YES 30
598/9 660 1100 3300 YES 30
598/9 660 1388 4164 YES 30
598/9 660 1600 4800 YES 30
598/9 660 1800 5400 YES 30
598/9 550 1 2300 6900 YES 30
598/9 550 1 2800 8400 YES 30
Auxiliary Power Supply Details

* AC fans are used , thus the input voltage must be suitable for the fans supplied, either 110-
120V ±10% or 220-240V ±10%.
Control and Fan* Single phase, 50-60Hz, ±10%
Supply Voltage 110 - 120V ±10%
220 - 240V ±10%
Reference Supplies +10V ±0.01 @ 10mA maximum
(for speed and current setpoints) -10V ±0.01 @ 10mA maximum
DC Supply:
Power Board AH385851 +24V nominal internally regulated
Maximum output capability: 17W or 750mA

Terminal Definitions (Digital/Analog Inputs & Outputs)

Digital Input Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc
Maximum Input Voltage 30V dc
Input Impedance 4.7kΩ
Sample Time 10ms
Threshold 16V typical
V Input Low <6V
V Input High >18V
Digital Output Digital Output Voltage +24V dc
These outputs are active Digital Output Current +50mA maximum source
high and source current
from the terminal to the Output Update Rate 10ms
load. Thus the load
Output Impedance Negligible up to 50mA load, short circuit protection
must be connected
provided.
between the output and
the signal ground. A
free-wheel diode is
included in the output to
protect the output
transistor when
switching inductive
loads such as relays.
Analog Input/Output Input/Output Resolution 10 Bit plus sign, i.e. 10mV. 0.1% of full scale deflection
Terminal blocks A, B, Input Impedance 100kΩ with a 1ms filter for Analog I/P (A3) and 2ms for
and C are located on others
the control board each
block being a 9 way Maximum Input Sample Rate 10ms (typically), 3ms for Analog I/P 2 (A3)
plug-in connector. In
Input Overload Capability 10%, i.e. maximum recognisable voltage 11V. Analog
addition to terminal
Tachogenerator input should be applied to Terminal G3
blocks A, B and C,
on Calibration Option Card only
terminal blocks G and
H provide connections
Output Capacity 10V at 5mA. Short circuit protected
when the two option
modules are fitted on Output Update Rate 10ms
the control board.
Output Overdrive Capability 10%, i.e. maximum output 11V

Printed Circuit Board Types

Power Board Product Used On Power Range Input Voltage Input Aux Supply
Part No. (3 phase) Frequency (single phase)
AH385851U002 590, 4 quad, high voltage option 35A to 270A 220 to 500V 50/60Hz 110V/240V ac
AH385851U005 590, 4 quad, low voltage option 35A to 270A 110 to 220V 50/60Hz 110V/240V ac
AH385851U003 591, 2 quad, high voltage option 35A to 270A 220 to 500V 50/60Hz 110V/240V ac
AH385851U004 591, 2 quad, low voltage option 35A to 270A 110 to 220V 50/60Hz 110V/240V ac
AH385621U001 590, 4 quad 271A to 720A not applicable 50/60Hz 110V/240V ac
AH385621U001 591, 2 quad 271A to 720A not applicable 50/60Hz 110V/240V ac
AH385128U009 598, external stack 721A upwards not applicable 50/60Hz 110V/240V ac
AH385128U009 599, external stack 721A upwards not applicable 50/60Hz 110V/240V ac
Power Boards AH385621U001 and AH385128U009 operate with

Trigger Board AH055036U003 and Suppression Board AI386001
Auxiliary Amps
AH385851 Internal PSU/Fans/Contactor : 4A fused at FS2

AH385621 Internal PSU/Fans/Contactor : 4A fused at FS2
Power Terminals
Terminal Description Terminal Function Signal Level Terminal
Number
Mains Supply L1 Three phase mains power input, 500Vac maximum 50-60Hz L1
phase reference Line 1 line-to-line
Armature connection positive Converter dc power output, 600Vdc maximum with respect to A- A+
reference Armature Positive (maximum voltage dependent upon
connection to dc motor the supply voltage, the ratio being:
Vout is approximately equal to 1.2Vac
supply)
Armature connection negative Converter dc power output, 600Vdc maximum with respect to A+ A-
reference Armature Negative (maximum voltage dependent upon
connection to dc motor the supply voltage, the ratio being:
Vout is approximately equal to 1.2Vac
supply)

Terminal Information (Power Board)

Terminal Terminal Function Signal Level Terminal
Description Number
External field supply External single phase ac Line 1 input to field bridge. 500V ac maximum, D1
FL1 50-60Hz line-to-line
External field supply External single phase ac Line 2 input to field bridge. 500V ac maximum, D2
FL2 50-60Hz line-to-line
Required AC Input Voltage = 1.11 x Nominal DC Output.
The field regulator will control the field current provided that the
Nominal DC Output voltage exceeds the field voltage by at
least 10%.
i.e. VAC = 1.11 x VDC
and VDC = 1.1 x VFIELD
therefore VAC = 1.22 x VFIELD
The external AC supply must be fitted with high speed fuses to
protect the field regulator. For controllers with 10A field
capability 10A fuses should be used, those with 20A field
capability 20A fuses.
Note: When using an external ac input it is important to have
the correct phase relationship on the terminals. The supply
must be derived from L1 (Red) and L2 (Yellow) phases directly or
indirectly through a transformer. L1 must be connected to D1,
and L2 to D2.
Field Output DC supply for motor field connections. 0.9 x Vac D4

F+
Field Output DC supply for motor field connections. 0.9 x Vac D3

F-
The DC output voltage at these terminals will depend upon the

AC supply voltage and the mode of field control.
Voltage Control
The output voltage will be determined by the ratio parameter in
the field variables. The relationship between the dc output
voltage and AC input voltage is determined by the equation:-
Vratio x VAC
Vdc =
100
The default value of Vratio is 90% hence the DC output voltage
will be the same as for a full wave diode rectifier i.e., 90% is
maximum output.

Terminal Information (Power Board)
Description Number
Main contactor coil Line 110/240V D5

50-60Hz line-to-line
This terminal is the switched output from the contactor control
relay and is derived from the auxiliary supply at terminal D8.
The output is internally fused at 3A hence contactor coils having
a high pick-up current must be operated via a slave relay.
Note: The contacts of the Contactor Control Relay are

suppressed by a series connected resistor (680 Ohms) and
capacitor (22nF) to protect the relay contacts. Users should be
aware that when the contactor Control Relay is “De-energised”,
a leakage current of approximately 2mA can be expected and
this should be considered when interfacing to these terminals.
Typically, there could be the energisation of very sensitive relays.
Main contactor coil Neutral 110/240V D6

This terminal is internally connected to the auxiliary supply
neutral and provides a convenient connection point for the
contactor coil neutral connection.
Auxiliary supply Neutral 110/240V D7

Auxiliary supply Line 110/240V D8
These terminals are the mains input connections for the switch
mode power supply, contactor control relay supply and cooling
fan supply (when force cooled - refer to Chapter 13: “Standard
and Optional Equipment”). The voltage applied to these
terminals is Product Code dependent

Terminal Information (Control Board)

Terminal Terminal Function Signal Level Configurable Terminal
Description Number
TERMINAL BLOCK A
0V (Signal) Zero Volt Reference 0V N/A A1
Analog Input 1 Speed Setpoint No. 1 +10V = Full speed setpoint forward NO A2
-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse
Analog Input 2 Aux. Speed +10V = Full speed setpoint forward YES A3
Setpoint/Current Demand -10V = Full speed setpoint reverse in
speed setpoint mode.
The function of this input is +10V = 100% Positive current demand.
determined by Digital Input
No. 3 at terminal C8. -10V = 100% Reverse current demand.
C8 open circuit = Speed
Setpoint
C8 at +24V = Current
Demand
Analog Input 3 Ramped Speed Setpoint +10V = Full speed setpoint YES A4
-10V = Full speed setpoint reverse
Analog Input 4 Aux. Current Clamp -ve +10V = 200% Positive current demand YES A5
-10V = 200% Reverse current clamp
Analog Input 5 Main Current Limit/Aux. YES A6

Current Clamp +ve
The function of analog
inputs 4 and 5 is
determined by digital Input
No.1 on terminal C6.
C6 open circuit.
Analog inputs No.5 = Main
Current Limit.
C6 at +24V.
Analog input No. 5 =
Auxiliary Current Clamp
Positive.
Analog Input No. 4 =
Auxiliary Current Clamp
Negative.
Analog Output 1 Speed Feedback +10V = Full speed feedback forward. YES A7
-10V = Full speed feedback reverse.
Analog Output 2 Total Speed Setpoint +10V = Full speed feedback forward. YES A8
-10V = Full speed feedback reverse.
Current Meter Buffered Armature Current Bipolar Mode NO A9

Output Output +10V = 200% output current forward.
-10V = 200% output current reverse.
The output can be selected Unipolar Mode
as either Bipolar or +10V = 200% output current.
Unipolar by the Armature I
parameter.

Description Number
TERMINAL BLOCK B
0V (Signal) Zero Volt Reference 0V N/A B1
Not Connected Not Connected B2
+10V DC User +10V Reference +10V at 10mA short circuit protected N/A B3
Reference
-10V DC User -10V Reference -10V at 10mA short circuit protected YES B4
Reference
Digital Output 1 Zero Speed Detected +24V at zero speed YES B5
The operating level of this

output can be modified by
the standstill zero threshold
parameter to give the
desired accuracy of
operation
Digital Output 2 Drive Healthy (Drive +24V when Healthy YES B6

Operational)
This output is true when the

controller is Healthy.
Digital Output 3 Drive Ready +24V when Ready YES B7
This output is true when the

controller is ready to
function, i.e., “locked” into
the mains.
Program Stop Program Stop +24V drive run NO B8

Input 0V (o/c) drive program stop
When the Program Stop Threshold +16V
input is held at +24V, the
drive operates as required
by the inputs. When the
Program Stop is open
circuit or at zero volts, the
controller provides a
controlled or program stop
as defined by the Program
Stop parameters.#
Coast Stop Input Coast Stop +24V drive run NO B9

0V (o/c) drive coasts to rest.
When the Coast Stop input Threshold +16V
is at +24V, the controller
operates normally. When
the Coast Stop is at zero
volts or open circuit, the
main contactor is open and
the drive no longer
operates. The motor coasts
to rest.


Description Number
TERMINAL BLOCK C
0V (Signal) Zero Volt Reference 0V N/A C1
Thermistor/ Motor overtemperature It is good practice to protect DC motors N/A C2

Microtherm Input protection element input against sustained thermal overloads by
fitting temperature sensitive resistors or
switches in the field and interpole
windings of the machine. These devices
have a low resistance (typically 200Ω)
up to a reference temperature 125oC).
Above this temperature, their resistance
rises rapidly to greater than 2000Ω.
Motor overtemperature sensors should
be connected in series between
terminals C1 and C2. A motor
overtemperature alarm will be indicated
if the external resistance between C1
and C2 exceeds 1.8k Ω ± 200Ω.
Terminals C1 and C2 must be linked if
overtemperature sensors are not used.
Start/Run Input Start/Run +24V = True/Run NO C3

0V (o/c) = False/Normal Stop
When an input is applied to Threshold + 16V
this terminal, the main
contactor will close and the
controller will operate
provided there are no
alarms, program stop/coast
stop signals are high and
the controller is enabled.
When the input is removed
the controller will perform a
regenerative stop to zero
speed. A regenerative stop
can only be achieved by a
4 quad regenerative
controller; the 2 quad non-
regenerative controller will
coast to zero speed.
Jog Input Jog +24V = True/Jog YES C4

0V = False/Stop
When the Jog Input is held Threshold +16V (reserved
at +24V, the drive jogs parameter)
provided input C3 is low.
When the Jog Input is
removed the drive will ramp
down to zero obeying the
Jog Ramp Rate.
Enable Input Enable +24V = True/Enable YES C5

0V = False/Inhibit
The Enable Input provides a Threshold +16V (reserved
means of electronically parameter)
inhibiting controller
operation. If the enable
input is not true all control
loops will be inhibited and
the controller will not
function.

Description Number
Digital Input 1 Current Clamp Select +24V = True/Bipolar Clamp YES C6

0V = False/Unipolar Clamp
This input alters the
configuration of the current Threshold +16V
clamps. With no
connection, i.e., false,
Analog I/P 5 provides a
unipolar current limit.
When true, Analog I/P5 is
the positive current clamp,
Analog I/P 4 is the negative
current clamp
Digital Input 2 Ramp Hold +24V = True/Hold YES C7

0V = False/Ramp
If the input is held true the Threshold + 16V
S-Ramp output is frozen at
the last value irrespective of
the Ramped Setpoint Input.
When false the S-Ramp
Output follows the Ramped
Setpoint Input with a delay
determined by the
Acceleration and
Deceleration Ramped time
parameters.
Digital Input 3 Current Demand Isolate +24V = True/Current YES C8

0V = False/Speed
This input alters the drive Threshold + 16V
operation from Speed
Control to Current Control.
When digital input No. 3 is
true, analog input No. 2
provides the current
demand and the speed
loop is disconnected.
When false the speed loop
is in control and analog
input No. 2 is an auxiliary
speed setpoint.
+24V Supply +24V Maximum output current: 250mA or N/A C9

750mA (power board dependent - refer
to “Auxiliary Power Supply Details”).

Terminal Information (Option Boards)

Description Number
TERMINAL BLOCK G (SWITCHABLE TACHO CALIBRATION OPTION)

+ AC Tacho input +AC G1
- AC Tacho input - AC G2
+ DC Tacho input +DC G3
- DC Tacho input - DC G4
Tacho Out Calibrated Tacho Output P3
(5701 MICROTACH RECEIVE OPTION - PLASTIC)
Signal Input Microtach fibre optic input There are no other connections to this option module. F1
(The 5701 Microtach should be powered by an
external 24V DC at 60mA, 1.4W.)
(5901 MICROTACH OPTION MODULE - GLASS)
Signal Input Microtach fibre optic input There are no other connections to this option module. F1
(The 5901 Microtach should be powered by an
external 24V DC at 125mA, 3W.)
TERMINAL BLOCK G (ENCODER OPTION)
Terminal Block G pinouts will change function depending upon which option board is fitted to the control board. The
configuration supplied as standard is with the Switchable Tacho Calibration Option fitted. Further information on the other
options may be obtained from the relevant Technical Manual.
TERMINAL BLOCK H (SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS)

Note: Where more than 8 serial communications option boards are interconnected on one system, the line termination
resistor fitted to the option board causes excessive loading on the system. The resistor should be removed on boards daisy
chained in the serial wiring, not those at the beginning or end of the system. Refer to Parker SSD Drives if in doubt.
RS485
XMT- Serial Communications Port P1 Transmit Terminals H1
XMT + Balanced Line Driver outputs compatible with RS422 signal levels H2
0V Isolated Serial Communications Port H3
0V Isolated Signal ground with galvanic isolation from controller signal ground or power ground H4
(note that the signal screen must also be grounded at the host)
RCV- Serial Communications Port P1 Receive Terminals H5
RCV+ Balance Line Receiver input compatible with RS422 signal levels H6
PROFIBUS
0Vext Signal reference for Profibus H1
+5VDCext +5VDCext/50mA supply for Profibus H2
B-B` Receive/Transmit-Data-P H3
A-A` Receive/Transmit-Data-N H4
RTS For connecting repeater H5
0Vext As pin 1 H6

Termination Tightening Torque
Product Terminations Maximum Tightening Torque
ALL A1 - A9 M2.5 5-7lb.in. 0.56-0.79Nm
B1 - B9 M2.5 5-7lb.in. 0.56-0.79Nm
C1 - C9 M2.5 5-7lb.in. 0.56-0.79Nm
35 - 720 Amps D1 - D8 M3 4lb.in. 0.45Nm
35 - 180 Amps A+, A-, L1, L2, L3 M8 8.1lb.ft. 11.0Nm
Ground M6 5.0lb.ft. 6.8Nm
270 Amps A+, A-, L1, L2, L3 M8 12.2lb.ft. 16.5Nm
360 - 450 Amps A+, A-, M10 24.2lb.ft. 32.8Nm
L1, L2, L3 M12 42.2lb.ft. 57.2Nm
720 Amps A+, A-, M10 24.2lb.ft. 32.8Nm
L1, L2, L3 M14 67.1lb.ft. 91.0Nm
Ground M8 12.2lb.ft 16.5Nm
Mechanical Details
Mounting Orientation Vertical. Refer to Chapter 3: “Mechanical installation” for dimensions and air clearances.
590/591
Up to 70A Up to 150A Up to 180A 270A 450A 720A
Nominal Blower - 100 300 350 490 1000 (at 80
Throughput (m³/hour) millibar for
rated output)
Weight (kg (lbs)) 10-14 (22-30) 15 (33.2) 17 (37.5) 20 (44) 30 (66) 65 (143)
Power Terminations Bus bars with M8 screws and captive nuts AC terminals:: AC bus bars AC bus bars
bus bars with with M12 with M14
M8 screws and screws and screws and
captive nuts captive nuts captive nuts
DC terminals::
M8 bolts with
nuts and
washers
Control Terminations Plug-on connectors with retaining catches
598/599 module exceeding 720A
Weight (kg (lbs)) 10-14 (22-30)
Power Terminations Bus bars with M8 screws and captive nuts
Control Terminations Control Board: Plug on connectors with retaining catches
Current Feedback/Coding Low Volts: Screw in with wire protectors
Coding High Volts/Armature Feedback: M5 studs with nuts and washers

Cooling
1
Derate linearly at 1% per degree centigrade for temperature exceeding the maximum rating
ambient (55°C).
If the enclosure is totally enclosed, the exposed metal surface dissipates approximately 50W/m²
for a 10°C temperature rise of internal air above ambient.
Model Output Maximum Rating Cooling Method Number Fan Current Rating Fan Current Rating
Current Ambient 1 of Fans 110/120V ac 220/240V ac
(armature) (°C)
(A)
590/1 35 45 Natural - - -
590/1 70 45 Natural - - -
590/1 110 35 Integral Fan 2 100mA -
590/1 150 35 Integral Fan 2 100mA -
590/1 180 35 Integral Fan 1 0.36A 0.21A
590/1 270 35 Integral Fan 1 0.36A 0.21A
590/1 360 35 Integral Fan 1 1.2A 0.55A
590/1 450 35 Separate Fan 1 1.2A 0.62A
590/1 720 * 35 Separate Fan 1 1.2A 0.62A
* 720A (800A) also has two integral fans rated 110/120V ac, 230mA
598/9 950 35 Separate Fan 2 0.85A 0.41A
598/9 1100 35 Separate Fan 2 0.85A 0.41A
598/9 1388 35 Separate Fan 2 0.85A 0.41A
598/9 1600 35 Separate Fan 2 0.85A 0.41A
598/9 1800 35 Separate Fan 2 1.67A 0.87A
598/9 2300 35 Separate Fan 2 1.67A 0.87A
598/9 2800 35 Separate Fan 2 1.67A 0.87A
The separate fans supplied with the external stack assemblies (598/9) are provided by the external stack supplier, hence the
currents quoted are for guidance only. Check the actual current by referring to the fan supplied.

Certification for the Converter 12-1
2
1 CERTIFICATION FOR THE CONVERTER
Caution
The integration of this product into other apparatus or systems is not the responsibility of
Parker SSD Drives Ltd, with respect to applicability, effectivity, or safety of operation of
the other apparatus or systems.
Requirements for EMC Compliance

All Variable Speed Drives (VSDs) potentially produce electrical emissions which are radiated
into the environment and conducted back into the ac supply. VSDs are inherently immune to
any additional external electrical noise. The following information is provided to maximise the
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) of VSDs and systems in their intended operating
environment, by minimising their emissions and maximising their immunity.
Minimising Radiated Emissions

EN55011/EN55022 radiated emission measurements are made between 30MHz and 1GHz in
the far field at a distance of 10 to 30 metres. Limits lower than 30MHz or in close proximity are
not specified. Emissions from individual components tend to be additive.
• Use a screened/armoured cable between VSD/cubicle and motor containing the motor
protective earth (PE) connection. It should have a 360° screen termination. Earth screen at
both ends connecting to the motor frame and cubicle. Maintain the screen integrity using
360° terminations.
Note: Some hazardous area installations may preclude direct earthing at both ends of the
screen, in this case earth one end via a 1μF 50Vac capacitor, and the other as normal.
• Keep unshielded cable as short as possible inside the cubicle.
• Always maintain the integrity of the shield.
• If the cable is interrupted to insert contactors etc., re-connect the screen using the shortest
possible route.
• Keep the length of screen stripped-back as short as possible when making screen
connections.
• Ideally use 360° screen terminations using cable glands or `U’ clips on power screen rails.
If a shielded cable is not available, lay unshielded motor cables in a metal conduit which will act
as a shield. The conduit must be continuous with a direct electrical contact to the VSD and
motor housing. If links are necessary, use braid with a minimum cross sectional area of 10mm2.
Note: Some motor gland boxes and conduit glands are made of plastic, if this is the case, then
braid must be connected between the screen and the chassis. In addition at the motor
end, ensure that the screen is electrically connected to the motor frame since some
terminal boxes are insulated from the frame by gasket/paint.
Earthing Requirements
IMPORTANT: Protective earthing always takes precedence over EMC earthing.
Protective Earth (PE) Connections

Note: In accordance with installations to EN60204, only one protective earth conductor is
permitted at each protective earth terminal contacting point.
Local wiring regulations may require the protective earth connection of the motor to be
connected locally, i.e. not as specified in these instructions. This will not cause shielding
problems because of the relatively high RF impedance of the local earth connection.

12-2 Certification for the Converter
EMC Earth Connections
For compliance with EMC requirements, we recommend that the “0V/signal ground” is
separately earthed. When a number of units are used in a system, these terminals should be
connected together at a single, local earthing point.
Control and signal cables for the encoder, all analogue inputs, and communications require
screening with the screen connected only at the VSD end. However, if high frequency noise is
still a problem, earth screen at the non VSD end via a 0.1μF capacitor.
Note: Connect the screen (at the VSD end) to the VSD protective point, and not to the control
board terminals.
Cabling Requirements
Note: Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” for additional Cabling Requirements.
Planning Cable Runs

• Use the shortest possible motor cable lengths.
• Use a single length of cable to a star junction point to feed multiple motors.
• Keep electrically noisy and sensitive cables apart.
• Keep electrically noisy and sensitive parallel cable runs to a minimum. Separate parallel
cable runs by at least 0.25 metres. For runs longer than 10 metres, separation should be
increased proportionally. For example if the parallel runs were 50m, then the separation
would be (50/10) x 0.25m = 1.25m.
• Sensitive cables should cross noisy cables at 90°.
• Never run sensitive cables close or parallel to the motor, dc link and braking chopper circuit
for any distance.
• Never run supply, dc link or motor cables in the same bundle as the signal/control and
feedback cables, even if they are screened.
• Ensure EMC filter input and output cables are separately routed and do not couple across
the filter.
Increasing Motor Cable Length

Because cable capacitance and hence conducted emissions increase with motor cable length,
conformance to EMC limits is only guaranteed with the specified ac supply filter option using a
maximum cable length as specified in Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications”.
This maximum cable length can be improved using the specified external input or output filters.
Refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications” - External Filters.
Screened/armoured cable has significant capacitance between the conductors and screen which
increases linearly with cable length (typically 200pF/m but varies with cable type and current
rating).
Long cable lengths may have the following undesirable effects:
• Producing increased conducted emissions which degrade the performance of the EMC filter
due to saturation.
• Causing RCDs (Residual Current Devices) to trip due to increased high frequency earth
current.
• Producing increased heating inside the EMC ac supply filter from the increased conducted
emissions.
These effects can be overcome by adding chokes or output filters at the output of the VSD.

EMC Installation Options
The unit, when installed for Class B operation, will be compliant with EN55011 (1991)/
EN55022 (1994) for radiated emissions, as described below.
Screening & Earthing (cubicle mounted, Class B)

Note: The installation requirements of local safety standards must be achieved regarding the
safety of electrical equipment for machines.
The unit is installed for Class B operation when mounted inside a cubicle having 10dB
attenuation between 30 and 100MHz (typically the attenuation provided by a metal cabinet with
no aperture of dimension greater than 0.15m), using the recommended ac supply filter and
having met all cabling requirements.
Note: Radiated magnetic and electric fields inside the cubicle will be high and any components
fitted inside must be sufficiently immune.
The VSD, external filter and associated equipment are mounted on to a conducting, metal
mounting panel. Do not use cubicle constructions that use insulating mounting panels or
undefined mounting structures. Cables between the VSD and motor must be screened or
armoured and terminated at the VSD or locally on the back panel.
Single VSD - Single Motor

Apply a single point series earthing strategy for a single VSD mounted in a cubicle as shown.
The protective earth connection (PE) to the motor must be run inside the screened cable between
the motor and VSD and be connected to a separate star point earth terminal near the VSD.
Cubicle
Back Panel
590
External
Filter
U-clip used to
Choke terminate screen
PE connection to
the back panel
* Motor
Star Point Earth Metal Work Earth
AC Supply * As short as possible

Armoured/screened cable
(0.3 metres maximum)
Use an additional PE connector where PE A second PE connection is required to the

is <10mm 2 cross-section filter on the 720/800A chassis units
Figure 0-1 EMC and Safety Earthing Cabling
Single VSD - Multiple Motors

Note: Refer to Chapter 13: “Application Notes” - Using Multiple Motors on a Single Drive.
If connecting multiple motors to a single VSD, use a star junction point for motor cable
connections. Use a metal box with entry and exit cable glands to maintain shield integrity.
Refer to Chapter 13: “Using Multiple Motors on a Single Converter”.

Star Point Earthing
A star-point earthing policy separates `noisy’ and `clean’ earths. Four separate earth busbars
(three are insulated from the mounting panel) connect to a single earth point (star point) near the
incoming safety earth from the main supply. Flexible, large cross-section cable is used to ensure
a low HF impedance. Busbars are arranged so that connection to the single earth point is as
short as possible.
to motor to motor to motor U-clip used to terminate screen

connection to the back panel
screened screened
Back Panel
VSD VSD VSD f PLC

f f f
PE PE PE Metal Work Earth
PE 0A 0D PE 0A 0D PE 0A 0D PE 0D
Doors Back Metal

Panel Work
24V Control
Analogue Clean Earth Digital Clean Earth
unscreened signals
Dirty Earth
Signal/Control Screen
STAR POINT
0A = 0 Volts Analogue 110V
0D = 0 Volts Digital Control
PE = Protective Earth all screened signals not
f = External Filter going directly to a VSD
VSD = Variable Speed Drive
PLC = Programmable Logic Controller
Incoming Safety Earth (PE)
Figure 0-2 Star Point Earthing
1 Clean Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)

Used as a reference point for all signal and control cabling. This may be further subdivided into
an analogue and a digital reference busbar, each separately connected to the star earthing point.
The digital reference is also used for any 24V control.
2 Dirty Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)

Used for all power earths, i.e. protective earth connection. It is also used as a reference for any
110 or 220V control used, and for the control transformer screen.
3 Metal Work Earth Busbar

The back panel is used as this earth busbar, and should provide earthing points for all parts of
the cubicle including panels and doors. This busbar is also used for power screened cables
which terminate near to (10cm) the VSD - such as motor cables, braking choppers and their
resistors, or between VSDs. Use U-clips to clamp the screened cables to the back panel to
ensure optimum HF connection.
4 Signal/Control Screen Earth Busbar (insulated from the mounting panel)

Used for signal/control screened cables which do not go directly to the VSD. Place this busbar
as close as possible to the point of cable entry. `U’ clamp the screened cables to the busbars to
ensure an optimum HF connection.

Sensitive Equipment
The proximity of the source and victim circuit has a large effect on radiated coupling. The
electromagnetic fields produced by VSDs falls off rapidly with distance from the
cabling/cubicle. Remember that the radiated fields from EMC compliant drive systems are
measured at least 10m from the equipment, over the band 30-1000MHz. Any equipment placed
closer than this will see larger magnitude fields, especially when very close to the Converter.
Do not place magnetic/electric field sensitive equipment within 0.25 metres of the following
parts of the VSD system:
• Variable Speed Drive (VSD)
• EMC output filters
• Input or output chokes/transformers
• The cable between VSD and motor (even when screened/armoured)
• Connections to external braking chopper and resistor (even when screened/armoured)
• AC/DC brushed motors (due to commutation)
• DC link connections (even when screened/armoured)
• Relays and contactors (even when suppressed)
From experience, the following equipment is particularly sensitive and requires careful
installation.
• Any transducers which produce low level analogue outputs (<1V) , e.g. load cells, strain
gauges, thermocouples, piezoelectric transducers, anemometers, LVDTs
• Wide band width control inputs (>100Hz)
• AM radios (long and medium wave only)
• Video cameras and closed circuit TV
• Office personal computers
• Capacitive devices such as proximity sensors and level transducers
• Mains borne communication systems
• Equipment not suitable for operation in the intended EMC environment, i.e. with
insufficient immunity to new EMC standards

Requirements for UL Compliance

Motor Overload Protection
Note: An external motor overload protective device must be provided by the installer.
Motor overload protection is provided in the controller by means of the thermal device in the
motor winding. This protection cannot be evaluated by UL, hence it is the responsibility of the
installer and/or the local inspector to determine whether the overload protection is in compliance
with the National Electrical Code or Local Code requirements.
Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection Requirements

UL Recognized Component (JFHR2) semiconductor fuses with current ratings and maximum
I2t ratings as specified below must be installed upstream of the controller. Refer to the table
below for the recommended fuse manufacturer and part number.
Controller Rating Semiconductor Fuses

Ratings Part No. Littelfuse
2 2
(HP) (A) (V) (A) I t (A s) (or equivalent*)
20 35 500Vac 40 1,000 L50S 40
40 70 500Vac 80 5,000 L50S 80
60 110 500Vac 125 10,000 L50S 125
80 150 500Vac 175 20,000 L50S 175
100 180 500Vac 175 20,000 L50S 175
150 270 500Vac 300 60,000 L50S 300
200 360 500Vac 400 110,000 L50S 400
250 450 500Vac 500 175,000 L50S 500
400 720 500Vac 800 450,000 L50S 800
* Other UL Recognized Component (JFHR2) semiconductor fuses may be installed
upstream of the controller provided that the voltage, ampere and I2t ratings shown
above are not exceeded.
Note: Semiconductor fuses are acceptable as branch circuit short-circuit protection for
the solid-state motor controllers only.
Table 0-1 Branch Circuit/Short Circuit Protection Requirements
Short Circuit Ratings

These products are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than (the value
shown in Table 0-2) RMS Symmetrical Amperes, 500V maximum.
Output Ratings Short Circuit Rating

A kW Hp RMS Symmetrical Amperes
35 15 20 5,000
70 30 40 5,000
110 45 60 10,000
150 60 80 10,000
180 75 100 10,000
270 110 150 10,000
360 150 200 18,000
450 190 250 18,000
720 300 400 30,000
Table 0-2 Short Circuit Ratings

Field Wiring Temperature Rating
Use 75°C copper conductors only.
Operating Ambient Temperature

For the operating ambient temperature range, refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications”.
Field Wiring Terminal Markings

For the correct field wiring connections that are to be made to each terminal, refer to Chapter 3:
“Power Wiring Connections” and “Control Wiring Connections”.
Terminal Tightening Torque

Power and Control Field Wiring Terminals
For the correct tightening torque value, refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications”.
Field Grounding Terminals

The field grounding terminal(s) is identified with the International Grounding Symbol
(IEC) Publication 417, Symbol 5019.
Field Terminal Kits

UL compliant Compression Lug Kits are available for the connection of power wiring for the
following Converter ratings. These lugs must be applied with the correct tooling as described in
the Installation Instructions provided with each Lug Kit.
Kit Part Number Controller Number of Purpose Wire Size

Rating (A) Lugs
LA386000U035 35 5 AC/DC 8 AWG (8.4 mm2)
LA386000U070 70 5 AC/DC 4 AWG (21.2 mm2)
LA386000U110 110 3 AC 2 AWG (33.6 mm2)
2 DC 1/0 AWG (53.5 mm2)
LA386000U150 150 3 AC 1/0 AWG (53.5 mm2)
2 DC 3/0 AWG (85 mm2)
LA386000U180 180 3 AC 3/0 AWG (85 mm2)
2 DC 4/0 AWG (107.5 mm2)
LA386000U240 240 10 * AC/DC 1/0 AWG (53.5 mm2)
LA386000U270 270 6* AC 1/0 AWG (53.5 mm2)
4* DC 2/0 AWG (67.5 mm2)
LA386000U320 320 10* AC/DC 3/0 AWG (85mm2)
LA386000U450 450 6* AC 250kcmil (127mm2)
4* DC 300 kcmil (152mm2)
LA386000U720 720 10* AC/DC 600kcmil (304mm2)
* 2 cables and lugs are required per terminal.
Fuse Replacement Information

For fuse replacement information, refer to Chapter 11: “Technical Specifications”.

European Directives and the CE Mark

The following information is supplied to provide a basic understanding of the EMC and low
voltage directives CE marking requirements. The following literature is recommended for
further information:
• Recommendations for Application of Power Drive Systems (PDS), European Council
Directives - CE Marking and Technical Standardisation - (CEMEP)
Available from your local trade association or Parker SSD Drives office
• EMC Installation Guidelines for Modules and Systems - (SSD Drives)
Available from your local Parker SSD Drives office, part number HA388879
• Short Form Overview of European Directives for Variable Speed Drives and Applications -
(SSD Drives)
Available from your local Parker SSD Drives office, part number HA389770
The European machines and drives manufacturers via their national trade associations have
formed the European Committee of Manufacturers of Electrical Machines and Power
Electronics (CEMEP). Parker SSD Drives and other major European drives manufacturers are
working to the CEMEP recommendations on CE marking. The CE mark shows that a product
complies with the relevant EU directives, in our case the Low Voltage Directive and, in some
instances, the EMC Directive.
CE Marking for Low Voltage Directive

When installed in accordance with this manual, the 590 Series Converter is CE marked by
Parker SSD Drives Ltd in accordance with the low voltage directive (S.I. No. 3260 implements
this LVD directive into UK law). An EC Declaration of Conformity (low voltage directive) is
included at the end of this chapter.
CE Marking for EMC - Who is Responsible?

Note: The specified EMC emission and immunity performance of this unit can only be achieved
when the unit is installed to the EMC Installation Instructions given in this manual.
According to S.I. No. 2373 which implements the EMC directive into UK law, the requirement
for CE marking this unit falls into two categories:
1. Where the supplied unit has an intrinsic/direct function to the end user, then the unit is
classed as relevant apparatus.
2. Where the supplied unit is incorporated into a higher system/apparatus or machine which
includes (at least) the motor, cable and a driven load but is unable to function without this
unit, then the unit is classed as a component.
Q Relevant Apparatus - Parker SSD Drives Responsibility

Occasionally, say in a case where an existing fixed speed motor - such as a fan or pump - is
converted to variable speed with an add-on drive module (relevant apparatus), it becomes the
responsibility of Parker SSD Drives to apply the CE mark and issue an EC Declaration of
Conformity for the EMC Directive. This declaration and the CE mark is included at the end of
this chapter.
Q Component - Customer Responsibility

The majority of Parker SSD Drives’ products are classed as components and therefore we
cannot apply the CE mark or produce an EC Declaration of Conformity in respect of EMC. It is
therefore the manufacturer/supplier/installer of the higher system/apparatus or machine who
must conform to the EMC directive and CE mark.

Legal Requirements for CE Marking
IMPORTANT: Before installation, clearly understand who is responsible for conformance with the EMC
directive. Misappropriation of the CE mark is a criminal offence.
It is important that you have now defined who is responsible for conforming to the EMC
directive, either:
Q Parker SSD Drives Responsibility

You intend to use the unit as relevant apparatus.
When the specified EMC filter is correctly fitted to the unit following EMC installation
instructions, it complies with the relevant standards indicated in the following tables. The fitting
of the filter is mandatory for the CE marking of this unit to apply.
The relevant declarations are to be found at the end of this chapter. The CE mark is displayed on
the EC Declaration of Conformity (EMC Directive) provided at the end of this chapter.
Q Customer Responsibility
You intend to use the unit as a component, therefore you have a choice:
1. To fit the specified filter following EMC installation instructions, which may help you gain
EMC compliance for the final machine/system.
2. Not to fit the specified filter, but use a combination of global or local filtering and screening
methods, natural migration through distance, or the use of distributed parasitic elements of
the existing installation.
Note: When two or more EMC compliant components are combined to form the final
machine/system, the resulting machine/system may no longer be compliant, (emissions
tend to be additive, immunity is determined by the least immune component). Understand
the EMC environment and applicable standards to keep additional compliance costs to a
minimum.
Applying for CE Marking for EMC

We have supplied a Manufacturer’s EMC Declaration at the end of this chapter that you can use
as a basis for your own justification of overall compliance with the EMC directive. There are
three methods of demonstrating conformity:
1. Self-certification to a relevant standard
2. Third party testing to a relevant standard
3. Writing a technical construction file stating the technical rationale as to why your final
machine/system is compliant. An EMC “competent body” must then assess this and issue a
technical report or certificate to demonstrate compliance.
Refer to Article 10(2) of Directive 89/336/EEC.
With EMC compliance, an EC Declaration of Conformity and the CE mark will be issued for
your final machine/system.
IMPORTANT: Professional end users with EMC expertise who are using drive modules and cubicle
systems defined as components who supply, place on the market or install the relevant
apparatus must take responsibility for demonstrating EMC conformance and applying
the CE mark and issuing an EC Declaration of Conformity.

Which Standards Apply?
Basic and Generic Standards
The standards that may apply to this unit come under two broad categories:
1. Emission - these standards limit the interference caused by operating (this) drive module.
2. Immunity - these standards limit the effect of interference (on this unit) from other electrical
and electronic apparatus.
The following table indicates the standards that the unit may comply with, dependent upon how
it is installed and used.
Unit used as Unit used as a

Relevant Apparatus Component
Assuming installation to EMC instructions in this manual filter no filter filter no filter
“Filter” refers to a specified external filter. (EMC (EMC
compliance) compliance
may be
applied for)
enclosure enclosure enclosure enclosure
Installation Basic and Generic Standards
EN55022 Class B (1994)
Radiated RF Emission
or
EN50081-1 (1992)
EN55022 Class B (1994)
Residential Conducted RF
or
Emission
EN50081-1 (1992)
Immunity EN50082-1 (1992)

EN55022 Class B (1994)

or
EN50081-1 (1992)
Commercial & EN55022 Class B (1994)
Light Industry Conducted RF or
Emission
EN50081-1 (1992)
Immunity EN50082-1 (1992)

EN55011 Class A (1991)

or
EN50081-2 (1994)
EN55011 Class A (1991)
Industrial Conducted RF
Emission
or
EN50081-2 (1994)
Immunity prEN50082-2 (1992)

Table 12-1 Applicable Basic and Generic Standards

STAR T
IS SSD MODULE NO
RELEVANT APPARATUS
WIT H INT RINSIC FUNCTION
TO END USER (CEMEP
VALIDIT Y FIELD 1)
CEMEP VALIDIT Y FIELDS
2, 3 AND 4
YES
OPTIONAL SSD FILTERS

AVAILABLE T O ASSIST USERS
IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE
EMC DIRECT IVE
WILL T HE SSD PRODUCT NO
BE INST ALLED
ACCORDING T O T HE
INST ALLAT ION EMC CHARACT ERIST ICS
GUIDELINES STAT ED IN MANUAL
YES
FIT THE SPECIFIED EMC INSTALLAT ION GUIDELINES

SSD EMC FILT ER
STAT ED IN MANUAL
T HE SSD EC DECLARAT ION OF

T HE ED MANUFACTURERS DECLARAT ION
CONFORMIT Y FOR EMC IS VALID FOR EMC IS VALID FOR T HE SPECIFIED
FOR T HE SPECIFIED ED MODULE MODULE WHEN INSTALLED CORRECTLY
A GLOBAL EMC SOLUTION

EMC 'CE' MARK CAN BE APPLIED TO SSD
MAY BE ADVANTAGEOUS
MODULE TO GENERIC EMC STANDARDS:
NO EMC 'CE' MARK APPLIED TO SSD MODULE.

EN61800-3 (1997)
SSD = SSD DRIVES LIMIT ED

RELEVANT APPARATUS
CEMEP : Refer to Chapter 12, "European Directives and the CE Mark"
MANUFACT URER/SUPPLIER/INST ALLERS
RESPONSIBILITY T O CONFORM WIT H EMC DIRECTIVE.
SSD EMC CHARACTERIST ICS AND MANUFACT URERS
DECLARATION MAY BE USED AS A BASIS
IN T HE OVERALL PRODUCT JUST IFICAT ION
Figure 12-3 Parker SSD Drives EMC `CE' Mark Validity Chart

Certificates
590A/D/L (35 - 800 Amps)
EC DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
Date CE marked first applied: 09/01/98 Issue C 07/02/07
EMC Directive Low Voltage Directive

Issued for In accordance with the EEC Directive In accordance with the EEC Directive The drive is CE
compliance 2004/108/EC 2006/95/EC. marked in
with the EMC We Parker SSD Drives, address as below, We Parker SSD Drives, address as below, accordance with
Directive when declare under our sole responsibility that the declare under our sole responsibility that the the low voltage
above Electronic Products when installed and
the unit is used above Electronic Products when installed and operated with reference to the instructions in
directive for
as relevant operated with reference to the instructions in electrical
the Product Manual (provided with each piece the Product Manual
apparatus. (provided with each piece of equipment), is in equipment and
of equipment) is in accordance with the
relevant clauses from the following standard:- accordance with the following standard :- appliances in the
voltage range
* BSEN61800-3 (2004) EN50178 (1998) when installed
correctly.
MANUFACTURERS DECLARATIONS
EMC Declaration Machinery Directive
This is We Parker SSD Drives, address as below, The above Electronic Products Since the
provided to aid declare under our sole responsibility that the are components to be incorporated into potential hazards
your above Electronic Products when installed and machinery and may not be operated alone. are mainly
justification for operated with reference to the instructions in The complete machinery or installation using electrical rather
the Product Manual (provided with each piece this equipment may only be put into service
EMC when the safety considerations of the Directive
than mechanical,
compliance of equipment) is in accordance with the the drive does not
relevant clauses from the following standard:- 89/392/EEC are fully adhered to.
when the unit Particular reference should be made to fall under the
is used as a EN60204-1 (Safety of Machinery - Electrical machinery
* BSEN61800-3 (1997)
component. Equipment of Machines). directive.
All instructions, warnings and safety However, we do
information of the Product Manual must be supply a
adhered to. manufacturer's
declaration for
when the drive is
used(as a
component) in
machinery.
Dr Martin Payn (Conformance Officer)
For information only.

# Compliant with these immunity standards without specified EMC filters.
PARKER SSD DRIVES

NEW COURTWICK LANE, LITTLEHAMPTON, WEST SUSSEX BN17 7RZ
TELEPHONE: +44(0)1903 737000 FAX: +44(0)1903 737100
Registered Number: 4806503 England. Registered Office: 55 Maylands Avenue, Hemel Hempstead, Herts HP2 4SJ

Standard and Optional Equipment 13-1
3
1 STANDARD AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Standard Equipment
Power Board Circuit Descriptions
590/591 (AH385851U002, U003, U004, U005)
All chassis sizes 35A to 270A ( 2 Quad and 4 Quad - Low and High Volt)
Power supplies for the controller are generated from the single phase auxiliary supply via a
switched mode power supply. The incoming supply is directly rectified to provide a high
voltage dc power rail. A high voltage transistor switches this rail on to the primary of a high
frequency transformer, the output of which is rectified and smoothed to provide the dc power
supply rails. The +5V dc rail is monitored via a reference element and a control signal returned
via an opto-isolator to the control element of the high voltage switching transistor. The ±15V dc
rails are generated via separate secondary windings which are rectified, smoothed and stabilised
by linear regulators. The SMPS operates over an input voltage range of 110V to 240V ac ±10%,
50/60Hz. The auxiliary supply fuse FS1 provides protection of the high voltage elements.
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 F22 F27
F28
F26
F8
F21 FS1
F19 F18
F25
F16 (F-) (F+)
G K G K
F23 F24
PTR PTY
+24V 0V
(F13) RFI
GND
(F17)
(F14)
PLJ
TRANSFORMER
PLK
PLL
PLM
(TH1) (TH4) (TH3) (TH6) (TH5) (TH2)
PLN
FS2 FS3 FS4
F15 F9
EX A+
EX A-
A+ A-
A+ A- L1 L2 L3
Figure 0-1 591 Power Board 2 Quad (AH385851U003, U004)

motor voltage feedback
POWER BOARD
A+ TH1 TH3 TH5
L1
13-2
L2
L3 TH4 TH6 TH2
A-
H/S
thermostat
A+ L1 L2 L3 A-
1 2 3 4 5 6 PLN
FS2 FS3 FS4 A+ A- EXA+ EXA-
1 2
ACCT PRESENT
-100 VA FEEDBACK +
current feedback
(F15) (F8) -
FL1 FL2
3 PHASE PRESENT
HIGH VOLTAGE CODING
F-
INTERFACE PHASE ROTATION -
BROWN GREY
D3
(F6)
FL1 (F15) RED
FL2 (F9) YELLOW

VIOLET
SUPPRESSION
+ ORANGE
CIRCUITS D4
(F7)
F+
Standard and Optional Equipment
FE1 (F19) G1 G2
ORANGE
D1
FE2 (F18) RED YELLOW ORANGE
D2
1 2
ACCT FIELD PLL
GR KR GY KY
D5 D5
CONTACTOR RETURN
F26 RLY
RLY
D6 CONTACTOR RETURN
F26
F24 FAN
D6
F21 F25 F24 FAN
RELAY NEUTRAL +24 F21 F25
RELAY NEUTRAL +24
D7 +15
COIL D7 +15
F27 F22 FAN POWER +5 COIL NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL COMMON FAN POWER +5
COIL COMMON
LIVE F23 SUPPLY 0 F22 F23 SUPPLY 0
-15
Figure 0-2 2 Quad Power Circuit - 35, 70, 110, 150, 180 & 270A using AH385851U003, U004
D8 COIL -15
FS1 F28 FAN -24 LIVE
LIVE D8 -24
FS1 F28 F27 FAN
LIVE
STANDARD WIRING FOR SWITCHED SUPPLY TO CONTACTOR COIL ALTERNATIVE WIRING FOR VOLT-FREE CONTACTOR WIRING

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 F22 F27
F28
F26
F8
F21 FS1
F19 F18
F25
F16 (F-) (F+)
G K G K
F23 F24
PTR PTY
+24V 0V
(F13) RFI
GND
(F17)
(F14)
PLJ
TRANSFORMER
PLK
(TH1) (TH10) (TH3) (TH12) (TH5) (TH8)

PLL
PLM
(TH7) (TH4) (TH9) (TH6) (TH11) (TH2)
PLN
FS2 FS3 FS4
F15 F9
EX A+
EX A-
A+ A-
A+ A- L1 L2 L3
Figure 0-3 590 Power Board 4 Quad (AH385851U002, U005)

POWER BOARD motor voltage feedback
A+ TH1 TH10 TH3 TH12 TH5 TH8

L1
13-4
L2
L3 TH4 TH7 TH6 TH9 TH2 TH11
A-
H/S
thermostat
A+ L1 L2 L3 A-
1 2 3 4 5 6 PLN
FS2 FS3 FS4 A+ A- EXA+ EXA- 1 2
ACCT PRESENT
-100 VA FEEDBACK +
current feedback
(F15) (F8) -
FL1 FL2
3 PHASE PRESENT
HIGH VOLTAGE CODING
F-
INTERFACE PHASE ROTATION - GREY
BROWN D3
(F6)
FL1 (F15) RED
FL2 (F9) VIOLET YELLOW
SUPPRESSION
+ ORANGE
CIRCUITS D4
(F7)
F+
FE1 (F19) G1 G2
ORANGE
D1
FE2 (F18) RED YELLOW ORANGE
D2
1 2
ACCT FIELD PLL
GR KR GY KY
D5 D5
CONTACTOR RETURN
F26 RLY RLY
D6 CONTACTOR RETURN
F26
D6
F21 F25 F24 FAN F24 FAN
RELAY NEUTRAL +24 F21 F25
RELAY NEUTRAL +24
D7 +15 +15
COIL F27 F22 FAN
D7
POWER +5 COIL NEUTRAL FAN
NEUTRAL COIL COMMON POWER +5
SUPPLY COMMON
LIVE F23 0 F22 F23 SUPPLY 0
Figure 0-4 4 Quad Power Circuit - 35, 70, 110, 150, 180 & 270A using AH385851U002, U005
D8 -15 COIL -15
FS1 F28 FAN -24 LIVE
LIVE D8 -24
FS1 F28 F27 FAN
LIVE
STANDARD WIRING FOR SWITCHED SUPPLY TO CONTACTOR COIL ALTERNATIVE WIRING FOR VOLT-FREE CONTACTOR WIRING

590/591 (AH385621U001)
All chassis sizes 271A to 720A (590 - 4 Quad, 591 - 2 Quad)
Power supply specification is as AH385851 described above, however, the board below is
operated with Trigger Boards AH055036U002 and U003 and Suppression Board AI386001(see
circuit diagrams).
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 F22 F27
F28
F8 F8A F26
F21 FS1
F16A
F25
F16
G (F11) K (F20) G (F10) K (F12)
F23 F24
PTR PTY
+24V 0V
(F13) RFI
GND
(F17)
(F14)
PLJ
TRANSFORMER
PLL PLK PLP PLN
Figure 0-5 590/591 Power Board, 4 Quad and 2 Quad (AH385621U001)

A+ G1 K1
FS2
TH1 TH3 TH5
13-6
L1
AH 055036 U003
VDR1
FS3 TRIGGER BOARD
SHOWING GATE/CATHODE
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
L2
VDR2 VDR3
k g
FS4
TH1 TH4 TH3 TH6 TH5 TH2
L3
PULSE WIRE COLOURS
WIRING INFO GATE CATHODE
TH4 TH6 TH2 STANDARD DRIVE YELLOW RED
A- 8 PL K L1 L2 L3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ACCT. PRESENT
0VL
ACCT.
A+
A-
EXT.A- A- L3 L2 L1 A+ EXT.A+
D1 D4
RD OR
F+
EXT. FIELD TH1 TH4 TH3 TH6 TH5 TH2
AC SUPPLY
YL BK
F-
D2 D3
FIELD
F16A CURRENT
CT
F8A F12 11 10
F16 INTERMEDIATE
CONNECTION FOR
F8 INT FIELD WIRING K G1 G2
FIELD REGULATOR
FIRING CIRCUITS
PLP
Figure 0-6 2 Quad Power Circuit - 271-450A Models using AH385621U001

SUPPRESSION
BOARD POWER
PLR
AH 386001 BOARD
AH 385621

A+ G1 K1
FS2
TH1 TH3 TH5
L1
AH 055036 U003
VDR1
FS3 TRIGGER BOARD
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
L2
VDR2 VDR3
k g
FS4

L3
TH4 TH6 TH2
A- 8 PL K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
UPPER
HEAT
ACCT. PRESENT SINK
0VL Y A-
TH4 Y & R TH6 Y & R TH2 Y & R R
ACCT.
C A
EXT.A- A- L3 L2 L1 A+ EXT.A+
D1 D4
RD OR
F+
EXT. FIELD TH4 TH6 TH2
AC SUPPLY
YL BK
F-
D2 D3
FIELD
F16A CURRENT TH1 TH3 TH5
CT
F8A F12 11 10
LOWER
F16 HEAT
INTERMEDIATE SINK
CONNECTION FOR A
F8 K G1 G2 TH1 Y & R TH3 Y & R TH5 Y & R A+
INT. FIELD WIRING
C
FIELD REGULATOR
FIRING CIRCUITS Y
R
PLP

SUPPRESSION
BOARD PLR POWER
AH 386001 BOARD
AH 385621
13-7
A+ G1 K1
FS2 TH1 TH10 TH3 TH12 TH5 TH8
g k
L1
13-8
VDR1 AH 055036 U002

FS3 TRIGGER BOARD
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
L2
VDR2 VDR3
k g
FS4
L3
PULSE WIRE COLOURS
WIRING INFO GATE CATHODE
TH4 TH7 TH6 TH9 TH2 TH11 STANDARD DRIVE YELLOW RED
A- 8 PL K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 L1 L2 L3
ACCT. PRESENT
0VL
ACCT.
A+
EXT.A- A- L3 L2 L1 A+ EXT.A+ A+
D1 D4
RD OR
F+
EXT. FIELD
AC SUPPLY TH1 TH10 TH3 TH12 TH5 TH8

YL BK
F-
D2 D3 L1 L2 L3
FIELD
F16A CURRENT
CT
F8A F12 11 10
F16 INTERMEDIATE A-
CONNECTION FOR
F8 INT FIELD WIRING K G1 G2
FIELD REGULATOR
FIRING CIRCUITS A-
PLP TH7 TH4 TH9 TH6 TH11 TH2

SUPPRESSION
BOARD PLR POWER
AH386001 BOARD
AH 385621

A+ G1 K1
FS2
TH1 TH10 TH3 TH12 TH5 TH8 TH1 TH10 TH3 TH12 TH5 TH8
g k
L1
VDR1 AH055036 U002
FS3
TRIGGER BOARD
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
L2
VDR2 VDR3
k g
FS4
TH7 TH4 TH11 TH2

TH9 TH6
L3
A- 8 PL K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y UPPER
TH4 Y & R TH6 Y & R TH2 Y & R R
HEAT
ACCT. PRESENT SINK
0VL A-
C A
ACCT.
A C
EXT.A- A- L3 L2 L1 A+ EXT.A+ TH7 O & R TH9 O & R TH11 O & R O

D1 D4 R
RD OR
F+
EXT. FIELD TH7 TH4 TH9 TH6 TH11 TH12
AC SUPPLY
YL BK
F-
D2 D3
FIELD
F16A CURRENT
CT
F8A F12 11 10
R LOWER
TH1 Y & R TH3 Y & R TH5 Y & R Y
F16 HEAT
INTERMEDIATE SINK
CONNECTION FOR A+
F8 K G1 G2 A C
INT FIELD WIRING
FIELD REGULATOR
FIRING CIRCUITS
C A
PLP

TH10 O & R TH12 O & R TH8 O & R R
O
FORWARD STACK GATE LEADS RED & YELLOW

REVERSE STACK GATE LEADS RED & ORANGE
SUPPRESSION
BOARD PLR POWER
AH 386001 BOARD
AH385621
13-9
13-10 Standard and Optional Equipment
598/599 Power Board (AH385128U009)
External stack drives from 720A upwards
The power supplies for the controller are generated from the single phase auxiliary supply via
the control transformer. A bridge rectifier and filter capacitor feed an unregulated 40V dc supply
to a high-efficiency switched mode pre-regulator. This generates 24V dc which is used for
thyristor stack firing, digital I/O and other power functions. The logic supply is stabilised to
+5V using a high-efficiency switched mode regulator. Stabilised ±15V supplies are generated
for the analog hardware. All power supplies are short circuit protected, and the 40V and 5V
supplies are protected against over voltage using a crowbar protection. The control transformer
is provided with two primary taps which allow auxiliary supply voltages of 110V ac and 240V
ac. The auxiliary supply fuse FS3 on the power supply PCB protects the control transformer
primary. This fuse is also cleared should the crowbar operate, which can happen if the wrong
auxiliary supply voltage tap is selected. Fuses FS1 and FS2 protect the cooling fan, and also the
main contactor on 110/120V boards and the pilot relay on 220/240V boards.
This board is suitable for either 110-240V or 220-240V and is altered by a simple transformer
tap change.
Heatsink Cooling Fan Connections

When fitted, these fans are connected on the power board to FAN LIVE (F27), FAN
NEUTRAL (F24) and FAN COMMON (F23) as described below:
• A single fan should be matched to the auxiliary supply and connected to F27 and F24.
• Two fans using a 110/115V auxiliary supply should be connected in parallel to F27 and F24.
• Two fans using a 220/240V auxiliary supply should be connected in series to F27 and F24
using F23 as the centre point.
Contactor Supply
The controller requires an ac or dc D5 D6
F26 power contactor in series with the

D7 D8
F21
F22
F28
F27
main power path to ensure correct power-up sequencing. This contactor

FS1
F25
F23 F24
is directly initiated by the Microcontroller via an isolating relay

which drives the contactor coil with the same voltage as that of the auxiliary supply.
This is achieved by the brown wire connection from COIL LIVE (F28) to RELAY (F25) and
the blue wire connection from COIL NEUTRAL (F21) to CONTACTOR RETURN (F26).
However, if an alternative supply for the contactor coil is required move the brown wire from
F25 to F22 , and move the blue wire from F21 to F25. The external coil supply can now be
switched using a volt-free contact between terminals D5 and D6.
D5 D6 D7 D8 F22 F27
F28
F26
F21 FS1
F25
F23 F24

Optional Equipment
Contact your local Parker SSD Drives office to order optional equipment.
Item Part Number

EMC Installation Guidelines for Modules and Systems HA388879
A Parker SSD Drives application manual detailing EMC requirements
590 Digital Section Control HA388664
A Parker SSD Drives application manual detailing the use of the
block diagram to implement open and closed loop control of driven
web section rolls
590 Digital Closed Loop Centre Winder HA388202
A Parker SSD Drives application manual detailing the use of the
block diagram to implement closed loop centre winders
ConfigEd Lite Order by name
Parker SSD Drives’ Windows-based block programming software
External AC Supply (RFI) Filter Refer to Chapter 11:
For Converters without internal filters, on cable runs in excess of 25 “External AC Supply
metres (RFI) Filters” for Part
Numbers
Microtach Option Board
Two board types for connecting to a plastic or glass fiber Microtach
encoder
AH386025U001
• Glass
• Plastic AH386025U002
Encoder Option Board AH387775U001
A board to interface to a wire-ended encoder (universal)
Tacho Calibration Option Board AH385870U001
A switchable calibration board for interfacing to AC/DC analog
and/or digital tachogenerators
Comms Option Board (P1) Board
Two board types for supporting EI BYSYNCH or PROFIBUS
communication protocols for connection to other equipment.
• EI BYSYNCH (RS422, RS485) AH385826U001
• PROFIBUS AH389918U001
Table 0-1 Optional Equipment
Speed Feedback Option Boards

Each option board below is shown with the correct selection for the MMI Menu Map
SPEED FBK SELECT parameter. 1 SETUP PARAMETERS
The selections are ARM VOLTS FBK, ANALOG TACH, 2 SPEED LOOP
ENCODER and ENCODER/ANALOG.
SPEED FBK SELECT
(ARM VOLTS FBK is default and requires no option board).

Microtach Option Board
There are two kinds of Parker SSD ENCODER
Drives’ Microtach, each requiring a
different board: 5701/5901 MICROTACH Control
OPTION BOARD Board
• 5701 Microtach (plastic fibre)
• 5901 Microtach (glass fibre)
If fitted, refer to the Microtach Technical
Manual for further information.
5701/5901 Microtach
Wire-Ended Encoder Option Board ENCODER
The board accepts connection from a

wire-ended encoder. ENCODER OPTION Control
BOARD Board
If fitted, refer to the Encoder Technical
Wire-ended Encoder
Tacho Calibration Option Board

The board accepts connection from an analog tachogenerator. ANALOG TACH
If fitted, refer to the Tachogenerator Technical Manual for
further information. TACHO CALIBRATION Control
OPTION BOARD Board
Analog Tachogenerator

Combined Tacho and Encoder Feedback
If an analog tachogenerator and digital ENCODER/ANALOG
encoder are to be used, the Encoder Option
Board receives the digital signal, the ENCODER OPTION Control
analog signal is routed to Terminals B2 BOARD Board
(Tacho) and B1 (0V). Please refer to
Parker SSD Drives Sales for the correct
resistor selection for Terminal B2.
If fitted, refer to the relevant Technical
ANALOG
Digital Encoder/Analog Tachogenerat
DIGITAL
Communications Option Boards

Comms Option Board (P1) EI BINARY
Two protocols are supported, each requiring a different board:
EI ASCII
• EI BYSINCH (EI BINARY or EI ASCII)
OPTION
• PROFIBUS (OPTION)
Control
COMMS OPTION
Board
BOARD
System Port Aux Serial Port Main Serial Port

(P3) (P2) (P1)
The board allows the 590 Converter to be controlled as part of a system. The system can also
comprise other Parker SSD Drives products such as the 605 and 584SV Inverters, or any other
equipment using the same protocol.
Remote 5721 Operator Station

This is remotely mounted and intended for use by process line operators to monitor and, if
required, change the value of process variables. It can also be used as a diagnostic tool. It
requires an external 24V power supply and uses ports P1 or P2. Contact Parker SSD Drives for
further information.


Serial Communications 14-1
4
1 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Main Serial Port (P1)
The plug-in COMMS Option Board provides a serial data port, allowing Converters to be linked
to form a network. Using a PLC/SCADA or other intelligent device, this network can be
continuously controlled to provide supervision and monitoring for each Converter in the system.
Refer to the COMMS Option Board Technical Manual for further details.
Aux Serial Port (P2)

This is an un-isolated RS422 using the EI-BISYNCH protocol, it can be used to connect to any
suitable unit point-to-point.
123456
P2 Port Pin Signal

1 RXA
2 0V
3 +24V
4 RXB
5 TXB
6 TXA
Auxiliary Port (P2) Set-up MMI Menu Map

The P2 port requires configuring using the MMI before a unit is
connected. Remember to perform a PARAMETER SAVE on the 1 SERIAL LINKS
Converter.
2 AUX PORT P2
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” - AUX PORT
SRL LINK ENABLE
(P2) for parameter details.
GROUP ID (GID)
5721 Operator Station

UNIT ID (UID)
PROTOCOL
The main purpose for the P2 port is to connect the 5721 Operator BAUD RATE
Station for controlling the 5720 Quadraloc controller. Refer to the
ESP SUP. (ASCII)
5721 Operator Station Technical Manual for further details.
CHANGEBAND (BIN)
ERROR REPORT
PNO. 7

14-2 Serial Communications
System Port (P3)

This port has several uses:
1. ConfigEd Lite: Parameters can be monitored and updated by ConfigEd Lite (or other
suitable PC programming tool)
2. UDP Support: It can be used to upload and download information to a PC
3. 5703 Support: A Parker SSD Drives 5703 Setpoint Repeater Unit can be connected
The port is an un-isolated RS232, 19200 Baud, supporting the standard EI BISYNCH ASCII
communications protocol, contact Parker SSD Drives for further information.
A standard P3 lead is used to connect to the Converter.
1234
P3 Port Pin Lead Signal

1 Black 0V
2 Red 24V
3 Green TX
4 Yellow RX
6-Way Lead to DB9/DB25 Connector

Note: There is 24V present on pin 2 of the P3 port. This may damage your PC or the Converter.
P3 Port Lead Female DB9 Female DB25

Pin Pin Pin
1 Black 5 7
2 Red not connected not connected
3 Green 2 3
4 Yellow 3 2
ConfigEd Lite
This is Parker SSD Drives’ Windows-based block programming software. It has a graphical
user-interface and drawing tools to allow you to create block programming diagrams quickly
and easily. Contact your local Parker SSD Drives sales office.
UDP Support
The P3 port can be used to transfer an ASCII representation of the converter's settings between
the Converter and a host computer.
The transfer uses a simple ASCII file structure and XON / XOFF protocol. This is provided by
most communications packages. Host computers tested include IBM PCs XT/AT, running both
Windows and MSDOS, Psion Organiser 3 and many more.
Transferring data from the Converter to a host computer is defined as “Downloading” ,whereas
transferring data from a host computer to the Converter is defined as “Uploading”.
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” - P3 SETUP for parameter details.

UDP Menu Structure
......SYSTEM PORT (P3)
........P3 SETUP
..........MODE // Disable/5703 Setup Mode
..........5703 SUPPORT // Submenu for 5703 parameters
..........P3 BAUD RATE // Baud rate for the P3 Port
........DUMP MMI -> P3 // Transfer the MMI to Host
........UDP XFER <- P3 // Transfer Parameters From Host
........UDP XFER -> P3 // Transfer Parameters To Host
SYSTEM PORT (P3) Setup

Set MODE parameter (Tag No. 130) to DISABLE (default) using the
MMI MMI Menu Map
Set P3 BAUD RATE parameter (Tag No. 198) to 9600 (default) using 1 SERIAL LINKS
the MMI 2 SYSTEM PORT P3

1 Stop bit (fixed)
3 P3 SETUP
NO Parity (fixed) MODE
P3 BAUD RATE
8 bits (fixed)
XON/XOFF Handshaking (fixed)
UDP Transfer Procedure

UDP UpLoad (UDP XFER <- P3)
This is the transfer of the parameters from the host computer to the Converter. This information
is written directly to EEprom, so all the drive's current settings will MMI Menu Map
be overwritten.
1 SERIAL LINKS
• Connect the Converter to the host using the appropriate lead.
2 SYSTEM PORT P3
• Using a standard communications package prepare the host to DUMP MMI -> P3
transfer an ASCII file. Remember to set up the host's serial port first. UDP XFER <- P3
UDP XFER -> P3
• Set the P3 MODE parameter to DISABLE.
• Start uploading on the Converter by selecting UDP XFER <- P3 on the MMI and pressing
the UP (↑) key, as instructed.
• When the Converter says RECEIVING, begin the file transmission.
• The file ends in a :00000001FF which the Converter uses to close the file.
• As indicated, reset the Converter by pressing the E key.
UDP Download (UDP XFER -> P3)

This is the transfer of the parameters from the Converter to a host computer. This information
fully describes the Converter's settings in a Binary format.
• Using a standard communications package prepare the host to receive an ASCII file.
Remember to set up the host's serial port first.
• Perform a PARAMETER SAVE of the Converter's settings. This ensures the Dump matches
the Converter’s settings, (the listing is of the Converter's currently saved settings, i.e. held in
EEprom.
• Prepare the host PC to receive a file; use the file extension .UDP to differentiate it from
.MMI format files.
• Start downloading on the Converter by selecting UDP XFER -> P3 on the MMI and pressing
the UP (↑) key, as instructed.

• The file ends in a ctrl-z. With some packages this automatically closes the downloaded file
but if this is not the case, when the Converter says it has finished and the host has stopped
scrolling text, close the file by hand. The last line should read :00000001FF
The file can now be treated like any normal file.
Download MMI (MMI DUMP -> P3)

This is the transfer of the MMI description from the Converter to a host computer. This
information fully documents the Converter's settings in a textual format that is clear and easy to
read.
• Using a standard communications package prepare the host to receive an ASCII file.
Remember to set up the host's serial port first.
• Perform a PARAMETER SAVE of the Converter's settings. This ensures the Dump matches
the Converter’s settings, (the listing is of the current settings, NOT the saved settings held in
EEprom).
• Prepare the host PC to receive a file; use the file extension .MMI to differentiate it from
.UDP format files.
• Start downloading on the Converter by selecting DUMP MMI -> P3 on the MMI and
pressing the UP (↑) key, as instructed.
• The file ends in a ctrl-z. With some packages this automatically closes the file but if this is
not the case, when the Converter says it has finished and the host has stopped scrolling text,
close the file by hand.
• The file can now be treated like any normal text file.
MMI Dump
The following file was produced by performing a DUMP MMI -> P3 to a PC, as described
above. This file shows the Converter default settings.
Note: When printing this file, it is useful to select a proportionally-spaced text, such as Courier,
so that the text columns line-up. Note that in the list below, `menus’ have been
highlighted (bold) to make the list easier to use.
DIGITAL DC DRIVE ......ANOUT 1 (A7) [55 ] = 0.00 VOLTS
ISSUE:4.4 ......ANOUT 2 (A8) [56 ] = 0.00 VOLTS
..MENU LEVEL ......START (C3) [68 ] = OFF
....DIAGNOSTICS ......DIGITAL INPUT C4 [69 ] = OFF
......SPEED DEMAND [89 ] = 0.00 % ......DIGITAL INPUT C5 [70 ] = OFF
......SPEED FEEDBACK [207 ] = 0.00 % ......DIGIN 1 (C6) [71 ] = OFF
......SPEED ERROR [297 ] = 0.00 % ......DIGIN 2 (C7) [72 ] = OFF
......CURRENT DEMAND [299 ] = 0.00 % ......DIGIN 3 (C8) [73 ] = OFF
......CURRENT FEEDBACK [298 ] = 0.00 % ......DIGOUT 1 (B5) [74 ] = ON
......POS. I CLAMP [87 ] = 0.0 % ......DIGOUT 2 (B6) [75 ] = ON
......NEG. I CLAMP [88 ] = 0.0 % ......DIGOUT 3 (B7) [76 ] = OFF
......ACTUAL POS I LIM [67 ] = 0.0 % ......RAISE/LOWER O/P [264 ] = 0.00 %
......ACTUAL NEG I LIM [61 ] = 0.0 % ......PID OUTPUT [417 ] = 0.00 %
......INVERSE TIME O/P [203 ] = 200.00 % ......PID CLAMPED [416 ] = FALSE
......AT CURRENT LIMIT [42 ] = FALSE ......PID ERROR [415 ] = 0.00 %
......AT ZERO SPEED [77 ] = TRUE ......SPT SUM OUTPUT [86 ] = 0.00 %
......AT ZERO SETPOINT [78 ] = TRUE ......RAMP OUTPUT [85 ] = 0.00 %
......AT STANDSTILL [79 ] = TRUE ......SPEED SETPOINT [63 ] = 0.00 %
......STALL TRIP [112 ] = OK ......TERMINAL VOLTS [57 ] = 0.0 %
......RAMPING [113 ] = FALSE ......BACK EMF [60 ] = 0.0 %
......PROGRAM STOP [80 ] = TRUE ......TACH INPUT (B2) [308 ] = 0.0 %
......DRIVE START [82 ] = OFF ......ENCODER [206 ] = 0 RPM
......DRIVE ENABLE [84 ] = DISABLED ....SETUP PARAMETERS
......OPERATING MODE [212 ] = STOP ......RAMPS
......FIELD ENABLE [169 ] = DISABLED ........RAMP ACCEL TIME [2 ] = 0.1 SECS *
......FIELD DEMAND [183 ] = 0.00 % ........RAMP DECEL TIME [3 ] = 0.1 SECS *
......FIELD I FBK. [300 ] = 0.00 % ........CONSTANT ACCEL [4 ] = ENABLED
......FLD.FIRING ANGLE [184 ] = 0 DEG ........RAMP HOLD [118 ] = OFF
......ANIN 1 (A2) [50 ] = 0.00 VOLTS ........RAMP INPUT [5 ] = 0.00 %
......ANIN 2 (A3) [51 ] = 0.00 VOLTS ........ % S-RAMP [266 ] = 2.50 %
......ANIN 3 (A4) [52 ] = 0.00 VOLTS ........RAMPING THRESH. [286 ] = 0.50 %
......ANIN 4 (A5) [53 ] = 0.00 VOLTS ........AUTO RESET [287 ] = ENABLED
......ANIN 5 (A6) [54 ] = 0.00 VOLTS ........EXTERNAL RESET [288 ] = DISABLED

........RESET VALUE [422 ] = 0.00 % ..........ROLL WIDTH/MASS [481 ] = 100.00 %
........MIN SPEED [126 ] = 0.00 % ..........LINE SPEED SPT [498 ] = 0.00 %
......AUX I/O ..........FILTER T.C. [482 ] = 10
........AUX START [161 ] = ON ..........RATE CAL [483 ] = 10.00
........AUX JOG [227 ] = ON ..........NORMALISED dv/dt [484 ] = 0.00 %
........AUX ENABLE [168 ] = ON ..........INERTIA COMP O/P [485 ] = 0.00 %
........AUX DIGOUT 1 [94 ] = OFF ..........TENSION SCALER [486 ] = 1.0000
........AUX DIGOUT 2 [95 ] = OFF ......FIELD CONTROL
........AUX DIGOUT 3 [96 ] = OFF ........FIELD ENABLE [170 ] = ENABLED
........ANOUT 1 [128 ] = 0.00 % ........FLD CTRL MODE IS [209 ] = CURRENT CONTROL *
........ANOUT 2 [129 ] = 0.00 % ........FLD VOLTAGE VARS
........JOG/SLACK [496 ] = OFF ..........RATIO OUT/IN [210 ] = 90.0 %
........ENABLE [497 ] = OFF ........FLD CURRENT VARS
......JOG/SLACK ..........SETPOINT [171 ] = 100.00 %
........JOG SPEED 1 [218 ] = 5.00 % ..........PROP. GAIN [173 ] = 0.10
........JOG SPEED 2 [219 ] = -5.00 % ..........INT. GAIN [172 ] = 1.28
........TAKE UP 1 [253 ] = 5.00 % ..........FLD WEAK VARS
........TAKE UP 2 [254 ] = -5.00 % ............FLD. WEAK ENABLE [174 ] = DISABLED
........CRAWL SPEED [225 ] = 10.00 % ............EMF LEAD [175 ] = 2.00
........MODE [228 ] = FALSE ............EMF LAG [176 ] = 40.00
........RAMP RATE [355 ] = 1.0 SECS ............EMF GAIN [177 ] = 0.30
......RAISE/LOWER ............MIN FLD CURRENT [179 ] = 10.00 %
........RESET VALUE [255 ] = 0.00 % ............MAX VOLTS [178 ] = 100.00 %
........INCREASE RATE [256 ] = 10.0 SECS ............BEMF FBK LEAD [191 ] = 100
........DECREASE RATE [257 ] = 10.0 SECS ............BEMF FBK LAG [192 ] = 100
........RAISE INPUT [261 ] = FALSE ........FLD QUENCH DELAY [185 ] = 0.0 SECS
........LOWER INPUT [262 ] = FALSE ........FLD. QUENCH MODE [186 ] = QUENCH
........MIN VALUE [258 ] = -100.00 % ......CURRENT PROFILE
........MAX VALUE [259 ] = 100.00 % ........SPD BRK1 (LOW) [32 ] = 100.0 %
........EXTERNAL RESET [307 ] = FALSE ........SPD BRK2 (HIGH) [31 ] = 100.0 %
......SPECIAL BLOCKS ........IMAX BRK1(SPD1) [93 ] = 200.0 %
........DIAMETER CALC. ........IMAX BRK2(SPD2) [33 ] = 200.0 %
..........LINE SPEED [424 ] = 0.00 % ......INVERSE TIME
..........REEL SPEED [437 ] = 0.00 % ........AIMING POINT [204 ] = 110.00 %
..........MIN DIAMETER [425 ] = 10.00 % ........DELAY [199 ] = 10.0 SECS
..........MIN SPEED [426 ] = 5.00 % ........RATE [200 ] = 60.0 SECS
..........RESET VALUE [462 ] = 10.00 % ......STOP RATES
..........EXTERNAL RESET [463 ] = DISABLED ........STOP TIME [27 ] = 10.0 SECS
..........RAMP RATE [453 ] = 5.0 SECS ........STOP LIMIT [217 ] = 60.0 SECS
..........DIAMETER [427 ] = 0.00 % ........CONTACTOR DELAY [302 ] = 1.0 SECS
........TAPER CALC. ........PROG STOP TIME [26 ] = 0.1 SECS
..........TAPER [438 ] = 0.00 % ........PROG STOP LIMIT [216 ] = 60.0 SECS
..........TENSION SPT. [439 ] = 0.00 % ........PROG STOP I LIM [91 ] = 100.00 %
..........TAPERED DEMAND [452 ] = 0.00 % ........STOP ZERO SPEED [29 ] = 2.00 %
..........TENSION TRIM [440 ] = 0.00 % ......CALIBRATION
..........TOT.TENS.DEMAND [441 ] = 0.00 % ........ARMATURE V CAL. [20 ] = 1.0000
........TORQUE CALC. ........IR COMPENSATION [21 ] = 0.00 %
..........TORQUE DEMAND [432 ]= 0.00 % ........ENCODER RPM [22 ] = 1000 RPM
..........TENSION ENABLE [433 ] = ENABLED ........ENCODER LINES [24 ] = 1000
..........OVER WIND [434 ] = ENABLED ........ANALOG TACH CAL [23 ] = 1.0000
........SETPOINT SUM 2 ........ZERO SPD. OFFSET [10 ] = 0.00 %
..........INPUT 2 [445 ] = 0.00 % ........ARMATURE I (A9) [25 ] = BIPOLAR
..........INPUT 1 [443 ] = 0.00 % ........SPDFBK ALM LEVEL [180 ] = 50.0 %
..........INPUT 0 [444 ] = 0.00 % ........STALL THRESHOLD [263 ] = 95.00 %
..........RATIO 1 [446 ] = 1.0000 ........STALL TRIP DELAY [224 ] = 10.0 SECS
..........RATIO 0 [447 ] = 1.0000 ........OVER SPEED LEVEL [188 ] = 125.00 %
..........DIVIDER 1 [466 ] = 1.0000 ........FIELD I CAL. [182 ] = 1.0000
..........DIVIDER 0 [448 ] = 1.0000 ......INHIBIT ALARMS
..........LIMIT [449 ] = 100.00 % ........FIELD FAIL [19 ] = ENABLED
..........SPT SUM OUTPUT [451 ] = 0.00 % ........5703 RCV ERROR [111 ] = ENABLED
........PID ........STALL TRIP [28 ] = INHIBITED
..........PROP. GAIN [404 ] = 1.0 ........TRIP RESET [305 ] = TRUE
..........INT. TIME CONST. [402 ] = 5.00 SECS ........SPEED FBK ALARM [81 ] = ENABLED
..........DERIVATIVE TC [401 ] = 0.000 SECS ........ENCODER ALARM [92 ] = ENABLED
..........POSITIVE LIMIT [405 ] = 100.00 % ......CURRENT LOOP
..........NEGATIVE LIMIT [406 ] = -100.00 % ........CUR.LIMIT/SCALER [15 ] = 100.00 %
..........O/P SCALER(TRIM) [407 ] = 0.2000 ........MAIN CURR. LIMIT [421 ] = 200.00 %
..........INPUT 1 [410 ] = 0.00 % ........PROP. GAIN [16 ] = 24.68 *
..........INPUT 2 [411 ] = 0.00 % ........INT. GAIN [17 ] = 3.68 *
..........RATIO 1 [412 ] = 1.0000 ........AUTOTUNE [18 ] = OFF
..........RATIO 2 [413 ] = 1.0000 ........FEED FORWARD [136 ] = 9.22 *
..........DIVIDER 1 [418 ] = 1.0000 ........DISCONTINUOUS [137 ] = 25.92 % *
..........DIVIDER 2 [414 ] = 1.0000 ........ADDITIONAL DEM [30 ] = 0.00 %
..........ENABLE [408 ] = ENABLED ........BIPOLAR CLAMPS [90 ] = DISABLED
..........INT. DEFEAT [409 ] = OFF ........REGEN MODE [201 ] = ENABLED
..........FILTER T.C. [403 ] = 0.100 SECS ........POS. I CLAMP [301 ] = 0.00 % *
..........MODE [473 ] = 0 ........NEG. I CLAMP [48 ] = 0.00 % *
..........MIN PROFILE GAIN [474 ] = 20.00 % ........I DMD. ISOLATE [119 ] = DISABLED
..........PROFILED GAIN [475 ] = 0.0 ......SPEED LOOP
........TENS+COMP CALC. ........PROP. GAIN [14 ] = 10.00
..........STATIC COMP [487 ] = 0.00 % ........INT. TIME CONST. [13 ] = 0.500 SECS
..........DYNAMIC COMP [488 ] = 0.00 % ........INT. DEFEAT [202 ] = OFF
..........REWIND [489 ] = ENABLED ........ENCODER SIGN [49 ] = NEGATIVE *
..........FIX.INERTIA COMP [479 ] = 0.00 % ........SPEED FBK SELECT [47 ] = ARM VOLTS FBK
..........VAR.INERTIA COMP [480 ] = 0.00 % ........ADVANCED

..........ADAPTION ............ERROR REPORT [332 ] = 0x00C0
............MODE [268 ] = 0 ............PNO. 7 [333 ] = 0xFFFF
............SPD BRK1 (LOW) [269 ] = 1.00 % ..........P3 BAUD RATE [198 ] = 9600
............SPD BRK2 (HIGH) [270 ] = 5.00 % ........DUMP MMI -> P3
............PROP. GAIN [271 ] = 5.00 ........UDP XFER <- P3
............INT. TIME CONST. [272 ] = 0.500 SECS ........UDP XFER -> P3
..........I GAIN IN RAMP [274 ] = 1.0000 ......PNO CONFIG
..........POS. LOOP P GAIN [273 ] = 0.00 % ........PNO 112 [312 ] = 354 *
..........ZERO SPD. QUENCH ........PNO 113 [313 ] = 22 *
............ZERO SPD. LEVEL [284 ] = 0.50 % ........PNO 114 [314 ] = 209 *
............ZERO IAD LEVEL [285 ] = 1.50 % ........PNO 115 [315 ] = 18 *
........SETPOINTS ........PNO 116 [316 ] = 170 *
..........SETPOINT 1 [289 ] = 0.00 % ........PNO 117 [317 ] = 19 *
..........SIGN 2 (A3) [9 ] = POSITIVE ........PNO 118 [318 ] = 174 *
..........RATIO 2 (A3) [7 ] = 1.0000 ........PNO 119 [319 ] = 47 *
..........SETPOINT 2 (A3) [290 ] = 0.00 % ........PNO 120 [320 ] = 304 *
..........SETPOINT 3 [291 ] = 0.00 % ........PNO 121 [321 ] = 32 *
..........SETPOINT 4 [41 ] = 0.00 % ........PNO 122 [322 ] = 33 *
..........MAX DEMAND [357 ] = 105.00 % ........PNO 123 [323 ] = 31 *
..........MIN DEMAND [358 ] = -105.00 % ........PNO 124 [324 ] = 24 *
......STANDSTILL ........PNO 125 [325 ] = 49 *
........STANDSTILL LOGIC [11 ] = DISABLED ........PNO 126 [326 ] = 201 *
........ZERO THRESHOLD [12 ] = 2.00 % ........PNO 127 [327 ] = 210 *
........SOURCE TAG [306 ] = 89 ....SYSTEM
......SETPOINT SUM 1 ......SOFTWARE
........RATIO 1 [6 ] = 1.0000 ......CONFIGURE I/O
........RATIO 0 [208 ] = 1.0000 ........CONFIGURE ENABLE [39 ] = DISABLED
........SIGN 1 [8 ] = POSITIVE ........ANALOG INPUTS
........SIGN 0 [292 ] = POSITIVE ..........ANIN 1 (A2)
........DIVIDER 1 [419 ] = 1.0000 ............CALIBRATION [230 ] = 1.0000
........DIVIDER 0 [420 ] = 1.0000 ............MAX VALUE [231 ] = 100.00 %
........DEADBAND WIDTH [131 ] = 0.0 % ............MIN VALUE [232 ] = -100.00 %
........LIMIT [375 ] = 105.00 % ............DESTINATION TAG [246 ] = 100
........INPUT 2 [423 ] = 0.00 % ..........ANIN 2 (A3)
........INPUT 1 [100 ] = 0.00 % ............CALIBRATION [233 ] = 1.0000
........INPUT 0 [309 ] = 0.00 % ............MAX VALUE [234 ] = 100.00 %
....PASSWORD ............MIN VALUE [235 ] = -100.00 %
......ENTER PASSWORD [120 ] = 0x0000 ..........ANIN 3 (A4)
......CHANGE PASSWORD [121 ] = 0x0000 ............CALIBRATION [236 ] = 1.0000
....ALARM STATUS ............MAX VALUE [237 ] = 100.00 %
......HEALTH WORD [115 ] = 0x0210 ............MIN VALUE [238 ] = -100.00 %
......HEALTH STORE [116 ] = 0x0000 ............DESTINATION TAG [249 ] = 5
....MENUS ..........ANIN 4 (A5)
......FULL MENUS [37 ] = ENABLED ............CALIBRATION [239 ] = 1.0000
......MENU DELAY [38 ] = 31 * ............MAX VALUE [240 ] = 100.00 %
......LANGUAGE ............MIN VALUE [241 ] = -100.00 %
....PARAMETER SAVE ............DESTINATION TAG [250 ] = 48
....SERIAL LINKS ..........ANIN 5 (A6)
......MAIN PORT (P1) ............CALIBRATION [242 ] = 1.0000
........SRL LINK ENABLE [146 ] = ENABLED ............MAX VALUE [243 ] = 100.00 %
........GROUP ID (GID) [138 ] = 0 ............MIN VALUE [244 ] = -100.00 %
........UNIT ID (UID) [139 ] = 0 ............DESTINATION TAG [247 ] = 301
........PROTOCOL [148 ] = EI ASCII ........ANALOG OUTPUTS
........BAUD RATE [150 ] = 9600 ..........ANOUT 1 (A7)
........ESP SUP. (ASCII) [152 ] = DISABLED ............% TO GET 10V [245 ] = 100.00 %
........CHANGEBAND (BIN) [144 ] = 0.00 % ............MODULUS [362 ] = FALSE
........ERROR REPORT [158 ] = 0x00C0 ............OFFSET [464 ] = 0.00 %
........PNO. 7 [142 ] = 0xFFFF ............SOURCE TAG [251 ] = 62
........OPTION ADDRESS [499 ] = 0 ..........ANOUT 2 (A8)
........OPTION VERSION [303 ] = 0.00 ............% TO GET 10V [248 ] = 100.00 %
........PARITY [334 ] = EVEN ............MODULUS [363 ] = FALSE
......AUX PORT (P2) ............OFFSET [465 ] = 0.00 %
........SRL LINK ENABLE [147 ] = ENABLED ............SOURCE TAG [252 ] = 63
........GROUP ID (GID) [140 ] = 0 ........DIGITAL INPUTS
........UNIT ID (UID) [141 ] = 0 ..........DIGITAL INPUT C4
........PROTOCOL [149 ] = EI ASCII ............DESTINATION TAG [494 ]= 496
........BAUD RATE [151 ] = 9600 ..........DIGITAL INPUT C5
........ESP SUP. (ASCII) [153 ] = DISABLED ............DESTINATION TAG [495 ]= 497
........CHANGEBAND (BIN) [145 ] = 0.00 % ..........DIGIN 1 (C6)
........ERROR REPORT [159 ] = 0x00C0 ............VALUE FOR TRUE [103 ]= 0.01 %
........PNO. 7 [143 ] = 0xFFFF ............VALUE FOR FALSE [104 ]= 0.00 %
......SYSTEM PORT (P3) ............DESTINATION TAG [102 ]= 90
........P3 SETUP ..........DIGIN 2 (C7)
..........MODE [130 ] = DISABLED ............VALUE FOR TRUE [106 ]= 0.01 %
..........5703 SUPPORT ............VALUE FOR FALSE [107 ]= 0.00 %
............SETPT. RATIO [132 ] = 0.0000 ............DESTINATION TAG [105 ]= 118
............SETPT. SIGN [133 ] = POSITIVE ..........DIGIN 3 (C8)
............5703 INPUT [187 ] = 0.00 % ............VALUE FOR TRUE [109 ]= 0.01 %
............5703 OUTPUT [189 ] = 0.00 % ............VALUE FOR FALSE [110 ]= 0.00 %
..........BISYNCH SUPPORT ............DESTINATION TAG [108 ]= 119
............GROUP ID (GID) [329 ] = 0 ........DIGITAL OUTPUTS
............UNIT ID (UID) [330 ] = 0 ..........DIGOUT 1 (B5)
............ESP SUP. (ASCII) [328 ] = DISABLED ............THRESHOLD (>) [195 ]= 0.00 %
............CHANGEBAND (BIN) [331 ] = 0.00 % ............MODULUS [43 ] = TRUE

............SOURCE TAG [97 ]= 77 ......RESERVED
............INVERTED [359 ] = FALSE ........FACTORY USE ONLY
..........DIGOUT 2 (B6) ..........DO NOT ALTER !!
............THRESHOLD (>) [196 ] = 0.00 % ............MIN MMI CYCLE TM [162 ] = 80
............MODULUS [44 ] = TRUE ............ILOOP PI MODE [163 ] = 2
............SOURCE TAG [98 ] = 122 ............TOGGLE PERIOD [164 ] = 160
............INVERTED [360 ] = FALSE ............TOGGLE REF 1 [165 ] = 0.00 %
..........DIGOUT 3 (B7) ............SEL. INT/CUR/SPD [166 ] = 2
............THRESHOLD (>) [197 ] = 0.00 % ............TOGGLE REF 2 [167 ] = 0.00 %
............MODULUS [45 ] = TRUE ............PEAK HW SLOPE [190 ] = 163
............SOURCE TAG [99 ] = 125 ............PEAK HW OFFSET [226 ] = 195
............INVERTED [361 ] = FALSE ............HEALTH INHIBIT [211 ] = 0x0000
........CONFIGURE 5703 ............DISC ADAPT POT [194 ] = 2341
..........SOURCE TAG [134 ] = 89 ............TICK LENGTH [193 ] = 3840
..........DESTINATION TAG [135 ] = 41 ............AUTOCAL [310 ] = ENABLED
........BLOCK DIAGRAM ............IAINST OFFSET [311 ] = 1 *
..........RAISE/LOWER DEST [260 ] = 0 ............ZERO CUR OFFSET [213 ] = 1 *
..........RAMP O/P DEST [293 ] = 291 ............ZCD THRESHOLD [214 ] = 6
..........SPT SUM 1 DEST [294 ] = 289 ............12 BIT DAC [220 ] = DISABLED
..........PID O/P DEST [400 ] = 0 ............MMI FILTER T.C. [221 ] = 80
..........DIAMETER [431 ] = 0 ............PRED STEP [222 ] = 3
..........TAPER [442 ] = 0 ............SCAN THRESHOLD [223 ] = 4
..........SETPOINT SUM 2 [450 ] = 0 ............FIELD FBKSTOP [34 ] = 155
..........POS. I CLAMP [435 ] = 0 ............FIELD FFRSTOP [35 ] = 209
..........NEG. I CLAMP [436 ] = 0 ............IFFB DELAY [36 ] = 20
..........TENS+COMP CALC. [478 ] = 0 ............II [154 ] = 0x5900
........INTERNAL LINKS ............PRECSN/RESTR CHK [229 ] = 2
..........LINK 1 ............MIN BS DEAD TIME [101 ] = 1
............SOURCE TAG [364 ]= 0 ............PLL PROP [276 ] = 80
............DESTINATION TAG [365 ]= 0 ............PLL INT [277 ] = 32
..........LINK 2 ............FILTER T.C. [386 ] = 20
............SOURCE TAG [366 ]= 0 ............ARM ENDSTOP [279 ] = 12200
............DESTINATION TAG [367 ]= 0 ............SCAN TC [283 ] = 10
..........LINK 3 ............HF C/O DISC GAIN [280 ] = 1800
............SOURCE TAG [368 ]= 0 ............HF C/O FILTER TC [281 ] = 3
............DESTINATION TAG [369 ]= 0 ............BEMF THRESHOLD [282 ] = 4
..........LINK 4 ............ANALOG IP OFFSET [265 ] = 2
............SOURCE TAG [370 ]= 0 ............SYNC OFFSET [388 ] = 0
............DESTINATION TAG [371 ]= 0 ............dI/dt [205 ] = 35.00 %
..........LINK 5 ............DISABLE MEAN FBK [335 ] = FALSE
............SOURCE TAG [454 ]= 0 ............CHANGEOVER BIAS [336 ] = 0x4780
............DESTINATION TAG [455 ]= 0 ............STANDBY FIELD [471 ] = 50.00 %
..........LINK 6 ............3-PHASE FIELD [476 ] = DISABLED
............SOURCE TAG [456 ]= 0 ......PEEK
............DESTINATION TAG [457 ]= 0 ........PEEK DATA [123 ] = [0x0078] = 0000
..........LINK 7 ........PEEK SCALE [124 ] = 8.00
............SOURCE TAG [458 ]= 0 ......miniLINK
............DESTINATION TAG [459 ]= 0 ........VALUE 1 [339 ] = 0.00 %
..........LINK 8 ........VALUE 2 [340 ] = 0.00 %
............SOURCE TAG [460 ]= 0 ........VALUE 3 [341 ] = 0.00 %
..........LINK 9 ........VALUE 5 [343 ] = 0.00 %
............SOURCE TAG [467 ]= 0 ........VALUE 6 [344 ] = 0.00 %
..........LINK 10 ........VALUE 8 [379 ] = 0.00 %
............SOURCE TAG [469 ]= 0 ........VALUE 9 [380 ] = 0.00 %
..........LINK 11 ........VALUE 11 [382 ] = 0.00 %
............SOURCE TAG [390 ] = 0 ........VALUE 12 [383 ] = 0.00 %
............DESTINATION TAG [391 ] = 0 ........VALUE 13 [384 ] = 0.00 %
............ADVANCED [392 ] = OFF ........VALUE 14 [385 ] = 0.00 %
............MODE [393 ] = SWITCH ........LOGIC 1 [346 ] = OFF
............AUX.SOURCE [394 ] = 0 ........LOGIC 2 [347 ] = OFF
..........LINK 12 ........LOGIC 3 [348 ] = OFF
............SOURCE TAG [395 ] = 0 ........LOGIC 4 [349 ] = OFF
............DESTINATION TAG [396 ] = 0 ........LOGIC 5 [350 ] = OFF
............ADVANCED [397 ] = OFF ........LOGIC 6 [351 ] = OFF
............MODE [398 ] = SWITCH ........LOGIC 7 [352 ] = OFF
............AUX.SOURCE [399 ] = 0 ........LOGIC 8 [353 ] = OFF
_

5703 Support
This unit provides the facility to run a line of converters in speed-lock without the use of a 5720
Quadraloc controller; for accurate speed-holding, encoder feedback is required. Ratioed speed-
locking is supported, although the unit is not intended to replace the Quadraloc in applications
requiring high accuracy.
A 16-bit speed signal is passed between drives through a fibre-optic link and the P3 port on each
Converter (a port otherwise used only off-line for the upload and download of EEPROM data).
The port operates RS232 compatible signal levels, the 5703/1 converts these signal levels to
fibre optic signals for transmission and from fibre optics to RS232 for reception.
Hardware Description
The 5703/1 is housed in a DIN rail mounted box and is provided with a ribbon cable to connect
into the P3 port. The ribbon cable is 400 mm long to limit transmission errors, the primary unit -
to-unit interconnection is intended to be achieved by a fibre optic cable.
The 5703 unit itself is simply an electric signal-to-light converter and does not alter the signal in
any way, this is achieved within the software data of the Converter.
It is fitted with one fibre optic receiver and two fibre optic transmitters, the fibre optic receiver
has a fixed function to receive data from the preceding unit while the transmitter sends data to
the following unit. The additional transmitter can be used either to re-transmit the incoming
signal or provide a second transmission of the output signal, this gives the unit wide
functionality. When the link is in the normal right hand position, assuming the board is mounted
with the fibre optics downward, the second transmitter repeats the output signal. In the left hand
position it repeats the input signal.
The 5703/1 can be configured to point to any relevant parameter in the block diagram, the
default connections are such that the scaled input is connected to the "additional speed demand"
and the output to the "speed demand".
TRUNKING
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUTS
590 DRIVE
4-WAY
CONNECTOR
DIN
5703/1
4-WAY CONNECTOR RAIL
RECEIVER
1 2
P3 PORT
TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER
TRUNKING
PREFORMED 4-WAY CABLE
Figure 14-1 5703/1 Product Outline Drawing

Commissioning the 5703/1 MMI Menu Map
The P3 port is configured for 5703 support using the MMI. The 1 SERIAL LINKS
Converter’s RS422 serial link will then allow control over the scaling
of the input by an operator station or by a host processor. Refer to 2 SYSTEM PORT P3
Chapter 15: “The Default Application” for the block diagram, and
3 P3 SETUP
also see Figure 14-2 Wiring Diagram for 5703/1 Speed Repeater
below. 4 5703 SUPPORT
Refer to Chapter 6: “Programming Your Application” - 5703 SETPT. RATIO

SUPPORT for parameter details. SETPT. SIGN
5703 INPUT
The Inputs of the Drive 5703 OUTPUT
The speed setpoint from the 5703/1 enters the drive via the P3 port and, after scaling, is added
together with analog inputs 1, 2 and 3 (ramped).
IN BASIC TACHO-FOLLOWER MODE, ALL THE ANALOG INPUTS MUST BE
DISABLED TO PREVENT LOSS OF ACCURACY, yet it may be necessary in some
applications to provide analog inputs for trim signals or inch setpoints:
1. The ramp input may be disabled by taking terminal C7 (Ramp Hold) permanently high; the
ramp is automatically cleared when the drive is quenched, and its output will never move
from (exactly) zero. The ramp input may often be of use in line master drives; but the ramp
should be disabled in slave drives. Note that the P3 setpoint may be passed through the ramp
function; in such a case, the analog input to the ramp (terminal A4) is automatically
disconnected.
2. Analog input 1 (terminal A2) is used for inch setpoints. During normal running, the terminal
is shorted to 0V and the deadband function is used so that no signal at all passes to the
summing junction. The analog inch setpoints are set a little above the threshold of the
deadband so as to give the required inching speeds, forward or backward. Selection between
analog inching and absolutely zero analog input is thus accomplished automatically.
3. Analog input 2 (terminal A3) may be disabled by writing zero to its scaling block; this will
normally be done through the MMI at commissioning, but may be overridden by the serial
link. Alternatively, this input may be used for a local analog trim.
POWER
FROM 590
0V
PSU
+24V dc
RX
RS232
TO 590
TX
RS232
INPUT BUFFER OUTPUT
TIL
FIBRE OPTIC O/P 1

3
2
1
FIBRE OPTIC I/P 3 WAY JUMPER FIBRE OPTIC O/P 2
Figure 14-2 Wiring Diagram for 5703/1 Speed Repeater

Error Codes
ERROR REPORT (EE)
The EI-BISYNCH Prime Set contains the EE mnemonic. This is also an output parameter in the
MAIN PORT (P1), AUX PORT (P2) and SYSTEM PORT (P3) function blocks, where the
parameter value can be read and reset. Refer to the COMMS Option Technical Manual for
further details.
The following values are returned if an enquiry (reading information from the Converter) is
performed on this Read/Write parameter.
Writing any value to this parameter will set the value to >00C0. Clearing the last error value
may be useful in seeing a repetitive error re-occurring.
Value Description
>00C0 No error
>01C7 Invalid mnemonic
>02C2 Checksum (BCC) error
>03C2 Framing or overrun error
>04C8 Attempt to read from a write-only parameter
>05C8 Attempt to write to a read-only parameter
>07C7 Invalid message format
>07C8 Invalid data (encoding error)
>08C8 Data out of range

The Default Application 15-1
THE DEFAULT APPLICATION
5
1
Block Diagrams
The Converter is supplied with a pre-programmed set of parameters providing for basic speed
control. The following block diagrams show this factory set-up.
If you make any permanent changes to the block diagram, remember to update the non-volatile
memory within the Converter by performing a PARAMETER SAVE. Refer to Chapter 5: “The
Man-Machine Interface (MMI)” - Saving Your Application.
To return to the default application, refer to Chapter 5: “The Man-Machine Interface (MMI)” -
Special Key Combinations.

15-2 The Default Application

ANIN 1 (A2) SETPOINT SUM 1 SPEED LOOP ANOUT 1 (A2) DIGIN 1 (C6) CURRENT LOOP
– OUTPUT [246] – – SPT . SUM 1 OUTPUT – – OUT PUT [356] – 0.00% – [251] INPUT – – OUT PUT [102] – – AT CURRENT LIMIT [ 42] – FALSE
1.0000 – [230] CALIBRAT ION – 1.0000 – [ 6] RAT IO 1 – – SPEED FEEDBACK [207] – 100.00 % – [245] 10V CAL – 0.01 % – [103] VALUE T RUE – – CURRENT FEEDBACK [298] – 0.00%
100.00 % – [231] MAX VALUE – 1.0000 – [208] RAT IO 0 – – SPEED SETPOINT [ 63] – 0.00 % – [464] OFFSET – 0.00 % – [104] VALUE FALSE – – CURRENT DEMAND [299] – 0.00%
-100.00 % – [232] MIN VALUE – POSIT IVE – [ 8] SIGN 1 – – SPEED ERROR [297] – 0.00% FALSE – [362] MODULUS – – DIGIN 1 (C6) [ 71] – OFF 100.00 % – [ 15] CUR. LIMIT/SCALER –
– ANIN 1 (A2) – 0.00V POSIT IVE – [292] SIGN 0 – 10.00 – [ 14] PROP. GAIN – – ANOUT 1 (A7) [ 55] – 0.00V 200.00 % – [421] MAIN CURR. LIMIT –
1.0000 – [419] DIVIDER 1 – 0.500 SECS – [ 13] INT . T IME CONST . – ANIN 5 (A6) 45.00 – [ 16] PROP GAIN –
ANIN 2 (A3)
1.0000 – [420] DIVIDER 0 – OFF – [202] INT . DEFEAT – – 3.50 – [ 17] INT . GAIN –
OUTPUT [247] –
1.0000 – [233] CALIBRAT ION –
0.0 % – [131] DEADBAND – – – OFF
POSIT IVE – [ 49] ENCODER SIGN – 1.0000 – [242] CALIBRAT ION – AUT OT UNE [ 18]
100.00 % – [234] MAX VALUE –
105.00 % – [375] LIMIT – 12.00 % – [137] –
ARM VOLTS – [ 47] SPEED FBK SEL – ANOUT 2 (A8) 100.00 % – [243] MAX VALUE – DISCONT INUOUS
-100.00 % – [235] MIN VALUE –
0.00 % – [423] INPUT 2 – – [289] SET POINT 1 – 0.00 % – [ 30] ADDIT IONAL DEM –
– [252] INPUT – -100.00 % – [244] MIN VALUE –
– ANIN 2 (A3) – 0.00V
– [100] INPUT 1 – POSIT IVE – [ 9] SIGN 2 (A3) – 100.00% – [248] 10V CAL – – – 0.00V – [ 90] BIPOLAR CLAMPS –
ANIN 5 (A6)
0.00 % – [309] INPUT 0 – 1.0000 – [ 7] RAT IO 2 (A3) – 0.00% – [465] OFFSET – ENABLED – [201] REGEN MODE –
DIGIN 2 (C7) – SET POINT 2 (A3) [290] – 0.00% – [301] POS. I CLAMP –
FALSE – [363] MODULUS –
– OUT PUT [105] – RAMPS – [291] SET POINT 3 – – ANOUT 2 (A8) [ 56] – 0.00V ANIN 4 (A5) – [ 48] NEG. I CLAMP –
0.01 % – [106] VALUE T RUE – RAMP OUTPUT [ 85] – – [ 41] SET POINT 4 – – OUTPUT [250] – – [119] I DMD. ISOLATE –
0.00 % – [107] VALUE FALSE –
RAMPING [113] – FALSE 105.00% – [357] MAX DEMAND – 1.0000 – [239] CALIBRAT ION – – ILOOP SUSPEND [ 46] – T RUE
– DIGIN 2 (C7) [ 72] – OFF -105.00% – [358] MIN DEMAND – 100.00 % – [240] MAX VALUE –
10.0 SECS – [ 2] RAMP ACCEL T IME –
10.0 SECS – [ 3] RAMP DECEL T IME – CALIBRATION -100.00 % – [238] MIN VALUE –
ANIN 3 (A4) – [118] RAMP HOLD – – – ANIN 4 (A5) – 0.00V
T ERMINAL VOLT S [ 57] – 0.00%
– OUTPUT [249] – – [ 5] RAMP INPUT – – T ACH INPUT (B2) [ 58] – 0.0%
MAIN PORT P1
1.0000 – [236] CALIBRAT ION – 2.50 % – [266] % S-RAMP – – ENCODER [ 59] – 0 RPM
ENABLED – [146] SRL LINK ENABLE – DIGIN 3 (C8)
100.00 % – [237] MAX VALUE – 0.50 % – [286] RAMPING T HRESH. – – BACK EMF [ 60] – 0.00%
0 – [138] GROUP ID (GID) – – OUTPUT [108] –
-100.00 % – [238] MIN VALUE – ENABLED – [287] AUT O RESET – 0 – [139] UNIT ID (UID) – – STALL TRIP [112] – OK
0.01 % – [109] VALUE T RUE –
– ANIN 3 (A4) – 0.00V DISABLED – [288] EXTERNAL RESET – – FIELD I FBK. [181] – 0.0%
EI ASCII – [148] PROT OCOL – 0.00 % – [110] VALUE FALSE –
0.00 % – [422] RESET VALUE – 1.0000 – [ 20] ARMATURE V CAL. –
9600 – [150] BAUD RATE – – DIGIN 3 (C8) [ 73] – OFF
JOG/SLACK 0.00 % – [126] MIN. SPEED – 0.00 % – [ 21] IR COMPENSAT ION – CURRENT PROFILE
DISABLED – [152] ESP SUP. (ASCII) –
– OPERAT ING MODE [212] – ST OP 1000 RPM – [ 22] ENCODER RPM – 100.0 % – [ 32] SPD BRK 1 (LOW) –
0.00% – [144] CHANGEBAND (BIN)–
5.00 % – [218] JOG SPEED 1 – 1000 – [ 24] ENCODER LINES – 100.0 % – [ 31] SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) –
SYSTEM PORT P3 0x00C0 – [158] ERROR REPORT –
-5.00 % – [219] JOG SPEED 2 – 1.0000 – [ 23] ANALOG T ACH CAL – FIELD CONTROL 200.0 % – [ 93] IMAX BRK 1 (SPD1) –
0xFFFF – [142] PNO. 7 –
– SCALED 5703 INPUT – – – DISABLED
5.00 % – [253] T AKE UP 1 – 0.00 % – [ 10] ZERO SPD. OFFSET – FIELD ENABLE [169] 200.0 % – [ 33] IMAX BRK 2 (SPD2) –
EVEN – [334] PARITY –
0.0000 – [132] SET PT . RAT IO – – – VOLTAGE
-5.00 % – [254] T AKE UP 2 – BIPOLAR – [ 25] ARMATURE I (A9) – FIELD DEMAND [183]
0 – [400] OPT ION ADDRESS –
POSIT IVE – [133] SET PT . SIGN – – – 0 DEG
10.00 % – [225] CRAWL SPEED – 50.0 % – [180] SPDFBK ALM LEVEL – FLD. FIRING ANGLE [184]
– 5703 INPUT [187] – 0.00% OPT ION VERSION [303] – 0.00
FALSE – [228] MODE – 95.00 % – [263] STALL THRESHOLD – ENABLED – [170] FIELD ENABLE –
1.0 SECS – [355] RAMP RATE – – [189] 5703 OUTPUT – VOLTAGE – [209] FLD CTRL MODE IS –
10.0 SECS – [224] STALL TRIP DELAY –
– ESP SUP. (ASCII) [328] – DISABLED 90.0% – [210] RAT IO OUT /IN –
125.00 % – [188] OVERSPEED LEVEL –
0.00% – [331] CHANGEBAND (BIN) – DIGOUT 1 (B5) 100.00% – [171] SET POINT –
STOP RATES 1.0000 – [182] FIELD I CAL –
0x00C0 – [332] ERROR REPORT – – [ 97] INPUT – 0.10 – [173] PROP. GAIN –
– SPEED DEMAND [ 89] – 0x2710 – [267] POSIT ION COUNT –
0xFFFF – [333] PNO. 7 –
FALSE – [359] INVERTED – 1.28 – [172] INT. GAIN –
– PROGRAM STOP [ 80] – FALSE 10000 – [275] POSIT ION DIVIDER –
0x00 – [490] UPLOAD REMOTE –
0.00 % – [195] T HRESHOLD – DISABLED – [174] FLD. WEAK ENABLE – MENUS
10.0 SECS – [ 27] ST OP TIME –
T RUE – [ 43] MODULUS – 2.00 – [175] EMF LEAD – ENABLED – [ 37] FULL MENUS –
60.0 SECS – [217] ST OP LIMIT –
– DIGOUT 1 (B5) [ 74] – ON 40.00 – [176] EMF LAG – 30 – [ 38] MENU DELAY –
1.0 SECS – [302] CONT ACT OR DELAY – STANDSTILL DIAGNOSTICS 0.30 – [177] EMF GAIN – ENGLISH – [304] LANGUAGE –
0.1 SECS – [ 26] PROG STOP T IME – – AT ZERO SET POINT [ 78] – T RUE – SPEED FEEDBACK [207] – 0.00%
60.0 SECS – [216] PROG STOP LIMIT – 10.00% – [179] MIN FIELD CURRENT –
– AT ZERO SPEED [ 77] – – SPEED ERROR [297] – 0.00% 100.00% – [178] MAX VOLTS –
100.00 % – [ 91] PROG STOP I LIM – – AUX I/O
AT STANDST ILL [ 79] – T RUE – CURRENT DEMAND [299] – 0.00% 100 – [191] BEMF FBK LEAD –
2.00 % – [ 29] ST OP ZERO SPEED – – [306] ZERO SETPOINT – START (C3) [ 68] – OFF – CURRENT FEEDBACK [298] – 0.00% 100 – [192] BEMF FBK LAG – DIGOUT 3 (B7)
DISABLED – [ 11] STANDST ILL LOGIC – JOG INPUT (C4) [ 69] – – POS. I CLAMP [ 87] – 0.0% 0.0 SECS – [185] FLD. QUENCH DELAY – – [ 99] INPUT –
2.00% – [ 12] ZERO T HRESHOLD – ENABLE (C5) [ 70] – – NEG. I CLAMP [ 88] – 0.0%
ADVANCED QUENCH – [186] FLD. QUENCH MODE – FALSE – [361] INVERTED –
ON – [161] AUX ST ART –
0 – [268] MODE – – ACT UAL POS I LIM [ 67] – 0.0% 0.00 % – [197] T HRESHOLD –
ON – [227] AUX JOG –
1.00 % – [269] SPD BRK 1 (LOW) – – ACT UAL NEG I LIM [ 61] – 0.0% T RUE – [ 45] MODULUS –
RAISE/LOWER ON – [168] AUX ENABLE –
INHIBIT ALARMS
5.00 % – [270] SPD BRK 2 (HIGH) – – DRIVE ST ART [ 82] – OFF – DIGOUT 3 (B7) [ 76] – ON
– OUT PUT [264] – 0.00% OFF – [ 94] AUX DIGOUT 1 –
5.00 – [271] PROP. GAIN – – DRIVE ENABLE [ 84] – DISABLED – READY [125] –
0.00 % – [255] RESET VALUE – OFF – [ 95] AUX DIGOUT 2 –
0.500 SECS – [272] INT . T IME CONST . – – FIELD I FBK. [300] – 0.00% – HEALTHY [122] –
10.0 SECS – [256] INCREASE RATE – OFF – [ 96] AUX DIGOUT 3 –
–
1.0000 – [274] I GAIN IN RAMP – T ACH INPUT (B2) [308 – 0.0% – HEALTH WORD [115] – 0x0210 DIGOUT 2 (B6)
10.0 SECS – [257] DECREASE RAT E – 0.00 % – [128] ANOUT 1 –
0.00% – [273] POS. LOOP P GAIN – – ENCODER [206] – 0 RPM – HEALTH ST ORE [116] – OK – [ 98] INPUT –
FALSE – [261] RAISE INPUT – 0.00 % – [129] ANOUT 2 –
0.50 % – [284] ZERO SPD. LEVEL – ENABLED – [ 19] FIELD FAIL – FALSE – [360] INVERTED –
FALSE – [262] LOWER INPUT – – [496] JOG/SLACK –
1.50 % – [285] ZERO IAD LEVEL – ENABLED – [111] 5703 RCV ERROR – 0.00 % – [196] T HRESHOLD –
-100.00 % – [258] MIN VALUE – – [497] ENABLE –
INHIBITED – [ 28] STALL TRIP – T RUE – [ 44] MODULUS –
100.00 % – [259] MAX VALUE – T RUE – [305] T RIP RESET – – DIGOUT 2 (B6) [ 75] – ON
FALSE – [307] EXTERNAL RESET – ENABLED – [ 81] SPEED FBK ALARM –
ENABLED – [ 92] ENCODER ALARM –
Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 1

DIAMETER CALC. TAPER CALC. TENSION & COMP

– DIAMETER [427] – 0.00% – TAPERED DEMAND [452] – 0.00% – TENS+COMP [478] –
– MOD OF LINE SPEED [428] – 0.00% – TOT. TENS DEMAND [441] – 0.00% – INERTIA COMP [485] – 0.00%
– MOD OF REEL SPEED [429] – 0.00% 0.00 % – [438] TAPER – 0.00 % – [487] STATIC COMP –
– UNFILTERED DIAMETER [430] – 0.00% 0.00 % – [439] TENSION SPT. – 0.00 % – [488] DYNAMIC COMP –
0.00 % – [424] LINE SPEED – 0.00 % – [440] TENSION TRIM – ENABLED – [489] REWIND –
0.00 % – [437] REEL SPEED – 0.00 % – [479] FIX. INERTIA COMP –
PID
10.00 % – [425] MIN DIAMETER – 0.00 % – [480] VAR. INERTIA COMP –
– PID OUTPUT [417] – 0.00%
5.00 % – [426] MIN SPEED – 100.00 % – [479] ROLL WIDTH/MASS –
10.00 % – [462] RESET VALUE – – PID CLAMPED [416] – FALSE
0.00 % – [498] LINE SPEED SPT –
DISABLED – [463] EXTERNAL RESET – – PID ERROR [415] – 0.00%
10 – [482] FILTER T.C. –
5.0 SECS – [453] RAMP RATE – 1.0 – [404] PROP. GAIN –
10 – [483] RATE CAL –
5.00 SECS – [402] INT. TIME CONST. –
0.00 % – [484] NORMALISED dv/dt –
0.000 SECS – [401] DERIVATIVE TC –
1.0000 – [486] TENSION SCALER –
100.00% – [405] POSITIVE LIMIT –
SETPOINT SUM 2 -100.00% – [406] NEGATIVE LIMIT –
– SPT. SUM 2 [451] – 0.00% 0.2000 – [407] O/P SCALER (TRIM) –

TORQUE CALC.
0.00 % – [444] INPUT 0 – 0.00% – [410] INPUT 1 –
0.00% – [411] INPUT 2 – – POS. I CLAMP [435] – 0
1.0000 – [447] RATIO 0 –
1.0000 – [412] RATIO 1 – – NEG. I CLAMP [436] – 0
1.0000 – [448] DIVIDER 0 –
1.0000 – [413] RATIO 2 – 0.00 % – [432] TORQUE DEMAND –
0.00 % – [443] INPUT 1 –
1.0000 – [418] DIVIDER 1 – ENABLED – [433] TENSION ENABLE –
1.0000 – [446] RATIO 1 –
1.0000 – [414] DIVIDER 2 – ENABLED – [434] OVER WIND –
1.0000 – [466] DIVIDER 1 –
0.00 % – [445] INPUT 2 – ENABLED – [408] ENABLE –
100.00 % – [449] LIMIT – OFF – [409] INT. DEFEAT –
– OUTPUT 0 [491] – 0.100 SECS – [403] FILTER T.C. –
– OUTPUT 1 [492] – 0 – [473] MODE – LINK 11

20.00% – [474] MIN PROFILE GAIN –
– OUTPUT [391] – 0
– PROFILED GAIN [475] – 0.0
0 – [390] INPUT –
0 – [394] AUX INPUT –
miniLINK – 0 PNO 112 OFF – [392] ADVANCED –
0.00 % – [339] VALUE 1 – – 0 PNO 113 SWITCH – [393] MODE –
0.00 % – [340] VALUE 2 – – 0 PNO 114
0.00 % – [341] VALUE 3 – – 0 PNO 115
0.00 % – [342] VALUE 4 – – 0 PNO 116
LINK 12
0.00 % – [343] VALUE 5 – – 0 PNO 117
– OUTPUT [396] – 0
0.00 % – [344] VALUE 6 – – 0 PNO 118
0 – [395] INPUT –
0.00 % – [345] VALUE 7 – – 0 PNO 119
0 – [399] AUX INPUT –
0.00 % – [379] VALUE 8 – – 379 PNO 120
OFF – [397] ADVANCED –
0.00 % – [380] VALUE 9 – – 380 PNO 121
SWITCH – [398] MODE –
0.00 % – [381] VALUE 10 – – 381 PNO 122
0.00 % – [382] VALUE 11 – – 382 PNO 123
0.00 % – [383] VALUE 12 – – 383 PNO 124
0.00 % – [384] VALUE 13 – – 384 PNO 125 AUX PORT P2
0.00 % – [385] VALUE 14 – – 385 PNO 126 ENABLED – [147] SRL LINK ENABLE –
OFF – [346] LOGIC 1 – – 0 PNO 127 0 – [140] GROUP ID (GID) –
OFF – [347] LOGIC 2 – 0 – [141] UNIT ID (UID) –
OFF – [348] LOGIC 3 – EI ASCII – [149] PROTOCOL –
OFF – [349] LOGIC 4 – 9600 – [151] BAUD RATE –
OFF – [350] LOGIC 5 – DISABLED – [153] ESP SUP. (ASCII) –
OFF – [351] LOGIC 6 – USER FILTER 0.00% – [145] CHANGEBAND (BIN)–

OFF – [352] LOGIC 7 – – OUTPUT [296] – 0.00 0x00C0 – [150] ERROR REPORT –
OFF – [353] LOGIC 8 – 0.00 – [295] INPUT – 0xFFFF – [148] PNO. 7 –
Programming Block Diagram - Sheet 2

Ia
ANALOG O/P 3 A9 Ia
CURRENT FEEDBACK
[25]
ARM I (A9)
[301]
ANALOG I/P 5 A6 POS I CLAMP x
POS I CLAMP
[15]
I LIMIT (SCALER)
[48]
ANALOG I/P 4 A5 NEG I CLAMP x
[91]
[90] -1 PROGRAM STOP I LIMIT
DIGITAL I/P 1 C6 BIPOLAR CLAMPS
[32]
SPEED BRK 1 (LOW)
-1
[31] NEG I CLAMP
P3 PORT O/P [132] [133]
SPEED BRK 2 (HIGH)
P3 SETPOINT RATIO P3 SETPOINT SIGN
[93] PROGRAM STOP
P3 OUTPUT I MAX BRK 1 (LOW)
+ [41]
P3 PORT I/P [187]
x
- [423]
SETPOINT 4 SPEED DEMAND [33]
I MAX BRK 2 (HIGH) INVERSE TIME
P3 I/P INPUT 2 SPEED ERROR
[6] SETPOINT SUM 1 O/P
[8]
RATIO 1 SIGN 1
[289] [13]
CURRENT PROFILE OUTPUT
[100] SETPOINT 1 INT. TIME CONST.
ANALOG I/P 1
A +
A2 INPUT 1
B - [302]
[14]
[17]
INT. GAIN
PROP. GAIN [30]
CONTACTOR DELAY
ADDITIONAL I D [16]
[131] PROP. GAIN
DEADBAND WIDTH DIVIDER 1
[419] ++ + +
+ RAMP TO ZERO
[208] RATIO 0 SIGN 0
[292]
+ + - SPEED LOOP PI + -
[9]
SIGN 2 + CURRENT LOOP PI
[309]
A + + +
INPUT 0 STOP
[7] B -
RATIO 2 [420] SPEED FEEDBACK
[290] PROGRAM STOP DRIVE ENABLE
DIVIDER 0 SETPOINT 2 ACTUAL +Ve I LIMIT
ANALOG I/P 2 A3 x +
- ACTUAL -Ve I LIMIT CURRENT DEMAND
[119]
I DEMAND ISOLATE [421]
MAIN I LIMIT
ANALOG O/P 2 A8
SPEED SETPOINT
AT ZERO SETPOINT I LIMITED

ANALOG O/P 1 A7 [422]
[288]
EXT RESET RESET VALUE [291]
SETPOINT 3
ZERO SETPOINT
[302]
DIGITAL I/P 3 C8 [12]
STALL TRIP DELAY
SPEED THRESHOLD STANDSTILL AT STANDSTILL
[5] RAMP O/P

ANALOG I/P 3 A4 RAMP INPUT S RAMP & JOG/SLACK DELAY STALLED
RAMPING
ZERO SPEED
[118] [2]
DIGITAL I/P 2 C7 RAMP HOLD RAMP ACCEL TIME
CURRENT FEEDBACK
[3] [266]
RAMP DECEL TIME S RAMP % COMP
STALL THRESHOLD
DIGITAL O/P 1 B5 AT ZERO SPEED
[22]
ENCODER RPM ENCODER [47] [255]
RESET VALUE [259]
SPEED F/B SELECT
ENCODER
x +
-
MAX VALUE
KEY
[10] [307]
[49] ZERO SPEED OFFSET EXT RESET VALUE SET-UP PARAMETER
ENCODER SIGN
[261] RAISE /
- RAISE INPUT RAISE/LOWER O/P
LOGIC SET-UP PARAMETER
ANALOG TACH B2 x [262] LOWER
+ LOWER INPUT
TACH INPUT
[258]
VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
[23]
[256] MIN VALUE
ANALOG TACH CAL BACK EMF
INCREASE RATE LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
[257]
JOG/SLACK C4 JOG DECREASE RATE USER-CONFIGURABLE LINK
[123] TAG NUMBER
AUX JOG
JOG & TAKEUP SLACK
MODE
START
Main Block Diagram

FIELD I CAL
x
SCALED FIELD
CURRENT FEEDBACK
[182]
FIELD I FEEDBACK
[179] [171]
MIN FIELD FIELD SETPOINT
[177] [210]
[21] [170]
IR COMPENSATION BACK EMF EMF GAIN
FIELD DEMAND RATIO OUT/IN FIELD ENABLE
[191] [176]
[172]
BEMF LEAD EMF LAG INT. GAIN
CURRENT FEEDBACK x
[192] [175]
[173]
BEMF LAG EMF LEAD PROP. GAIN
FIELD FIRING ANGLE
SCALED
ARMATURE - - + - FIELD THYRISTOR
x
+ BEMF FILTER FIELD WEAKENING PID +
FIELD CURRENT PI
VOLTAGE + - FIRING CONTROL
FEEDBACK
[209]
[178]
[20] FIELD ENABLE FIELD CONTROL MODE
MAX VOLTS [174]
ARMATURE V CAL
FIELD WEAK ENABLE
TERMINAL VOLTS KEY
VALUE SET-UP PARAMETER
VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
TAG NUMBER
Field Control Block Diagram

KEY
VALUE SET-UP PARAMETER
[168]
AUX ENABLE
[11]
ENABLE
ENABLE C5 DRIVE ENABLE
STANDSTILL ENABLE
VALUE DIAGNOSTIC
AT STANDSTILL
FLD.QUENCH MODE LOGIC DIAGNOSTIC
[170] FLD ENABLE USER-CONFIGURABLE LINK

FLD ENABLE
[123] TAG NUMBER MOTOR OVERSPEED
MC PHASE COAST MISSING PULSE
LOCK STOP FIELD OVERCURRENT
DIGITAL O/P 3 B7 READY
FIN TEMPERATURE
MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE
OVERVOLTS
TACH FAIL
ENCODER
DIGITAL O/P 2 B6 HEALTHY
P3 PORT
STALL TRIP
STOP S
OVERCURRENT TRIP
START CALIBRATION BOARD
Q R ACCTS
AUTOTUNE ERROR
[161] AUTOTUNE ABORT
AUX START
START / RUN C3 FIELD FAIL

3 PHASE FAILED
PHASE LOCK FAILED
DELAY MC CLOSED
SIGNAL
S
S
Q
PROGRAM STOP B8 Q
R
R
PROG STOP
MAIN CONTACTOR
COAST STOP B9
TIMEOUT
NORMAL STOP
AT ZERO SPEED
TIMEOUT
PROGRAM STOP
AT ZERO SPEED
Start/Healthy Logic Block Diagram

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT TACH FAIL
LINK TEST
MICROTACH
INTERFACE
MODULE
AC TACH AC G1
Tx Rx
(2) LINE X (16) CHARACTER
E FIRING GATE ARRAY
ANALOG KEYBOARD
INPUT G2 DISPLAY
AC
G3
TACH
FEEDBACK
M DRIVERS
DC TACH DC- NON-
INPUT G4 MODULE ISOLATED
DC+ RS232
P3 PORT
A2 PULSE MASTER
ANALOG INPUT 1 +
A3 TRANSFORMERS
ANALOG INPUT 2 ANALOG
A4
ANALOG INPUT 3
ANALOG INPUT 4
A5
INPUT
RAM EEPROM SYSTEM
ARMATURE
M
EPROM
A6 Ia VOLTS
ANALOG INPUT 5
+10 VDC REF
B3
l I al
ISOLATE SLAVE
- ARMATURE
A1 Va
0 VDC
-10 VDC REF B4
ARMATURE VOLTS
A7
ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG ARMATURE CURRENT
A8 OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT 2 FIELD VOLTS L1
ACCT
A9 FIELD CURRENT CONTROL
BUFFERED IA RECTIFY & L2
C3 OVERCURRENT TRIP SIGNAL Ia
START/RUN BURDEN
C4 INPUT L3
JOG MISSING Ia PULSE Vf
C5 SCALING
ENABLE INSTANTANEOUS IA CAL
C6 DIGITAL
DIGITAL INPUT 1 INPUT AVERAGE IA
C7
DIGITAL INPUT 2 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
DIGITAL INPUT 3 C8
RESET
THERMISTOR
C2
MAIN If STACK MAIN
0 VDC C1 CONTACTOR
SUPPR
+24 VDC
C9
PROCESSOR ACCT PRESENT
D1
AC
B5 CODING EXTERNAL
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DIGITAL SERIAL LINK PRESENT
PHASE ROTATION ISOLATE & FIELD
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 B6 OUTPUT LEVEL SUPPLY
B7 (3) PHASE PRESENT SHIFT D2
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 AC
HEAT SINK
H5 SWITCH
(-)
RECEIVE H6 ISOLATED
(+) FIELD
H4 RS422 RUN
0V SCREEN VOLTS
SERIAL ISOLATE
H1 D4
(-) LINK
TRANSMIT +
H2 MODULE
(+)
P1 PORT
H3 HEALTH FIELD FIELD
0V SCREEN -10V +5V +15V
BRIDGE
TX +
NON-
-15V 0V
+10 +24
V V
D3
-
TX - ISOLATED PROGRAM START D8
RS422 QUENCH L
STOP POWER SUPPLY AUX
RX + SERIAL
D7 SUPPLY
RX - P2 PORT N
B8
PROGRAM STOP
PROGRAM STOP D5
START CONTACTOR L
CONTROL
DELAY RELAY D6
B9 N
COAST STOP
STOP
Functional Block Diagram

ISS. MODIFICATION ECN No. DATE DRAWN CHK'D
1 Initial Issue (HA467078) of re-formatted manual 13329 1/2/99 CM GDR

including ECN12620, ECN12912, ECN11945
2 Corrected to show new Microtach Encoder connections 13544 13/5/99 CM GDR
and External Motor Field Connections for power board
AH385621
3 3-12 Corrected +24V ac to +24V dc
3-15 External Motor Field Connections : Wire colours
are the wrong way round in the diagram. The wire
going to F8 should be yellow. The wire going to F16
should be red.
7-3 OVERVOLTS(VA) add the words “Loose
armature connection” to the top of this list.
8-1 Added Disposal information.
11-1 Added Vibration information 15028 07.04.00 FEP CM
11-8 Terminal Information (Power Board) : Field
Output F+ should be D4, Field Output F- should be
D3.
12-12 New Certificate removed pages 12-13, 12-14, (13908)
12-15, and 12-16.
4 Change of company name and logo to SSD Drives Ltd. 18354 4/11/04 CM GDR
5 Page 4-3 correctly printed 18606 18/02/05 CM GDR
6 Safety note about clamping during Autotune 18826 14/09/05 CM GDR
New filter part number and drawing (16912)
Product code for PROFIBUS updated (17653)
7 Parker name change. Other small amendments. 16843 01/02/07 CM GDR
(16753)
(S11563)
FIRST USED ON MODIFICATION RECORD
DRAWING NUMBER SHT. 1
ZZ467078 OF 1

590 Series DC Digital Converter: Product Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

590 Series DC Digital Converter: Product Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

590 Series

Compatible with Version 4.x Software

© Copyright 2007 Parker SSD Drives, a division of Parker Hannifin Ltd.

Chapter 1 GETTING STARTED

Chapter 2 AN OVERVIEW OF THE CONVERTER

Chapter 3 INSTALLING THE C ON V E R T E R

Chapter 4 OPERATING THE C ON V E R T E R

Menu Viewing Levels ...............................................................................................5-5

Chapter 6 PROGRAMMING YOUR APPLICATION

Chapter 7 TRIPS AND FAULT FINDING

Chapter 8 R O U T I N E M A I N TE N A N C E AND REPAIR

Chapter 9 CONTROL LOOPS

Terminal Information (Option Boards) ..................................................................11-14

Chapter 12 C E R T I F I C A T I O N FOR THE C O N VE R T E R

Chapter 13 S T A N D A R D AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

Control and Communications

Regenerative and Non-Regenerative Models

590 Series Digital Converter

Equipment Inspection and Storage

Packaging and Lifting Details

About this Manual

How the Manual is Organised

Application Block Diagram

590 Series Digital Converter

590 Series Digital Converter

When in Speed Control, speed increase

REMOTE START/STOP REMOTE START/STOP

5721 Operator Station and

1 Main converter assembly 10 Calibration panel

Control Control Circuits Fully isolated from power circuit (SELV)

Adjustments All adjustments in software can be altered by on-board

Table 2-1 Control Features

35A - 70A 110A - 150A 180A - 270A

360A 450A * 720A - 800A *

Current Rating (A) Model Overall Dimensions Fixing Centres

590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

Ventilation and Cooling Requirements

590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

Figure 3-1 Cabling Requirements

Cable Gland Requirements

Figure 3-3 360 Degree Screened Connection

590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

SPEED SETPOINT No. 1

SPEED SETPOINT No. 2/ RL S

10K ZERO DRIVE PE

Figure 3-4 Minimum Connection Requirements (`general purpose’ configuration)

590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

3-Phase Contactor (D5, D6)

Note: If the 3-phase contactor has a coil with an AC LINE CHOKE

3-Phase Supply, AC Line Choke (L1, L2, L3)

IMPORTANT: If a motor becomes completely short-circuited,

590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

MMI Menu Map

Motor Armature (A+, A-)

590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

Connections, page 3- 14.31H

590D DC Digital Converter - HA467078

Setpoint Ramp Input (A4, A6, B3, B4)

For non-reversing applications and 2

Speed Setpoint No. 1 (A2)

Speed Setpoint No. 2 / Current Demand (A3)